Lexmark C746dn Service manual
advertisement
Revised: April 19, 2012
Lexmark
™
C746n, C746dn, C746dtn,
C748e, C748de, C748dte
5026-3xx, 5xx
• Table of contents
• Start diagnostics
• Safety and notices
• Trademarks
• Index
Lexmark and Lexmark with diamond design are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and or other countries.
5026
Edition: April 19, 2012
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law
:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or the programs described may be made at any time.
Comments may be addressed to Lexmark International, Inc., Department D22A/032-2, 740 West New Circle Road,
Lexington, Kentucky 40550, U.S.A or e-mail at [email protected]. Lexmark may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, and MarkNet are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the
United States and/or other countries.
PrintCryption is a trademark of Lexmark International, Inc.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
© 2012 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101,
"Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.
Government end users (a) only as Commerical Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
P/N 12G2599
5026
Table of contents
Previous
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Power-on self test (POST) sequence
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
User status and attendance messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Table of contents
iii
Next
Go Back
5026
242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30, 244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service check . . . . 2-76
920.05—POST (power-on self test) printhead motor not connected error service check . . . . . 2-98
920.09—POST (power-on self test)—Four toner sensors not connected error service check 2-102
920.11—POST (power-on self test)—Two toner sensors not connected error service check 2-104
920.12—POST (power-on self test)—One toner sensor not connected error service check .2-105
iv
Service Manual
Previous
Next
Go Back
5026
920.13—POST (power-on self test) cartridge motor 1 not connected error service check . . 2-106
920.14—POST (power-on self test)—Cartridge motor 2 not connected error service check . 2-107
920.15, 920.20—POST (power-on self test)—Bad transfer module NVRAM data error service check
2-108
920.16—POST (power-on self test)—Bad printhead NVRAM data error service check . . . . . 2-108
920.17—POST (power-on self test)—Output bin cable not connected error service check . . 2-109
920.18—POST (power-on self test)—Cartridge motor 3 not connected error service check . 2-110
920.21—POST (power-on self test)—24 V power supply failure error service check . . . . . . . 2-112
920.23—POST (power-on self test)—Duplex motor not connected error service check . . . . 2-113
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Accessing test and diagnostic procedure menus
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Configuration menu (CONFIG MENU)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Previous
Next
Go Back
Table of contents
v
5026
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
Handing the photoconductor unit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Screw and retainer identification table
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
vi
Service Manual
Previous
Next
Go Back
5026
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Previous
Next
Go Back
Table of contents
vii
5026
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Assembly 8: Cable parts packet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Assembly 9: Optional 550-sheet media drawer and tray
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Assembly 10: Optional special media tray assembly
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Assembly 11: Optional high-capacity input option (HCIT)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Assembly 12: Options and features
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Previous
Next
Go Back
viii
Service Manual
5026
Notices and safety information
Previous
The following laser notice labels may be affixed to this printer.
Next
Laser notice
This product is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC
60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b)
AlGaAs laser producing visible radiation in the wavelength of 770-800 nanometers enclosed in a nonserviceable printhead assembly. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation exceeding Class I levels during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Go Back
Laser-Hinweis
Dieses Produkt ist in den USA zertifiziert und entspricht den Anforderungen der Vorschriften DHHS 21 CFR
Unterkapitel J für Laserprodukte der Klasse I (1), andernorts ist er als Laserprodukt der Klasse I zertifiziert, das den Anforderungen von IEC 60825-1 entspricht.
Laserprodukte der Klasse I werden nicht als gefährlich betrachtet. Der Drucker enthält im Inneren einen Laser der Klasse IIIb (3b) AlGaAs, der sichtbare Strahlung im Wellenlängenbereich von 770 bis 800 Nanometern abgibt. Dieser befindet sich in einer Druckkopfeinheit, die nicht gewartet werden kann. Das Lasersystem und der Drucker sind so konstruiert, dass unter normalen Betriebsbedingungen bei der Wartung durch den Benutzer oder bei den vorgeschriebenen Wartungsbedingungen Menschen keiner Laserstrahlung ausgesetzt sind, die die Werte für Klasse I überschreitet.
Avis relatif à l’utilisation de laser
Ce produit est certifié conforme aux exigences de la réglementation des Etats-Unis relative aux produits laser
(DHHS 21 CFR Sous-chapitre J pour Classe I (1)). Pour les autres pays, il est certifié conforme aux exigences des normes CEI 60825-1 relatives aux produits laser de classe I.
Les produits laser de Classe I ne sont pas considérés comme dangereux. L'imprimante contient un laser de
Classe IIIb (3b) AlGaAs qui produit des radiations visibles opérant sur une longueur d'onde de l'ordre de 770 à
800 nanomètres au sein d'un boîtier non démontable de la tête d'impression. Le système laser et l'imprimante ont été conçus de manière à ce que personne ne soit jamais exposé à des radiations laser dépassant le niveau de classe I dans le cadre d'un fonctionnement normal, de l'entretien par l'utilisateur ou de la maintenance.
Notices and safety information
ix
5026
Avvertenze sui prodotti laser
Questo prodotto è certificato negli Stati Uniti come prodotto conforme ai requisiti DHHS 21 CFR Sottocapitolo J per i prodotti laser di Classe I (1), mentre in altri paesi è certificato come prodotto laser di Classe I conforme ai requisiti IEC 60825-1.
I prodotti laser di Classe I non sono considerati pericolosi. La stampante contiene un laser Classe IIIb (3b)
AlGaInP che emette una radiazione visibile a una lunghezza d'onda di 770-800 nanometri all'interno dell'unità testina di stampa non sottoponibile a manutenzione. Il sistema laser e la stampante sono stati progettati in modo da impedire l'esposizione a radiazioni laser superiori al livello previsto dalla Classe I durante le normali operazioni di stampa, manutenzione o assistenza.
Avisos sobre el láser
Este producto se ha certificado en EE.UU. cumpliendo con los requisitos de DHHS 21 CFR subcapítulo J para los productos láser de Clase I (1) y en otros países está certificada como un producto láser de Clase I de acuerdo con los requisitos de IEC 60825-1.
Los productos láser de Clase I no se consideran peligrosos. Este producto contiene un láser interno de Clase
IIIb (3b) AlGaAs que produce una radiación visible en una longitud de onda de 770-800 nanómetros cerrado en un conjunto de cabezal de impresión que no se puede reparar. El sistema láser y la impresora se han diseñado para que el ser humano no acceda nunca a las radiaciones láser por encima del nivel de Clase I durante el funcionamiento normal, mantenimiento del usuario o condición de servicio prescrita.
Declaração sobre Laser
Este produto foi certificado nos EUA por estar em conformidade com os requisitos do DHHS 21 CFR, subcapítulo J, para produtos a laser de Classe I (1) e, nos demais países, foi certificado como um produto a laser de Classe I em conformidade com os requisitos da IEC 60825-1.
Os produtos a laser de Classe I não são considerados prejudiciais. A impressora contém, internamente, um laser de Classe IIIb (3b) AlGaAs que produz radiação visível no comprimento de onda de 770-800 nanômetros incluso em um conjunto do cabeçote de impressão cuja manutenção não é facilitada. O sistema do laser e a impressora foram projetados para que jamais haja acesso humano à radiação do laser acima dos níveis da
Classe I durante a operação normal ou a manutenção pelo usuário ou sob as condições de manutenção prescritas.
Aviso sobre o laser
Nos E.U.A., este produto está classificado como estando em conformidade com os requisitos DHHS 21 CFR,
Subcapítulo J, para produtos laser de Classe I (1) e, nas restantes regiões, está classificado como um produto de Classe I, estando em conformidade com os requisitos IEC 60825-1.
Os produtos laser de Classe I não são considerados perigosos. A impressora possui, no seu interior, um laser de Classe IIIb (3b) AlGaAs que produz radiação num comprimento de onda de 770-800 nanómetros. Este encontra-se fechado no conjunto da cabeça de impressão, que não é passível de manutenção. O sistema de laser e a impressora estão concebidos de forma a que nunca haja acesso humano à radiação laser que excede os níveis correspondentes à Classe I durante o funcionamento normal, manutenção ou em condições de assistência recomendada.
Previous
Next
Go Back
x
Service Manual
5026
Previous
Laserinformatie
Dit product is in de Verenigde Staten gecertificeerd als een product dat voldoet aan de vereisten van DHHS 21
CFR paragraaf J voor laserproducten van klasse I (1). Elders is het product gecertificeerd als een laserproduct van klasse I dat voldoet aan de vereisten van IEC 60825-1.
Laserproducten van klasse I worden geacht geen gevaar op te leveren. De printer bevat intern een laser van klasse IIIb (3b) AlGaAs die zichtbare straling produceert in een golflengtebereik van 770-800 nanometer in een niet-bruikbare printkopeenheid. Het lasersysteem en de printer zijn zodanig ontworpen dat gebruikers nooit blootstaan aan laserstraling die hoger is dan het toegestane niveau voor klasse I-apparaten, tijdens normaal gebruik, onderhoudswerkzaamheden door de gebruiker of voorgeschreven servicewerkzaamheden.
Next
Go Back
Lasermeddelelse
Dette produkt er certificeret i USA i henhold til kravene i DHHS 21 CFRi underafsnit J for klasse l (1)laserprodukter og er andre steder certificeret som et klasse I laserprodukt i henhold til kravene i IEC 60825-1.
Klasse I-laserprodukter er ikke anset som farlige. Printeren indeholder internt en klasse IIIb (3b) AlGaAs-laser, der producerer synlig stråling med en bølgelængde på 770-800 nanometer, indkapslet i en ikke-servicerbar printhovedsamling. Lasersystemet og printeren er udviklet på en sådan måde, at der ikke er en direkte laserstråling, der overskrider Klasse I-niveauet under normal brug, brugers vedligeholdelse eller de foreskrevne servicebetingelser.
Laserilmoitus
Tämä tuote on sertifioitu Yhdysvalloissa DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J -standardin mukaiseksi luokan I (1) lasertuotteeksi ja muualla IEC 60825-1 -standardin mukaiseksi luokan I lasertuotteeksi.
Luokan I lasertuotteita ei pidetä haitallisina. Laitteen tulostuspääkokoonpanossa (ei huollettavissa) on sisäänrakennettu luokan IIIb (3b) AlGaAs -laser, joka tuottaa silminnähtävää säteilyä 770-800 nanometrin aallonpituudella. Laserjärjestelmä ja tulostin ovat rakenteeltaan sellaisia, että käyttäjä ei joudu alttiiksi luokkaa 1 suuremmalle säteilylle normaalin käytön, ylläpidon tai huollon aikana.
Huomautus laserlaitteesta
Tämä tuote on sertifioitu Yhdysvalloissa DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J -standardin mukaiseksi luokan I (1) lasertuotteeksi ja muualla IEC 60825-1 -standardin mukaiseksi luokan I lasertuotteeksi.
Luokan I lasertuotteita ei pidetä haitallisina. Laitteen tulostuspääkokoonpanossa (ei huollettavissa) on sisäänrakennettu luokan IIIb (3b) AlGaAs -laser, joka tuottaa silminnähtävää säteilyä 770-800 nanometrin aallonpituudella. Laserjärjestelmä ja tulostin ovat rakenteeltaan sellaisia, että käyttäjä ei joudu alttiiksi luokkaa 1 suuremmalle säteilylle normaalin käytön, ylläpidon tai huollon aikana.
Notices and safety information
xi
5026
Laser-notis
Denna produkt är certifierad i USA i enlighet med kraven i DHHS 21 CFR underkapitel J för klass I (1)laserprodukter, och på andra platser certifierad som en klass I-laserprodukt i enlighet med kraven i IEC 60825-1.
Klass I-laserprodukter betraktas inte som skadliga. Skrivaren innehåller en klass IIIb (3b) AlGaAs-laser som producerar synlig strålning inom våglängden 770-800 nm, innesluten i en icke-servicebar skrivhuvudenhet.
Lasersystemet och skrivaren är utformade så att människor aldrig utsätts för laserstrålning som överskrider klass I-nivåerna under normala förhållanden vid användning, underhåll eller service.
Laser-melding
Dette produktet er sertifisert i USA for samsvar med kravene i DHHS 21 CFR, underkapittel J for laserprodukter av klasse I (1) og er andre steder sertifisert som et laserprodukt av klasse I som samsvarer med kravene i IEC
60825-1.
Laserprodukter av klasse I anses ikke som helseskadelige. Skriveren inneholder en intern AlGaAs-laser av klasse IIIb (3b) som produserer synlig stråling i bølgelender på 770-800 nanometer i en ikke-reparerbar skrivehodeenhet. Lasersystemet og skriveren er utformet slik at mennesker ikke utsettes for laserstråling utover nivåene i klasse I under normal drift, vedlikehold eller foreskrevet service.
Avís sobre el Làser
Este producto está certificado en Estados Unidos para el cumplimiento de los requisitos estipulados en DHHS
21 CFR Subcapítulo J para productos láser de Clase I (1), y cuenta con certificación para otros países como producto láser de Clase I de conformidad con los requisitos de IEC 60825-1.
Los productos láser de Clase I no se consideran peligrosos. La impresora contiene en su interior radiación láser visible AlGaAs Clase IIIb (3b) en la longitud de onda de 770 - 800 nanómetros dentro de un mecanismo de cabezal de impresión que no requiere servicio técnico. La impresora y el sistema láser están diseñados de forma tal que no exista nunca acceso humano a radiación láser que supere los niveles de Clase I durante el funcionamiento normal, las tareas de mantenimiento por parte del usuario o las condiciones de servicio técnico estipuladas.
Previous
Next
Go Back
xii
Service Manual
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Notices and safety information
xiii
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
xiv
Service Manual
5026
Lithium warning
CAUTION
This product contains a lithium battery. THERE IS A RISK OF EXPLOSION IF THE BATTERY
IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. Discard used batteries according to the battery manufacturer’s instructions and local regulations.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Safety information
•
The safety of this product is based on testing and approvals of the original design and specific components. The manufacturer is not responsible for safety in the event of use of unauthorized replacement parts.
•
The maintenance information for this product has been prepared for use by a professional service person and is not intended to be used by others.
•
There may be an increased risk of electric shock and personal injury during disassembly and servicing of this product. Professional service personnel should understand this and take necessary precautions.
•
CAUTION:
When you see this symbol, there is a danger from hazardous voltage in the area of the product where you are working. Unplug the product before you begin, or use caution if the product must receive power in order to perform the task.
Consignes de sécurité
•
La sécurité de ce produit repose sur des tests et des agréations portant sur sa conception d'origine et sur des composants particuliers. Le fabricant n'assume aucune responsabilité concernant la sécurité en cas d'utilisation de pièces de rechange non agréées.
•
Les consignes d'entretien et de réparation de ce produit s'adressent uniquement à un personnel de maintenance qualifié.
•
Le démontage et l'entretien de ce produit pouvant présenter certains risques électriques, le personnel d'entretien qualifié devra prendre toutes les précautions nécessaires.
•
ATTENTION :
Ce symbole indique la présence d'une tension dangereuse dans la partie du produit sur laquelle vous travaillez. Débranchez le produit avant de commencer ou faites preuve de vigilance si l'exécution de la tâche exige que le produit reste sous tension.
Norme di sicurezza
•
La sicurezza del prodotto si basa sui test e sull'approvazione del progetto originale e dei componenti specifici. Il produttore non è responsabile per la sicurezza in caso di sostituzione non autorizzata delle parti.
•
Le informazioni riguardanti la manutenzione di questo prodotto sono indirizzate soltanto al personale di assistenza autorizzato.
•
Durante lo smontaggio e la manutenzione di questo prodotto, il rischio di subire scosse elettriche e danni alla persona è più elevato. Il personale di assistenza autorizzato deve, quindi, adottare le precauzioni necessarie.
•
ATTENZIONE:
Questo simbolo indica la presenza di tensione pericolosa nell'area del prodotto.
Scollegare il prodotto prima di iniziare o usare cautela se il prodotto deve essere alimentato per eseguire l'intervento.
Lithium warning
xv
5026
Sicherheitshinweise
•
Die Sicherheit dieses Produkts basiert auf Tests und Zulassungen des ursprünglichen Modells und bestimmter Bauteile. Bei Verwendung nicht genehmigter Ersatzteile wird vom Hersteller keine
Verantwortung oder Haftung für die Sicherheit übernommen.
•
Die Wartungsinformationen für dieses Produkt sind ausschließlich für die Verwendung durch einen
Wartungsfachmann bestimmt.
•
Während des Auseinandernehmens und der Wartung des Geräts besteht ein zusätzliches Risiko eines elektrischen Schlags und körperlicher Verletzung. Das zuständige Fachpersonal sollte entsprechende
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen treffen.
•
ACHTUNG:
Dieses Symbol weist auf eine gefährliche elektrische Spannung hin, die in diesem
Bereich des Produkts auftreten kann. Ziehen Sie vor den Arbeiten am Gerät den Netzstecker des
Geräts, bzw. arbeiten Sie mit großer Vorsicht, wenn das Produkt für die Ausführung der Arbeiten an den Strom angeschlossen sein muß.
Pautas de Seguridad
•
La seguridad de este producto se basa en pruebas y aprobaciones del diseño original y componentes específicos. El fabricante no es responsable de la seguridad en caso de uso de piezas de repuesto no autorizadas.
•
La información sobre el mantenimiento de este producto está dirigida exclusivamente al personal cualificado de mantenimiento.
•
Existe mayor riesgo de descarga eléctrica y de daños personales durante el desmontaje y la reparación de la máquina. El personal cualificado debe ser consciente de este peligro y tomar las precauciones necesarias.
•
PRECAUCIÓN:
este símbolo indica que el voltaje de la parte del equipo con la que está trabajando es peligroso. Antes de empezar, desenchufe el equipo o tenga cuidado si, para trabajar con él, debe conectarlo.
Informações de Segurança
•
A segurança deste produto baseia-se em testes e aprovações do modelo original e de componentes específicos. O fabricante não é responsável pela segunrança, no caso de uso de peças de substituição não autorizadas.
•
As informações de segurança relativas a este produto destinam-se a profissionais destes serviços e não devem ser utilizadas por outras pessoas.
•
Risco de choques eléctricos e ferimentos graves durante a desmontagem e manutenção deste produto.
Os profissionais destes serviços devem estar avisados deste facto e tomar os cuidados necessários.
•
CUIDADO:
Quando vir este símbolo, existe a possível presença de uma potencial tensão perigosa na zona do produto em que está a trabalhar. Antes de começar, desligue o produto da tomada eléctrica ou seja cuidadoso caso o produto tenha de estar ligado à corrente eléctrica para realizar a tarefa necessária.
Previous
Next
Go Back
xvi
Service Manual
5026
Informació de Seguretat
•
La seguretat d'aquest producte es basa en l'avaluació i aprovació del disseny original i els components específics.
El fabricant no es fa responsable de les qüestions de seguretat si s'utilitzen peces de recanvi no autoritzades.
•
La informació pel manteniment d’aquest producte està orientada exclusivament a professionals i no està destinada a ningú que no ho sigui.
•
El risc de xoc elèctric i de danys personals pot augmentar durant el procés de desmuntatge i de servei d’aquest producte. El personal professional ha d’estar-ne assabentat i prendre les mesures convenients.
•
PRECAUCIÓ:
aquest símbol indica que el voltatge de la part de l'equip amb la qual esteu treballant és perillós. Abans de començar, desendolleu l'equip o extremeu les precaucions si, per treballar amb l'equip, l'heu de connectar.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Safety information
xvii
5026
Preface
This manual contains maintenance procedures for service personnel. It is divided into the following chapters:
1.
General information
contains a general description of the printer and the maintenance approach used to repair it. Special tools and test equipment, as well as general environmental and safety instructions, are discussed.
2.
Diagnostic information
contains an error indicator table, symptom tables, and service checks used to isolate failing field replaceable units (FRUs).
3.
Diagnostic aids
contains tests and checks used to locate or repeat symptoms of printer problems.
4.
Repair information
provides instructions for making printer adjustments and removing and installing
FRUs.
5.
Connector locations
uses illustrations to identify the connector locations and test points on the printer.
6.
Preventive maintenance
contains the lubrication specifications and recommendations to prevent problems.
7.
Parts catalog
contains illustrations and part numbers for individual FRUs.
Appendix A
contains service tips and information.
Appendix B
contains representative print samples.
Conventions
Note:
A note provides additional information.
Warning:
A warning identifies something that might damage the product hardware or software.
There are several types of caution statements:
CAUTION
A caution identifies something that might cause a servicer harm.
Previous
Next
Go Back
CAUTION
This type of caution indicates there is a danger from hazardous voltage in the area of the product where you are working. Unplug the product before you begin, or use caution if the product must receive power in order to perform the task.
CAUTION
This type of caution indicates a hot surface.
CAUTION
This type of caution indicates a tipping hazard.
xviii
Service Manual
5026
Navigation buttons
This manual contains navigation buttons in the right margin of each page, making it easier and quicker to navigate.
Button
Previous
Description
Click to move the document view backward by one page.
Next
Click to move the document view forward by one page.
Go Back
Click to return to the last page viewed.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Conventions
xix
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
xx
Service Manual
1. General information
The Lexmark™ C746x and C748x family of color laser printers.
Models
Printer name
Lexmark C746n
Lexmark C746dn
Lexmark C746dtn
Lexmark C748e
Lexmark C748de
Lexmark C748dte
Machine type and model
5026-310
5026-330
5026-330
5026-510
5026-530
5026-530
Description
Network-ready
Network-ready with duplex
Network-ready with duplex and 550 sheet tray
Network-ready with etask touch screen
Network-ready with etask touch screen and duplex
Network-ready with etask touch screen, duplex, and
550 sheet tray
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Options
5
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
General information
1-1
5026
Previous
Number Description
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Standard output bin
Paper support
Printer operator panel
Standard 550-sheet stray (Tray 1)
Multipurpose feeder
Optional 550-sheet specialty media drawer
Optional 550-sheet tray
Optional 2,000-sheet high.capacity feeder
Note:
Some configurations may require a caster base for stability.
Media options
The C746x and C748x printers support the 550-sheet drawer, special media drawers, and 2000-sheet highcapacity input tray. The C746x and C748x printers support up to four input options. The options can include any combination of 550 sheet drawers and 550 sheet Specialty Media Drawers, with a maximum of one 2000 sheet drawer (always at the lowest position.) A caster base is required with some configurations. Including the base machine capacity of 650 sheets, the C746x and C748x supports up to 4300 sheets.
The Lexmark C74x options are compatible with the Lexmark C73x SFP, X73x MFP, and X74x MFP, but not with any other Lexmark printers. No other options are supported by the C74x.
The media options include:
•
550-Sheet Drawer
—This optional input source installs beneath the printer, and it holds approximately 550 sheets of (20 lb.) paper.
•
High Capacity Input Tray
—This optional input source installs beneath the printer, and it holds approximately 2000 sheets of (20 lb.) paper.
•
Specialty Media Drawer
—This optional input source installs beneath the printer, and it holds approximately 550 sheets of (20 lb.) paper, or 85 standard envelopes.
Memory options
•
Additional memory card
—The memory options for the C746x and C748x printers are 200 pin DDR2,
SODIMM, and they are available at 256MB, 512MB, and 1GB sizes.
•
Flash memory card
—Flash Memory cards are available in 256MB.
•
Hard disk
—If larger storage is required, an optional hard disk is available.
Next
Go Back
1-2
Service Manual
5026
Printer specifications
Dimensions
The following table contains the dimensions and weight for each of the respective printer models. This does not include packaging.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Basic printer (C746n/dn)
Basic printer (C748e/de)
C746dtn printer, with 550-sheet optional drawer
C748dte printer, with 550-sheet optional drawer
550-sheet drawer
550-sheet special media drawer
2000-sheet high capacity feeder
Spacer
Caster Base
Height
454.7 mm
(17.9 in)
454.7 mm
(17.9 in)
581.7 mm
(22.9 in)
581.7mm
(22.9 in)
169.0 mm
(6.6 in)
169.0 mm
(6.6 in)
387.0 mm
(15.2 in)
169.0 mm
(6.6 in)
127.0 mm
(5.0 in)
Width
435.0 mm
(17.1 in)
435.0 mm
(17.1 in)
435.0 mm
(17.1 in)
435.0 mm
(17.1 in)
435.0 mm
(17.1 in)
435.0 mm
(17.1 in)
435.0 mm
(17.1 in)
435 mm
(17.1 in)
778 mm
(30.6 in)
Depth
400.0 mm
(15.7 in)
400.0 mm
(15.7 in)
545.0 mm
(21.5 in)
545.0 mm
(21.5 in)
545.0 mm
(21.5 in)
545.0 mm
(21.5 in)
545.0 mm
(21.5 in)
545 mm
(21.5 in)
812.0 mm
(32.0 in)
Weight
25.2 kg
(55.6 lbs)
25.6 kg
(56.4 lbs)
29.7 kg
(65.5 lbs)
30.1kg
(66.4 lbs)
4.5 kg
(10.0 lbs)
4.5 kg
(10.0 lbs)
26.1 kg
(57.5 lbs)
3.2 kg
(7.0 lbs)
43.1 kg
(95.0 lbs)
General information
1-3
5026
Clearances
5
4
3
1
2
Memory
Number Description
1
2
3
4
5
Right side
Front
Left side
Rear
Top
Clearance
101.6 mm (4 in.)
609.6 mm (24 in.)
152.4 mm (6 in.)
152.4 mm (6 in.)
304.8 mm (12 in.)
C746 C748
Standard memory
—The standard RAM is soldered onto the system board.
Memory size
512MB
Optional memory
—Optional DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module) is a card that can be plugged into an available memory slot on the system board. Flash memory is a card that can also be plugged into an available slot.
Maximum number of memory (DIMM) slots
1 1
Maximum number of flash memory slots
1
512MB
1
DIMM memory sizes available
256MB, 512MB, 1024MB 256MB, 512MB, 1024MB
Flash (Nand Flash)
256 256
Maximum possible memory
1536MB 1536MB
Previous
Next
Go Back
1-4
Service Manual
Expansion opportunities
Interface card expansion slots
Code Enhancement Socket
(application solution firmware)
Hard disk Interface
(for optional hard disk)
1
2
1
Resolution
The following resolutions are available:
•
4800CQ (default resolution)
•
1200 x 1200 dpi (at reduced printer speed)
Data streams
•
XPS
•
PCL 6 emulation (includes PCL 5e and PCL XL interpreters)
•
PostScript 3 emulation
•
PDF 1.6
•
PPDS
•
PictBridge
•
HTML (including DBCS)
•
Direct Image (TIFF, TIF, JPEG, JPG, GIF, PNG, BMP, PCX, and DCX)
Environment specifications
Environment
Operating
Air temperature—Operating
Air temperature—Power off
Air Relative Humidity
Wet Bulb Temperature—Operating
Web Bulb Temperature—Power off
Altitude
Ambient Operating Environment*
Shipping and storage
Cartridges (packaged)
Printer with Cartridges (packaged)
Printer without Cartridges
Air Relative Humidity
Altitude
Specifications
15.6° to 32.2° C (60° to 90° F)
10° to 40° C (50° to 104° F)
Relative humidity 8% to 80%
22.8° C (73.0° F) Maximum
26.7° C (80.1° F) Maximum
0–3,048 meters (10,000 ft.)
15.6° to 32.2° C (60° to 90° F) and 8% to 80% RH
-40° C to 40° C (104° Fahrenheit)
-40° C to 40° C (104° Fahrenheit)
-40° C to 40° C (104° Fahrenheit)
Relative humidity 8% to 80%
0–10,300 meters (34,000 feet)
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
General information
1-5
5026
Environment Specifications
Web Bulb Temperature—Power Off 26.7° C (80.1° F) Maximum
* In some cases performance specifications, such as paper OCF and EP cartridge usage, are specified to be measured at an ambient condition.
Electrical and power specifications
The following table specifies nominal average power requirements for the basic printer configurations. All power levels are shown in Watts (W). Maximum current is given in Amperes (A).
Printing states
Off
Sleep mode
Hibernate mode
Ready Mode
Simplex Printing
Duplex Printing
Typical Electricity Consumption
Test
Typical Electricity Consumption
Test (Eco-Mode)
Average current while printing
(110 Volts)
Average current while printing
(120 Volts)
Average current while printing
(230 Volts)
C746n/dn/dtn
0W
6.8W
0.55W
48W
535W
420W
3.561 kwh / wk
2.375 kwh / wk
8.3 A
7.5 A
3.8 A
Lexmark C748e/de/dte
0W
7.3W
0.55W
48W
535W
420W
3.687 kwh / wk
2.491 kwh / wk
8.3 A
7.5 A
3.8 A
Low-voltage models
•
110 to 127 V at 50 to 60 Hertz (Hz) nominal
•
99 to 139.7 V, extreme
•
100 V at 50 to 60 Hertz (Hz) nominal
•
90 to 121 V, extreme
High-voltage models
•
220 to 240 V at 50 to 60 Hz (not available in all countries)
•
198 to 259 V, extreme
Notes:
•
Using a power converter or inverter with the Lexmark C740 Series printers is not recommended.
•
The C740 series duplex models (C746dn, C746dtn, C748de, C748dte) are Energy Star Qualified.
•
All models ship with Sleep Mode = On.
•
The default time out to Sleep mode is 30 minutes.
Previous
Next
Go Back
1-6
Service Manual
5026
Acoustic specifications
All acoustic measurements are made in accordance with ISO 7779:1999—Accoustics: Measurement of airborne
noise emitted by information technology and telecommunications
and reported in conformance with ISO 9296:
1988-04-15—Accoustics Declared noise emission values of computer and business equipment.
Previous
Next
Operating mode
1 meter average sound pressure
(dBA)
Declared sound power level
(Bels)
Go Back
C746
Idle
Simplex printing (mono)
Simplex printing (color)
Duplex printing (mono)
Duplex printing (color)
Quiet mode printing (mono)
Quiet mode printing (color)
C748
Idle
Simplex printing (mono)
Simplex printing (color)
Duplex printing (mono)
Duplex printing (color)
Quiet mode printing (mono)
Quiet mode printing (color)
32 dB
54 dB
55 dB
53 dB
55 dB
47 dB
48 dB
32 dB
53 dB
54 dB
54 dB
55 dB
48 dB
48 dB
4.8 Bels
6.8 Bels
6.9 Bels
6.9 Bels
6.9 Bels
6.3 Bels
6.3 Bels
4.8 Bels
6.8 Bels
6.8 Bels
6.9 Bels
6.9 Bels
6.3 Bels
6.3 Bels
General information
1-7
5026
Media specifications
Paper designed for use with xerographic copiers should provide satisfactory print quality and feed reliability.
Other types of media may be suitable. It is recommended that users test any particular brand for suitability to their applications. Refer to the printer User's Guide for additional media specifications.
Paper
Follow the media guidelines below for successful printing:
•
Rough, highly textured, limp, or pre-curled papers will result in lower print quality and more frequent paper feed failures.
•
Colored papers must be able to withstand 190° C (374° F) fusing temperature.
•
Preprinted forms and letterheads must be able to withstand 190° C (374° F) fusing temperature and should be selected using guidelines found in the printer User’s Guide. The chemical process used in preprinting may render some papers unsuitable for use.
•
Unsuitable papers include:
–
Multi-part forms and documents
–
Chemically treated papers; coated
–
Synthetic and thermal papers
–
A5 paper less than 80 g/m
–
2
(21 lb)
Recycled paper less than 75 g/m
2
(20 lb)
–
Preprinted papers requiring a high degree of registration.
–
Recycled paper less than 80 g/m
2
(21 lb) may cause unacceptable results.
Envelopes
•
All envelopes should be new, unused, and without package damage.
•
Envelopes with excessive curl or twist exceeding 6 mm, those stuck together, those with bent corners or nicked edges, or those that interlock should not be used.
•
Minimum weight: 60 g/m2 (16 lb.)
•
The following envelopes should not be used:
•
Envelopes with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or deep embossing
•
Envelopes with metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
•
Envelopes with exposed flap adhesive when the flap is in the closed position.
•
For best results, printing on new 90 g/m2 (24 lb.) sulfite or 25% cotton bond envelopes is recommended.
•
Under high humidity conditions (over 60%), envelopes may seal during printing.
Transparencies
•
Use letter or A4-size transparencies for color laser printers only.
•
See Ordering Information for the recommended transparencies for the Lexmark C746x/C748x laser printers.
•
Do not use inkjet transparencies.
Labels
Labels should be selected using guidelines found in the User's Guide or the Card Stock and Label Guide, and tested for acceptability.
Previous
Next
Go Back
1-8
Service Manual
5026
Using recycled paper and other office papers
Recycled office paper produced specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers may be used in your printer. However, no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.
Generally, the following property guidelines apply to recycled paper.
•
Low moisture content (4–5%)
•
Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)
Note:
Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and much rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.
•
Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)
•
Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m
2
[16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing conditions).
Previous
Next
Go Back
General information
1-9
5026
Input and output capacities
The following table describes the media options that each model supports, and the estimated capacities in stand and maximum configurations. Capacity may vary and is subject to media specifications and printer operating environment. The capacities are based on plain paper at 75g/m
2
.
Standard input sources
Primary tray capacity (sheets)
Multipurpose feeder capacity (sheets)
Number of standard sources (primary tray and multipurpose feeder)
Total standard capacity (sheets)
550
100
2
650
Optional input sources
550-Sheet Drawer (sheets)
High-capacity input tray (HCIT) (sheets)
Specialty Media Drawer a
(sheets)
Maximum number of 550-sheet drawers
(including Speciality Media Drawer)
Maximum number of high-capacity input tray (must be installed on the bottom)
Maximum number of standard and optional input sources
Maximum capacity for standard and options input sources (sheets)
Standard output bin capacity (sheets) b
550
2,000
550 (or 85 envelopes)
4
1
6
4,300
300
Maximum output bin capacity (sheets) 300
Duplex capability Standard for
C746dn,C746dtn,C748de,and
C748dte models a b
Each 550-sheet Specialty Media Drawer replaces one 550-sheet option.
The output bin capacity may be reduced by 50 sheets when the duplex feature is in use.
Previous
Next
Go Back
1-10
Service Manual
Input and output sizes and types
Media Sizes
Paper sizes
A4
210 x 297 mm
A5
148 x 210 mm
A6
105 x 148 mm
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm
Officio (Mexico)
216 x 340 mm
Letter
8.5 x 11 in.
Legal
8.5 x 14 in.
Statement
5.5 x 8.5 in.
Executive
7.25 x 10.5 in.
Folio
8.5 x 13 in.
Universal
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓ ✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
General information
1-11
5026
Media Sizes (continued)
Envelopes
C6 Envelope
114 x 162 mm a
B6 Envelope
125 x 176 mm a
C65 Envelope
114 x 229 mm a
C5 Envelope
162 x 229 mm
B5 Envelope
176 x 250 mm
DL Envelope
110 x 220 mm
6 3/4 Envelope
3.4 x 6.5 in a
7 3/4 Envelope
3.4 x 7.5
in
9 Envelope
3.9
x 8.9
in
10 Envelope
4.13
x 9.5
in
11 Envelope
4.5 x 10.4 in a
12 Envelope
4.8 x 11 in a a
These sizes are accessible using Other Envelope setting.
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Media weight, primary tray and option tray
Size
Letter, Legal, A4
Type
Xerographic and bond Long grain
Recycled
Short grain
Long grain
Short grain
Cardstock (maximum) Index long/short
Cover long/short
Tag long/short
Transparencies
Labels Paper
Vinyl
Weight
60 g/m
2
–162.7 g/m
2
(16 lb–43 lb)
162.7 g/m
2
–198.9 g/m
2
(43 lb–53.2 lb)
75 g/m
2
–177 g/m
2
(20 lb–47 lb)
105 g/m
2
–218 g/m
2
(28 lb–58 lb)
162.7 g/m
2
–198.9 g/m
2
(90 lb–110 lb)
162.7g/m
2
–198.9 g/m
2
(60.1 lb–73.6 lb)
162.7g/m
2
–198.9 g/m
2
(100 lb–122.2 lb)
161 g/m
2
– 179 g/m
2
Thickness: 0.12–0.14mm (4.8–5.4 mil)
180 g/m
2
–300 g/m
2
(48 lb–80 lb)
180 g/m
2
–300 g/m
2
(48 lb–80 lb)
1-12
Service Manual
Previous
Next
Go Back
5026
Media weight, primary tray and option tray
Size Type
A5, JIS B5, Executive Xerographic and bond Long grain
Short grain
Universal Xerographic and bond Long grain
Short grain
Weight
75 g/m
2
–177 g/m
2
(20 lb to 47 lb)
90 g/m
2
–218 g/m
2
(24 lb–58 lb)
75 g/m
2
–177 g/m
2
(20 lb–47 lb)
90 g/m
2
–218 g/m
2
(24 lb–58 lb)
Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating new paper stock.
Weight
—The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 162l7 g/m
2
(16 to 43 lb bond) grain long.
Paper lighter than 60 g/m
2
(16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m
2
(20 lb bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m
2
(24 lb) or heavier paper.
Note:
Duplex is supported only for 63 g/m
2
–170 g/m
2
(17 lb–45 lb bond) paper.
Curl
—Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding problems.
Smoothness
—Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between
100 and 300 Sheffield points; however, smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
—The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly. Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
—Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper. For 60 to 135 g/m
2
(16 to 36 lb bond) paper, grain long paper is recommended. For papers heavier than 135 g/m
2
, grain short is recommended.
Fiber content
—Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
•
Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
•
Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
•
Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
Previous
Next
Go Back
General information
1-13
5026
•
Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm
(±0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
Note:
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.
•
Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
•
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
•
Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
•
Paper weighing less than 60 g/m
2
(16 lb)
•
Multiple-part forms or documents
Selecting paper
Using appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams and poor print quality:
•
Always
use new, undamaged paper.
•
Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.
•
Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•
Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same source; mixing results in jams.
•
Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
•
Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m
2
(16 to 20 lb) weight paper.
•
Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
•
Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use papers printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190°C (374°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not. When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190°C (374°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.
Previous
Next
Go Back
1-14
Service Manual
5026
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
•
For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to 24°C (65 to 75°F) with relative humidity between 40 and 60%.
•
Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
•
Store individual packages on a flat surface.
•
Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Tools required for service
Flat-blade screwdrivers, various sizes
#1 Phillips screwdriver, magnetic
#2 Phillips screwdriver, magnetic
#2 Phillips screwdriver, magnetic short-blade
7/32 inch (5.5 mm) open-end wrench
4.0 mm Allen wrench (HCIT removal)
7.0 mm nut driver
Needlenose pliers
Diagonal side cutters
Spring hook
Feeler gauges
Analog or digital multimeter
Parallel wrap plug 1319128
Twinax/serial debug cable 1381963
Coax/serial debug cable 1381964
Flash light (optional)
General information
1-15
5026
Acronyms
LVPS
M
MPF
NVRAM
PC pel
POR
POST
RIP
SDRAM
V ac
V dc
Y
BLDC
BUR
C
COD
DIMM
DRAM
EP
ESD
FRU
GB
HCIT
HVPS
K
LASER
LCD
LED
Brushless DC Motor
Back Up Roll
Cyan
Color On Demand
Dual Inline Memory Module
Dynamic Random Access Memory
Electrophotographic Process
Electrostatic Discharge
Field Replaceable Unit
Gigabyte
High-Capacity Input Tray
High Voltage Power Supply
Black
Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation
Liquid Crystal Display
Light-Emitting Diode
Low-Voltage Power Supply
Magenta
Multipurpose Feeder
Nonvolatile Random Access Memory
Photoconductor
Picture element (pixel)
Power-On Reset
Power-On Self Test
Raster Imaging Processor
Synchronous Dual Random Access Memory
Volts alternating current
Volts direct current
Yellow
Previous
Next
Go Back
1-16
Service Manual
2. Diagnostic information
5026
Previous
Start
Next
CAUTION
Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before you connect or disconnect any cable or electronic card or assembly for personal safety and to prevent damage to the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY:
The printer weight is greater than 54 lbs (24.5kg), and requires two or more trained personnel to lift safety.
Use the service error code, user status message, user error message, symptom table, service checks, and diagnostic aids in this chapter to determine the corrective action necessary to repair a malfunctioning printer.
They will lead you to solutions or service checks, including the use of various tests.
Symptom tables
If your printer completes the
“Power-on self test (POST) sequence” on page 2-9
without an error, and you have a symptom, go to
. Locate your symptom, and take the appropriate action.
Service errors (1xx.xx/9xx.xx)
If a service error code appears while you are working on the printer, go to
“1xx service error codes” on page 2-21
or
“9xx service error messages” on page 2-38
, and take the indicated action for that error.
Service error codes are indicated by a three-digit error code followed by a period and additional numbers in the format XXX.YY. In most cases, five digits are shown.
Paper jam messages (2xx.xx)
User attendance messages that indicate a paper jam have been included with the service error codes since repeated instances may indicate an underlying service issue. Go to
“2xx paper jam messages” on page 2-23
User status and attendance messages
•
User status messages provide the user with information on the current status of the printer.
•
User attendance messages are indicated by a two-digit code that provides the user with information that explains a problem with a print cartridge, option, port, and so on. If a user error message displays, see
“3x through 8x attendance messages” on page 2-13
“2xx paper jam messages” on page 2-23
.
Additional information
•
“Operator panel and menus” on page 2-2
•
“Power-on self test (POST) sequence” on page 2-9
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-1
5026
Operator panel and menus
C746x operator panel
1
2
Previous
3
4 5
1
4
GHI
7 PQR
2
ABC
3
DEF
5
JKL
8 STU
0
6
MNO
9 WXYZ
10 9 8
7
6
C746x buttons and light descriptions
Use the
1 Display
2
3
4
5
Select button
Navigation buttons
Keypad
Sleep button
6 Stop/Cancel button
7
8
Back
Home button
To
• View printer status.
• Allow printer setup and operation.
Submit changes made in the printer settings.
Scroll up and down or left and right.
Enter numbers and letters.
Enable Sleep mode.
The following are the statuses based on the indicator light and the Sleep button:.
• Entering or waking from Sleep mode
- The indicator light is illuminated solid green.
- The Sleep button is un-illuminated.
• Operating in Sleep mode
- The indicator light is illuminated solid green.
- The Sleep button is illuminated solid amber.
• Entering or waking from Hibernate mode
- The indicator light is illuminated solid green.
- The Sleep button is illuminated blinking amber.
• Operating in Hibernate mode.
- The indicator light is un-illuminated.
- The Sleep button is blinking amber for 0.1 second, and then goes completely un-illuminated for 1.9 seconds in pulsing pattern.
The following actions wake the printer from Sleep mode:
• Pressing any button
• Opening Tray 1 or loading paper in the multipurpose feeder
• Opening a door or cover
• Sending a print job from the computer
• Performing a power.on reset with the
Stops all printer activities.
Note:
A list of options are displayed once
Stopped appears on the display.
Return to the previous screen.
Go to the home screen.
Next
Go Back
2-2
Service Manual
Use the
9 Indicator light
To
Check the status of the printer.
Indicator light status
Indicates
Off Printer power is off.
Blinking green Printer is warming up, processing data, or printing a job.
Solid green Printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red Operator intervention is required.
Connect a USB Bluetooth adapter or a flash drive to the printer.
Note:
Only the front USB port supports flash drives.
10 USB port
C748x operator panel
1
2 3 4
1
4
GHI
7 PQR
2
ABC
5
JKL
8 STU
0
3
DEF
6
MNO
9 WXYZ
7 6 5
C748x buttons and light descriptions
Use the
1 Display
2
3
Home button
Keypad
To
• View printer status.
• Allow printer setup and operation.
Go to the home screen.
Enter numbers and letters.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-3
5026
Use the
4
5 Stop/Cancel button
6 Indicator light
7
Sleep button
USB port
To
Enable Sleep mode.
The following are the statuses based on the indicator light and the Sleep button:.
• Entering or waking from Sleep mode
- The indicator light is illuminated solid green.
- The Sleep button is un-illuminated.
• Operating in Sleep mode
- The indicator light is illuminated solid green.
- The Sleep button is illuminated solid amber.
• Entering or waking from Hibernate mode
- The indicator light is illuminated solid green.
- The Sleep button is illuminated blinking amber.
• Operating in Hibernate mode.
- The indicator light is un-illuminated.
- The Sleep button is blinking amber for 0.1 second, and then goes completely un-illuminated for 1.9 seconds in pulsing pattern.
The following actions wake the printer from Sleep mode:
• Pressing any button
• Touching the screen
• Opening Tray 1 or loading paper in the multipurpose feeder
• Opening a door or cover
• Sending a print job from the computer
• Performing a Power On Reset (POR) with the main power switch.
• Loading paper into the scanner ADF.
• Raising the scanner flatbed cover.
Stops all printer activities.
Note:
A list of options are displayed once
Stopped appears on the display.
Check the status of the printer.
Indicator light status
Indicates
Off Printer power is off.
Blinking green Printer is warming up, processing data, or printing a job.
Solid green
Blinking red
Printer is on, but idle.
Operator intervention is required.
Connect a USB Bluetooth adapter or a flash drive to the printer.
Note:
Only the front USB port supports flash drives.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-4
Service Manual
5026
Using the touch screen buttons
Note:
Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
1
2
3 4
Previous
Next
Go Back
Touch
1 Up arrow
10
9 8
7
6
To
Scroll up.
5
2 Delete folder Delete the file you selected.
3 Left arrow Scroll to the left.
4 Right arrow Scroll to the right.
5 Right scroll increase Scroll to another value in increasing order.
6 Left scroll decrease Scroll to another value in decreasing order.
7 Down arrow Scroll down.
Diagnostic information
2-5
5026
Touch
8 Accept
9
Cancel
10 Back
To
Save a setting.
• Cancel an action or a selection.
• Cancel out a screen and return to the previous screen
Navigate back to the previous screen.
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Use the home screen buttons and icons to initiate an action.
Note:
Your home screen, icons, and the buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
1 2 3
4
123.123.123.123
Previous
Next
Go Back
8 7 6 5
Touch
1
2
Change Language
Bookmarks
3
4
5
Held Jobs
USB or USB
Thumbdrive
Menus
To
Change the primary language of the printer.
Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URLs) into a tree view of folders and file links.
Note:
The tree view does not include bookmarks created within Forms and
Favorites, and the ones in the tree are not usable in Forms and Favorites.
Display all current held jobs.
View, select, or print photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note:
This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or flash drive is connected to the printer.
Access printer menus.
Note:
These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state.
2-6
Service Manual
5026
Touch
6
7
Status message bar
Status/Supplies
Tips
To
• Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
• Show printer conditions such as Fuser missing or Cartridge Low.
• Show intervention messages and the instructions on how to clear them.
• Display a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue processing.
• Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.
Open a context.sensitive Help information on the touch screen.
8
This may also appear on the home screen:
Previous
Next
Go Back
Touch
Search Held Jobs
To
Search current held jobs.
Features
Feature
Attendance message alert
Description
If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red indicator light blinks.
Warning If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Printer IP address
Sample:
123.123.123.123.123
The IP address of your network printer is located at the top left corner of the home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.
Diagnostic information
2-7
5026
Administrative menus
Note:
Some menu items may not be available based on the printer model or the options installed.
Supplies Menu
Replace Supply
Cyan Cartridge
Magenta Cartridge
Yellow Cartridge
Black Cartridge
Cyan Photoconductor
Magenta Photoconductor
Yellow Photoconductor
Black Photoconductor
Waste Toner Bottle
Fuser
Transfer Module
Paper Menu
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Configure MP
Substitute Size
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
1
Universal Setup
Reports
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Network Setup Page
Network [x] Setup Page
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
Settings
General Settings
Flash Drive Menu
Print Settings1
Security
Miscellaneous Security
Settings
Confidential Print
Disk Wiping
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
Network/Ports
Active NIC
Standard Network OR Network [x]
2
Standard USB
Parallel [x]
Serial [x]
SMTP Setup
Help
Print All Guides
Color Quality
Print Quality
Printing Guide
Media Guide
Print Defects Guide
Menu Map
Information Guide
Connection Guide
Moving Guide
Supplies Guide
1
This menu appears only in touch.screen printer models
2
Spending on the printer setup, this menu appears as a Standard Network, Wireless Network, or Network [x]
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-8
Service Manual
5026
Power-on self test (POST) sequence
When you turn the printer on, it performs a Power-On Self Test. Check for correct POST functioning of the base printer by observing the following:
1.
The operator panel turns on and displays the Lexmark logo.
2.
A progress bar displays.
3.
The LED turns on.
4.
The main fan turns on.
5.
The machine performs the following tests:
a.
Sensor check
b.
Motor check—initializes the following motors:
i.
Cam motor
ii.
EP drive motor
iii.
Fuser motor
iv.
Cartridge motor
c.
Supplies check
Note:
The LED blinks red and an error message displays on the operator panel screen if the machine detects errors during these test phases.
6.
The LED light indicator blinks.
7.
The loading screen displays.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Symptom tables
Printer symptom table
Symptom
Dead printer
Operator panel—one or more buttons do not work.
Operator panel—display is blank. Printer sounds five beeps.
Operator panel—display is blank.
Operator panel—stripes display, distorted display, and other display issues
Tray 1 missing
Tray linking will not work.
Front cover locks, and will not open
Action
Go to
“Dead printer service check” on page 2-124
.
Go to
“One or more operator panel buttons fail” on page 2-127
.
Go to
“Operator panel display blank, five beeps, and LED is off” on page 2-127
.
Go to
“Operator panel display blank, five beeps, LED on” on page 2-127
.
Go to
“Stripes display, distorted display, and other display issues” on page 2-128
Go to
“Tray 1 missing service check” on page 2-135
.
Go to
“Tray linking service check” on page 2-136
.
Go to
“Front cover locked in place” on page 3-36
.
Diagnostic information
2-9
5026
Print quality symptom table
Symptom Action
Background Go .
Blank page
Blurred or fuzzy print
Go to
Go to
“Print quality—blank page” on page 2-130
.
“Print quality—blurred or fuzzy print” on page 2-132
.
Half-color page
Horizontal banding
Horizontal line
Insufficient fusing
Missing image at edge
Mottle (2–5mm speckles)
Go to
Go to
Go to
Go to
Go to
“Print quality—half-color page” on page 2-132
“Print quality—horizontal line” on page 2-132
.
.
“Print quality—horizontal banding” on page 2-132
“Print quality—insufficient fusing” on page 2-132
.
.
“Print quality—missing image at edge” on page 2-132
Go to
“Print quality—mottle (2–5mm speckles)” on page 2-132
.
Go to
“Print quality—narrow vertical line” on page 2-132
.
.
Narrow vertical line
Random marks
Residual image
Solid color page
Vertical banding
Go to
Go to
“Print quality—random marks” on page 2-133
“Print quality—residual image” on page 2-133
.
.
Go to
“Print quality—solid color page” on page 2-133
.
Go to
“Print quality—vertical banding” on page 2-134
.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-10
Service Manual
5026
Previous
User status and attendance messages
Error code
Close Front Door
Disk Corrupted,
Reformat?
Action
Close the front door securely. If you continuously get this error, then either the 24 V interlock switch or the 5 V interlock switch is bad. See
“24 V interlock switch service check” on page 2-121
“5 V interlock switch service check” on page 2-120
.
The printer has attempted a disk recovery and cannot repair the disk. The disk must be formatted to use.
Warning:
All files stored on the disk will be lost.
The printer has attempted to restore Held jobs, but not all were restored.
Held Jobs May Not Be
Restored
Insert Tray <x>
Load <source>
<custom type name>
Load <source>
<Custom String>
Load <source> <size>
Load Manual <custom type name>
Load Manual
<custom string>
Load Manual <size>
Insert tray to clear the message.
Load paper in the indicated source and of the indicated type. Additional messages may include:
• Paper loaded—Select Continue.
• Show Me—the printer will present instructions.
• Cancel Job—the printer job can be canceled.
• Wait for supplies—If job parking is enabled, and the job meets all the requirements for allowing the job to be parted, the printer adds this message.
Load paper in the indicated source, and select Continue.
Additional messages may include:
• Show Me—the printer will present instructions.
• Cancel Job—the printer job can be cancelled.
• Wait for supplies—If job parking is enabled, and the job meets all the requirements for allowing the job to be parted, the printer adds this message.
Load paper in the indicated source and of the indicated size, and select Continue.
Additional messages may include:
• Show Me—the printer will present instructions.
• Cancel Job—the printer job can be cancelled.
• Wait for supplies—If job parking is enabled, and the job meets all the requirements for allowing the job to be parted, the printer adds this message.
If paper loaded is in the manual feeder, the job continues. If paper is not in the feeder, pressing Select indicates to the printer it should search for a source with the proper custom type.
Additional messages may include:
• Show Me—the printer will present instructions.
• Cancel Job—the printer job can be cancelled.
If paper loaded is in the manual feeder, the job continues. If paper is not in the feeder, pressing Select indicates to the printer it should search for a source with the proper custom string.
Additional messages may include:
• Show Me—the printer will present instructions.
• Cancel Job—the printer job can be cancelled.
If paper loaded is in the manual feeder, the job continues. If paper is not in the feeder, pressing Select indicates to the printer it should search for a source with the proper size.
Additional messages may include:
• Show Me—the printer will present instructions.
• Cancel Job—the printer job can be cancelled.
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-11
5026
Error code
Load Manual <type>
<size>
Action
If paper loaded is in the manual feeder, the job continues. If paper is not in the feeder, pressing Select indicates to the printer it should search for a source with the proper type and size.
Additional messages may include:
• Show Me—the printer will present instructions.
• Cancel Job—the printer job can be cancelled.
Paper Changes Needed
PC Unit Exposure
Warning
Remove All Color
Supplies
Remove Paper
Standard Bin
Remove Packaging
Material
Restore Held Jobs
Go/Stop?
Securely Clearing Disk
Space
Tray Length Guide
Missing
Unsupported USB device, Please Remove
Unsupported USB hub,
Please Remove
Unsupported Mode
This warning occurs when the front door is left open too long. Close the front door to prevent damage to the PC unit. Select
Tell me more for further information.
If Color Lockout mode is enabled, this message appears (unless the printer is in Diagnostics
Menu or Configuration Menu).
The standard output bin is full. Remove the media to continue.
If packaging material is detected by the printer,
Check all areas, Check <area name>, or
Check <number of> areas may appear. Press Select to continue.
If the printer detects Print and Hold (or parked) jobs stored on the hard disk during Power-On
Self Test (POST). Choices are:
• Restore—Print jobs are restored, and
Restoring Held Jobs x/y, where x is the number of the job restored and y is the total number of jobs to restore. You can quit restoring, and the remainder of the jobs will remain on the disk, but cannot be accessed until they are restored at the next POR.
• Do not restore—Held jobs will remain on the disk, but cannot be accessed until they are restored at the next POR.
Held jobs may not be restored appears.
• Tell me more—additional information is available
Disk wiping process is recovering disk space. The message clears when all memory blocks are cleared.
Replace the tray length guide.
Remove the unrecognized device to continue.
Remove the unrecognized device to continue.
Unsupported Disk
Unplug camera and change it to a mode where the camera can access PictBridge. Plug the camera back in to continue.
Remove the unsupported disk to continue.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-12
Service Manual
5026
Error code Action
3x through 8x attendance messages
31 Defective or Missing
<color> Cartridge
• Reseat the specified toner cartridge.
• Inspect the smart chip card contacts (A) for damage, contamination or positioning error. If damaged, contact your next level of service.
A
Previous
Next
Go Back
32 Unsupported
Cartridge
34 Short Paper
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource
Save feature
• Inspect the toner cartridge contacts for damage/contamination. Replace the toner cartridge if defective.
• Replace the indicated cartridge.
• If the problem still exists, see
“31.xx—Cartridge errors service check” on page 2-45
• Check to see if the toner cartridge is a supported cartridge.
Note:
Once the cartridge shipped with the printer is exhausted, it must be replaced by a supply cartridge (refer to the User’s Guide for part numbers.)
If the specified toner cartridge is a supported cartridge, reseat the cartridge.
• Inspect the toner cartridge contacts for damage or contamination. Replace the toner cartridge if defective.
• Inspect JSBTN1 cable connection. Properly connect the cable if not connected properly.
Replace the cable if damaged.
• If the problem still exists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Note:
The printer does not automatically reprint the page that prompted the message.
• Check the tray length and width guides to ensure the media is properly fitted.
• Make sure the print job is requesting the correct size of media.
• Adjust the Paper Size setting for the media size being used.
• If the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the media is large enough for the formatted data.
• Cancel the current job. Replace the paper pick mechanism. See
“Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-137
• If the problem still exists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
• Select Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.
• To enable Resource Save after receiving this message:
- Make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, then exit the menus to activate the link buffer changes.
- When
Ready is displayed, enable Resource Save.
• Install additional memory.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Diagnostic information
2-13
5026
Error code
37 Insufficient memory to collate job
37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory
Defragment operation
37 Insufficient memory,
Some Held Jobs Were
Not Restored
37 Insufficient memory,
Some Held Jobs Will
Not Be Restored
37 Insufficient Defrag
Memory
38 Memory Full
39 Complex Page
50 PPDS Font Error
51 Defective Flash
Action
• Select Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the job.
• Cancel the current job.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• Select Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in printer memory.
• Install additional printer memory.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
• The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
• Select Continue to clear the message.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the hard disk.
• Select Continue to clear the message.
• If this message occurs again, replace the hard drive.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
There is insufficient memory to perform the Flash Memory Defragment operation. The user can:
• Delete font, macros, and other data in memory.
• Install additional printer memory.
The following options are available:
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. The job may not print correctly.
• Cancel the current job.
• Install additional printer memory.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
The page is too complex to print. Options are:
• Select Continue to continue. The job may not print correctly.
• Cancel the job.
• Additional memory may fix the problem.
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. The job may not print correctly.
• Cancel the current job.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Install different flash memory before downloading any resources to flash.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-14
Service Manual
5026
Error code
52 Flash Full
53 Unformatted Flash
54 Serial option <x> error
54 Std Network
Software Error
55 Unsupported Option in Slot <x>
56 Standard Parallel
Port Disabled
56 Parallel Port <x>
Disabled
56 Serial Port <x>
Disabled
56 Standard USB Port
Disabled
Action
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Note:
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.
• Install a larger capacity flash memory card.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Format the flash memory before storing any resources on it. If the error message remains, replace the flash memory.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• Make sure the serial link is set up correctly and the appropriate cable is in use.
• Make sure the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer and host computer.
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
The job may not print correctly.
• POR the printer. If this does not fix the problem, replace the PCI card.
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. The job may not print correctly.
• Program new firmware for the network interface.
• POR the printer. If this does not fix the problem, replace the PCI card.
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3. Remove the unsupported option.
4. Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5. Turn the printer on.
If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• Select Continue to clear the message. The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the PCI card.
• Select Continue to clear the message. The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the PCI card.
• Select Continue to clear the message. The printer discards any data received through the serial port.
• Make sure the Serial Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the PCI card.
• Select Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to
Disabled.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-15
5026
Error code
57 Configuration
Change
Held Jobs May Not
Be Restored
58 Too Many Flash
Options
58 Too Many Trays
Attached
59 Incompatible Tray
<x>
61 Defective Disk
62 Disk full
63 Unformatted disk
64 Unsupported disk format
80 Fuser Near Life
Warning
Action
Configuration changes may be:
• Code version changes
• Paper handling options removed
• The disk was installed from a different model or speed of printer.
Too many flash options are installed. To continue:
1. Turn off and unplug the printer.
2. Remove the excess flash memory.
3. Plug in the printer, and turn it on.
If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
1. Turn off and unplug the printer.
2. Remove options until the supported number of options for that model.
3. Plug in the printer, and turn it on.
If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
There is an incompatible tray. To remove the option:
1. Turn off and unplug the printer.
2. Remove all option trays.
3. Install one option, plug in the printer and turn it on.
4. Continue adding one option at a time and checking whether the error occurs.
5. Install all options except the one identified as a problem.
- If no problem occurs, replace the option.
- If the same error occurs, replace the system board.
6. Plug in and power on
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Install a different hard disk before performing any operations that require a hard disk.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
• Any information not previously stored on the hard disk is deleted.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the hard disk.
• Install a larger hard disk.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Format the disk.
• If the error message remains, replace the hard disk.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Format the disk.
• If the error message remains, replace the hard disk.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•
Show Me, View Supplies, and Tell Me More displays additional information.
• Order a replacement fuser. When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement fuser.
Note:
Be sure to reset the fuser count. See
“Reset Fuser Cnt” on page 3-28
.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board.See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
2-16
Service Manual
Previous
Next
Go Back
5026
Error code
80 Fuser Life Warning
80 Replace Fuser
80 Fuser Missing
80.41 Fuser missing
82 Waste Toner
Nearly Full
82 Replace Waste
Toner
Action
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•
Show Me, View Supplies, and Tell Me More displays additional information.
• Order a replacement fuser. When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement fuser.
Note:
Be sure to reset the fuser count. See
“Reset Fuser Cnt” on page 3-28
.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
•
Show Me, View Supplies, and Tell Me More displays additional information.
• Replace the fuser. See
.
Note:
Be sure to reset the fuser count. See
“Reset Fuser Cnt” on page 3-28
.
• If this does not fix the problem, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• Reinstall the fuser. See
.
• Reseat connectors behind fuser. They may get dislodged and not make good contact when the fuser is installed.
• Check the cable connectors for damage at the system board and at the LVPS.
• Install the fuser. Replace the fuser if the problem persists.
• If the problem continues, turn the printer off and remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
. Check the cable in connector JFUSER1 for proper
connection to the system board, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or the connector for any other damage. If the connector is damaged on system board, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
. If the fuser cable is damaged, replace the cable.
• Check for the following continuity between the DC autoconnect and FUSER1.
AC autoconnect
Pin 1
Pin 5
DC autoconnect
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
Pin 9
Pin 10
• If continuity is not present, replace the fuser cable. If the problem persists after replacing cable, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• If printing continues, order a replacement waste toner box immediately.
• If the problem persists, open the front access door and check the aligner shaft for binding.
Clear the binding if possible. If not possible, contact your next level of service.
• Replace the waste toner box using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement waste toner box.
• Ensure that there is no interference between the waste toner box and the printer.
• If the problem persists, open the front access door and check the aligner shaft for binding.
Clear the binding if possible.
• If the problem persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
• If the problem persists, contact your next level of service.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-17
5026
Error code
82 Waste Toner Missing
82.41
83.xx Transfer Module
Life Warning
83.xx Replace Transfer
Module
83.41 Transfer Module
Missing
84.11 <color> PC Unit
Life Warning
84 Replace <color> PC
Unit
Action
• Insert the waste toner box.
• Inspect the top cover camshaft assembly for proper operation. When the top access cover is closed, the printer should mechanically interlock.
• Check the cable in connector JBUMP1on the system board for defects and proper connection. If the cable wiring or the cable connection is defective, replace the bump
multipurpose feeder/duplex motor assembly. See
“Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex motor assembly removal” on page 4-125
. If the cable in JBUMP1 connector is
damaged on the system board, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• Check the aligner shaft and the mechanical system for binds.
• Replace the bump multipurpose feeder/duplex motor assembly. See
“Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex motor assembly removal” on page 4-125
.
• If the problem persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
If you continuously get this error, then the problem is the aligner motor error. Go to
920.01—POST (power-on self test) aligner error service check” on page 2-57
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Order a replacement transfer module. When print quality is reduced, install the new transfer module using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement transfer module.
• If the problem persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
• Replace the transfer module using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement transfer module. See
“Transfer module removal” on page 4-171
• If the problem persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
If the you continuously get this error, go to
“920.03, 920.25—Transfer Module Missing or not connected service check” on page 2-97
.
• Select Ignore to clear the message and continue printing.
• Order the specified photoconductor unit. When print quality is reduced, install the new specified photoconductor unit using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement specified photoconductor unit.
• If the problem persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
• Replace the specified photoconductor unit using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement specified photoconductor unit. Navigate to Menu > Supplies menu >
Replace supplies
.
• If the problem persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Note:
Make sure to reset the photoconductor unit counter(s).
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-18
Service Manual
5026
Error code
84 <color> PC Unit
Missing
Action
• Scroll down the operator panel to see if the printer is showing that all four of the PC units are missing. If so, check the HVPS cable between the system board and the HVPS.
Ensure that the cable is not plugged in backwards on the HVPS. Disconnect and reconnect the cable to make sure there is good contact.
• Insert or reinstall the specified photoconductor unit and see if problem clears. See
“Photoconductor unit removal” on page 4-142
• Swap the photoconductor unit between two locations and see if the problem moves with photoconductor unit. If problem follows the photoconductor unit, replace the photoconductor unit. See
“Photoconductor unit removal” on page 4-142
.
• Remove the top access cover assembly (see
“Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-54
), and confirm that the camshaft follower (A) on the left side is not out of the
groove (B). If the camshaft follower is out of the groove, raise the arm, use a screwdriver to ease the camshaft follower back into the groove. You need to press down to snap it into position.
Previous
Next
Go Back
B A
• Check the high voltage contacts path, especially the “finger” on the specified photoconductor unit (printer is shown with components removed for clarity).
High voltage power supply
High voltage contact path
Finger
• If the contacts are good, replace the HVPS. See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal” on page 4-115
• If the problem persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Note:
Make sure to reset the photoconductor unit counter(s).
Diagnostic information
2-19
5026
Error code Action
84 <color> PC Unit Near
Life Warning
88.xx <color> Cartridge
Low
88.xx <color> Cartridge
Nearly Low
88.xx Replace <color>
Cartridge
• Select Ignore to clear the message and continue printing.
• Order the specified photoconductor unit. When print quality is reduced, install the new specified photoconductor unit using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement specified photoconductor unit.
• If the problem persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Note:
Make sure to reset the photoconductor unit counter(s).
•
Show Me, View Supplies, and Tell Me More displays additional information.
• Replace the specified toner cartridge.
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• If the problem persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
•
Show Me, View Supplies, and Tell Me More displays additional information.
• Replace the specified toner cartridge.
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• If the problem persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
•
Show Me, View Supplies, and Tell Me More displays additional information.
• Replace the specified toner cartridge.
• Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• If the problem persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-20
Service Manual
5026
Previous
Error codes and messages
Error code
1xx service error codes
110.01–110.07Mirror
Motor Error
111.01–111.02
Printhead Error
112.01–112.02
Printhead Error
113.01–113.02
Printhead Error
114.01–114.02
Printhead Error
120.00–120.21
Fuser Error
140.01–140.10
Autocomp Motor Error
142.09—142.27
Motor Error
143.09–143.27
Motor Error
144.09–144.27
Motor Error
145.09–145.27
Motor Error
Description
A mirror motor error has occurred.
An error has occurred in the cyan channel of the printhead.
An error has occurred in the magenta channel of the printhead.
An error has occurred in the yellow channel of the printhead.
An error has occurred in the black channel of the printhead.
An error has occurred in the fuser.
Tray 1 motor has failed.
Fuser motor has failed.
EP Drive assembly cartridge 1 (top) motor has failed.
EP Drive assembly cartridge 2
(middle) motor has failed.
EP drive assembly cartridge 3
(bottom) motor has failed.
Action
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
Mirror motor service check” on page 2-45
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
112.xx, 113.xx, and 114.xx—Printhead error service check” on page 2-46
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
112.xx, 113.xx, and 114.xx—Printhead error service check” on page 2-46
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
112.xx, 113.xx, and 114.xx—Printhead error service check” on page 2-46
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
112.xx, 113.xx, and 114.xx—Printhead error service check” on page 2-46
.
• Remove and reseat the fuser. See
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
Fuser error service check” on page 2-47
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
920.02—Autocomp (tray 1) motor error service check” on page 2-49
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
906.01–906.04—Motor (fuser) error service check” on page 2-49
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
Motor (EP drive assembly top cartridge 1 motor) error service check” on page 2-51
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
Motor (EP drive assembly middle cartridge) error service check” on page 2-52
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
Motor (EP drive assembly bottom cartridge) error service check” on page 2-54
.
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-21
5026
162.01–162.06
Motor Error
163.01–163.06
Motor Error
164.01–164.06
Motor Error
165.01–165.06
Motor Error
166.01–166.06
Motor Error
167.01–167.06
Motor Error
Error code
146.01–146.08
Motor Error
147.09–147.25
Motor Error
148.01–148.08
Motor Error
155.01, 155.03
Motor Error
156.01, 156.03
Motor Error
160.01–160.06
Motor Error
161.01–161.06
Motor Error
Description Action
Duplex motor has failed.
Aligner motor has failed.
The multipurpose feeder motor has failed.
Cam motor failed.
COD (Color On Demand) motor failed.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
COD (Color On Demand) motor service check” on page 2-60
Tray 2 pick motor failed.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
161.xx—Motor Error (option tray 2) service check” on page 2-60
Tray 2 feed motor failed.
Tray 3 pick motor failed.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
161.xx—Motor Error (option tray 2) service check” on page 2-60
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
163.xx—Motor Error (option tray 3) service check” on page 2-61
Tray 3 feed motor failed.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
148.xx—Motor (MPF/duplex) error service check” on page 2-55
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
920.01—POST (power-on self test) aligner error service check” on page 2-57
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
148.xx—Motor (MPF/duplex) error service check” on page 2-55
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
Cam motor error service check” on page 2-58
Tray 4 pick motor failed.
Tray 4 feed motor failed.
Tray 5 pick motor failed.
Tray 5 feed motor failed.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
163.xx—Motor Error (option tray 3) service check” on page 2-61
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
165.xx—Motor Error (option tray 4) service check” on page 2-62
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
165.xx—Motor Error (option tray 4) service check” on page 2-62
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
167.xx—Motor Error (option tray 5) service check” on page 2-63
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
167.xx—Motor Error (option tray 5) service check” on page 2-63
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-22
Service Manual
5026
Error code
168.xx
Motor Error
199.xx
Software Error
Description
HCIT elevator motor error.
Unrecoverable RIP software error.
Action
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
Motor (HCIT elevator) error service check” on page 2-64
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists with new code, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
2xx paper jam messages
200.02
200.04
200.11
200.17
200.21
Input sensor is made when printer tries to print from an idle state.
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaving page over sensor
• Defective input sensor
• Faulty system board
Input sensor made late in the input sensor.
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaving page over sensor
• Defective input sensor
• Faulty system board
Input sensor does not break.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect media setting
• Incorrect paper loading
• Incorrect media restraint setting
• Transport belt module failure
• Lower guide failure
• Paper pick mechanism failure
• Input sensor failure
Input sensor is made when printer powers up or covers are closed.
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaving page over sensor
• Defective input sensor
• Faulty system board
Aligner motor stalled.
Possible causes:
• Waste toner not seated.
• Faulty cable/connector
• 24 V interlock switch not working correctly
• Faulty align motor
• Faulty system board
• Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem, go to
“920.06—Input sensor service check” on page 2-99
• Check that the waste toner is latched correctly in the printer.
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem, go to
“147.xx, 920.01—POST (power-on self test) aligner error service check” on page 2-57
.
• Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem,
“920.06—Input sensor service check” on page 2-99
.
1. Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used.
3. Fan media, and stack flat in the tray.
4. Properly set media restraints in the paper tray.
5. Check the pick arm rolls (tires) and replace if worn.
If the problem persists, go to
Paper Jam error service check” on page 2-64
.
• Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem, go to
“920.06—Input sensor service check” on page 2-99
.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-23
5026
Error code
200.22
200.25
200.30
201.02
201.06
201.07
Description
Pick (tray 1) motor stalled.
Possible causes:
• Faulty cable/connector
• Faulty pick motor
• Faulty system board
Input sensor is made when tray 1 is installed.
Possible causes:
• Improper placement of paper in tray 1
• Damaged input sensor flag or input sensor
• Faulty system board
Paper hit input sensor too soon.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect paper loading
• Damaged input sensor flag or input sensor
• Faulty system board
Bubble sensor active when printing started.
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaving page over sensor
• Damaged bubble sensor
• Damaged fuser autoconnect
• Faulty fuser DC cable connection
• Faulty fuser
• Faulty system board
Paper is jammed between the input sensor and the exit sensor.
Possible causes:
• Damaged paper exit sensor or paper exit sensor flag
• Transport belt module failure
• Aligner failure
• Damaged fuser autoconnect
• Faulty fuser DC cable connection
• Faulty fuser
• Faulty system board
Exit sensor is made early.
Possible causes:
• Damaged paper exit sensor or paper exit sensor flag
• Damaged fuser autoconnect
• Faulty fuser DC cable connection
• Faulty fuser
• Faulty system board
• Faulty input sensor flag
Action
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem,
“140.xx, 920.02—Autocomp (tray 1) motor error service check” on page 2-49
.
• Fan media, and stack flat in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
• Properly set media restraints in the paper tray.
• If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem,
“920.06—Input sensor service check” on page 2-99
.
• Fan the media, and then stack flat in the tray.
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• The input sensor may not be functioning properly. Go to
“920.06—Input sensor service check” on page 2-99
• Go to
1. Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used.
3. Fan media, and stack flat in the tray.
4. Properly set media restraints in the paper tray.
If the problem persists, go to “
“Bubble sensor service check” on page 2-122
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
“201.06, 201.08, 201.31—Paper Jam error service check” on page 2-65
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning properly. Go to
“920.08—Exit sensor service check” on page 2-100
.
• Check the input sensor flag.
.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-24
Service Manual
Error code
201.08
201.10
201.17
201.21
201.24
201.31
5026
Description Action
Exit sensor is never made.
Possible causes:
• Improper loading
• Paper wrapped in fuser
• Damaged paper exit sensor or paper exit sensor flag
• Damaged fuser autoconnect
• Faulty fuser DC cable connection
• Faulty fuser
• Faulty system board
• Faulty transfer belt module
Input sensor flag broke early.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect media set
• Defective input sensor
• Faulty system board
Power up or cover closed with bubble sensor active.
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaving page over sensor
• Damaged bubble sensor
• Damaged fuser autoconnect
• Faulty fuser DC cable connection
• Faulty fuser
• Faulty system board
Cartridge motor 1 (top) or cartridge motor 2 (middle) has stalled.
Possible causes:
• Faulty cable/connector
• Faulty cartridge motor
• Faulty system board
A 201.08 jam occurred and was not cleared.
Possible cause—Failure to open and close the top access door.
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning
“920.08—Exit sensor service check” on page 2-100
.
• Check the transfer belt module.
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem, go to
“143.xx—Motor (EP drive assembly top cartridge 1 motor) error service check” on page 2-51
“144.xx—Motor (EP drive assembly middle cartridge) error service check” on page 2-52
, if necessary.
This error is generated as a protection for possible paper wrap in the fuser.
• Open the top access door, and check for a paper jam. Close the top access door.
• Go to
“920.08—Exit sensor service check” on page 2-100
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• Go to
“201.06, 201.08, 201.31—Paper Jam error service check” on page 2-65
.
Paper is jammed between the input sensor and the exit sensor during warm-up.
Possible causes:
• Damaged paper exit sensor or paper exit sensor flag
• Transport belt module failure
• Lower guide failure
• Damaged fuser autoconnect
• Faulty fuser DC cable connection
• Faulty fuser
• Faulty system board
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• Ensure the proper media is set for the type of paper used.
• Go to
“920.06—Input sensor service check” on page 2-99
.
1. Ensure the proper media is set for the type of paper used.
2. Fan the media, and stack flat in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
3. Properly set media restraints in the paper tray.
4. Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
If the problem persists, go to
“Bubble sensor service check” on page 2-122
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-25
5026
Error code
201.32
202.02
202.12
202.13
202.17
202.21
Description Action
Paper is jammed between the input sensor and the exit sensor during input options warm-up.
Possible causes:
• Damaged paper exit sensor or paper exit sensor flag
• Transport belt module failure
• Lower guide failure
• Damaged fuser autoconnect
• Faulty fuser DC cable connection
• Faulty fuser
• Input option damage
• Faulty system board
Exit sensor is made when printer tries to print from an idle state.
Possible causes:
• Damaged paper exit sensor or paper exit sensor flag
• Damaged fuser autoconnect
• Faulty fuser DC cable connection
• Faulty fuser
• Faulty system board
Exit sensor broke early.
Possible causes:
• Damaged paper exit sensor or paper exit sensor flag
• Faulty fuser
• Faulty system board
Exit sensor never broke.
Possible causes:
• Damaged paper exit sensor or paper exit sensor flag
• Faulty fuser
• Faulty system board
• Faulty output bin flag
Exit sensor is made when the printer powers up or covers are closed.
Possible causes:
• Damaged paper exit sensor or paper exit sensor flag
• Damaged fuser autoconnect
• Faulty fuser DC cable connection
• Faulty fuser
• Faulty system board
Fuser motor stalled.
Possible causes:
• Faulty cable/connector
• Faulty fuser motor
• Faulty system board
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• Open input tray and clear paper jams.
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning properly. Go to
“920.08—Exit sensor service check” on page 2-100
• Check exit sensor flag on fuser for proper operation. Ensure that paper is not hanging on the flag.
• The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning properly. Go to
“920.08—Exit sensor service check” on page 2-100
.
• Check the output bin flag.
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning properly. Go to
“920.08—Exit sensor service check” on page 2-100
.
.
The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning properly. Go to
“920.08—Exit sensor service check” on page 2-100
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem, go to
“142.xx, 906.01–906.04—Motor (fuser) error service check” on page 2-49
.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-26
Service Manual
Error code
202.31
203.09
203.14
203.15
203.20
5026
Description
Paper jam at exit sensor during warmup.
Possible causes:
• Damaged paper exit sensor or paper exit sensor flag
• Damaged fuser autoconnect
• Faulty fuser DC cable connection
• Faulty fuser
• Faulty system board
During duplex printing retract, the exit sensor is never made.
Possible causes:
• Damaged paper exit sensor or paper exit sensor flag
• Transport belt module failure
• Damaged fuser autoconnect
• Faulty fuser DC cable connection
• Faulty fuser
• Faulty system board
During duplex printing retract, the exit sensor broke early.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect paper settings
• Damaged paper exit sensor or paper exit sensor flag
• Faulty fuser
• Faulty system board
During duplex printing, the exit sensor never broke.
Possible causes:
• Damaged paper exit sensor or paper exit sensor flag
• Obstructed duplex
• Faulty fuser
• Faulty system board
• Duplex motor failure
• Faulty bin full sensor
During duplex, the page entered the duplex path before the previous page cleared the path.
Possible causes:
• Defective input sensor
• Faulty system board
• Wrong media size selected
• Defective exit sensor
Action
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning
“920.08—Exit sensor service check” on page 2-100
.
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning properly. Go to
“203.09—Paper Jam error service check” on page 2-68
used.
check” on page 2-100 check” on page 2-100
.
.
.
• Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper
• The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning properly. Go to
• Check the duplex paper path for damage that would obstruct the print. If damage is found, replace the front door assembly. See
“Front door assembly removal” on page 4-100
• The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning properly. Go to
• The duplex motor may not be functioning properly. Go to
“146.xx, 148.xx—Motor (MPF/ duplex) error service check” on page 2-55
• Check the bin full sensor and bin full sensor flag.
• Check for anything in the duplex paper path that might cause the paper to jam. This includes the paper guides in tray 1.
• If clearing the paper jam does not fix the problem and the paper is fan-folded, replace the front access assembly. See
“Front door assembly removal” on page 4-100
.
• If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem, go to
“920.06—Input sensor service check” on page 2-99
.
• Make sure the selected media and media definitions match.
• Check the exit sensor.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-27
5026
Error code
230.03
230.05
230.21
241.03
241.05
241.21
242.02
2-28
Service Manual
Description
During duplex printing, the input sensor never broke.
Possible causes:
• Obstructed duplex path
• Duplex drive failure
• Defective input sensor
• Faulty system board
During duplex printing, the input sensor is not made.
Possible causes:
• Obstructed duplex path
• Defective input sensor
• Faulty system board
• Faulty duplex drive
Duplex motor stalled.
Possible causes:
• Obstructed duplex path
• Defective duplex motor
• Faulty system board
While feeding from tray 1, the input sensor does not break.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect media setting
• Incorrect paper loading
• Incorrect media restraint setting
• Paper pick mechanism failure
• Transport belt motor failure
While feeding from tray 1, the input sensor is never made.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect paper loading
• Incorrect media restraint setting
• Pick art rolls (tires) failure
• Paper pick mechanism failure
• System board failure
Tray 1 motor stalled.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect paper loading
• Paper pick mechanism failure
• System board failure
Tray 2 pass thru sensor made at
POR.
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaving paper over sensor
• Defective pass thru sensor
Action
• Check for anything in the duplex paper path that might cause the paper to jam. This includes the paper guides in tray 1.
• Go to
“230.03, 230.05—Paper Jam error service check” on page 2-70
.
• Check for anything in the duplex paper path that might cause the paper to jam. This includes the paper guides in tray 1.
• Go to
“230.03, 230.05—Paper Jam error service check” on page 2-70
.
• Check for anything in the duplex paper path that might cause the paper to jam. This includes the paper guides in tray 1.
• If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem, go to
“146.xx, 148.xx—Motor (MPF/duplex) error service check” on page 2-55
.
1. Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used.
3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
4. Properly set media restraints in paper tray.
5. Check the pick arm rolls (tires) and replace if worn.
If the problem persists, go to
Paper Jam error service check” on page 2-64
.
1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
2. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
3. Properly set media restraints in paper tray.
4. Check the pick arm rolls (tires) and replace if worn.
If the problem persists, go to
Autocomp (tray 1) motor error service check” on page 2-49
.
1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used.
3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go to
“140.xx, 920.02—Autocomp (tray 1) motor error service check” on page 2-49
.
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• If the error persists, go to
“242.02—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-71
.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Error code
242.03
242.05
242.10
242.11
242.17
242.21
5026
Description Action
Pick timeout from tray 2 exceeded without a tray 2 sensor break.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect media setting
• Incorrect paper loading
• Incorrect media restraint setting
• Tray 2 assembly failure
• Aligner failure
• Transport belt module failure
Tray 2 picked, but page failed to reach the option sensor in time.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect media setting
• Incorrect paper loading
• Incorrect media restraint setting
• Loading card stock from the special media tray above the fill line
Tray 2 page exits pass thru made early.
Possible causes:
• Defective pass thru sensor
• Faulty cable in the connector
JOPT1 on system board
1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used in tray 2.
3. Fan media, and stack flat in tray 2.
4. Properly set media restraints in tray 2.
If the paper jam message persists, go to
242.11—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-72
.
1. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used in tray 2.
2. Fan media, and stack flat in tray 2.
3. Properly set the media restraints in tray 2.
4. Check the pick arm rolls (tires) in tray 2 and replace if worn.
If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go to
“242.05—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-73
.
• Ensure the proper media is set for the type of paper used in tray 2.
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• The exits pass thru sensor may not be functioning properly. Go to
Jam service check” on page 2-74
1. Ensure the proper media is set for the type of paper used in tray 2.
2. Fan media, and then stack flat in tray 2.
3. Properly set the media restraints in tray 2.
Go to
“242.03, 242.11—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-72
.
Tray 2 sensor never broke.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect tray 2 media setting
• Incorrect Tray 2 paper loading
• Incorrect media restraint setting
• Paper tray 2 failure
• Aligner failure
• Transport belt module failure
• Loading card stock from the special media tray above the fill line
• High humidity (replace paper)
Tray 2 detected a jam from idle.
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaving page over sensor
• Defective input sensor
• Faulty system board
Tray 2 motor stalled.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect paper loading
• Paper pick mechanism failure
• Printer option cable connector damaged
• Input option damage.
• System board failure
• Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem,
“242.17—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-75
1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used.
3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go to
“242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30,
244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-76
.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-29
5026
Error code
242.26
242.27
242.29
242.30
242.32
243.02
Description
While feeding from tray 2, the pass thru sensor is not made.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect paper loading for lower tray
• Incorrect media restraint setting for lower tray
• Paper tray 2 assembly failure
• Lower tray 3 assembly failure
While feeding from a lower tray, pass thru sensor did not break.
Possible causes:
• Paper tray 2 assembly failure
(feed through roller)
• Aligner failure
• Transport belt motor failure
Tray 2 is not ready or missing while printing.
Possible cause is paper tray 2 assembly failure
Tray 2 page reached pass-through sensor early.
Possible cause:
• Incorrect paper loading
• Paper pick mechanism failure
• Pick arm roll damaged
• Defective pass-through sensor
• Input option damaged
Paper is jammed on tray 2 pass-through sensor during input options warm-up.
Possible damage:
• Obstruction on the pass-through sensor
• Damage on the pass-through sensor and flag
• Input option damage
• Damaged option autoconnect cable
• Damaged system board
Tray 3 pass thru sensor made at
POR.
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaving page over the sensor
• Defective pass thru sensor
Action
1. Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
2. Ensure the proper media is set for the type of paper used in the lower tray.
3. Fan the media, and then stack flat in the lower tray.
4. Properly set the media restraints in the lower tray.
5. Check the pick arm rolls (tires) in the lower tray, and then replace if worn.
If the problem persists, go to
“242.26—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-76
.
• Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• Reseat option tray 2.
• Go to
“242.27—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-77
• Make sure that tray 2 is correctly inserted.
• Go to
“242.29—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-77
1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used.
3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go to
“242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30,
244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-76
.
Go to
“242.32, 243.32, 244.32, 245.32—Paper
Jam service check” on page 2-78
.
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem, see
“243.02—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-78
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-30
Service Manual
Error code
243.03
243.05
243.10
243.11
243.17
243.21
5026
Description Action
Pick timeout from tray 3 exceeded without a tray 3 sensor break.
Possible causes:
• Tray 3 incorrect media setting
• Tray 3 incorrect paper loading
• Tray 3 incorrect media restraint setting
• Tray 3 assembly failure
Tray 3 picked, but page failed to reach the option sensor in time,
Possible causes:
• Tray 3 incorrect media setting
• Tray 3 incorrect paper loading
• Tray 3 incorrect media restraint setting
• Tray 3 paper pick mechanism failure
• Loading card stock from the special media tray above the fill line
Tray 3 page exit pass thru sensor broken early.
Possible causes:
• Defective pass thru sensor
• Faulty cable in connector OPT1.
1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used in tray 3.
3. Fan media, and stack flat in tray 3.
4. Properly set media restraints in tray 3.
If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go to
“243.03, 243.11—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-79
.
1. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used in tray 3.
2. Fan media, and stack flat in tray 3.
3. Properly set the media restraints in tray 3.
4. Check the pick arm rolls (tires) in tray 3 and replace if worn.
If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go to
“243.05—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-80
.
• Make sure the proper media is set for the type of paper used in tray 3.
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• The exit pass thru sensor may not be functioning properly. Go to
Jam service check” on page 2-81
1. Ensure the proper media is set for the type of paper used in tray 3.
2. Fan media, and then stack flat in tray 3.
3. Properly set the media restraints in tray 3.
4. Check the pick arm rolls (tires) in tray 3 and replace if worn.
If the problem persists, Go to
Paper Jam service check” on page 2-79
.
Tray 3 sensor never broke.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect tray 3 media setting
• Incorrect tray 3 paper loading
• Incorrect media restraint setting
• Paper tray failure
• Aligner failure
• Transport belt module failure
• Loading card stock from the special media tray above the fill line
• High humidity (replace paper)
Tray 3 detected a jam from idle.
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaving page over sensor
• Defective input sensor
• Faulty system card
Tray 3 motor stalled.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect paper loading
• Paper pick mechanism failure
• Printer option cable connector damaged
• Input option damage.
• System board failure
• Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the media to jam.
• If the problem persists, go to
Jam service check” on page 2-82
1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used.
3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go to
“242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30,
244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-76
.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-31
243.27
243.29
243.30
5026
Error code
243.26
243.32
244.02
Description Action
While feeding from a lower tray, tray 3 pass thru sensor is not made.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect paper loading for lower tray
• Incorrect media restraint setting for lower tray
• Paper tray 3 assembly failure
• Lower tray 4 assembly failure
While feeding from a lower tray, tray 3 pass thru sensor did not break.
Possible cause is a paper tray 3 assembly failure
1. Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the media to jam.
2. Make sure proper media is set for the type of paper used in lower feeding tray.
3. Fan media, and stack flat in the lower feeding tray.
4. Properly set media restraints in the lower feeding tray.
5. Check the pick arm rolls in lower tray and replace if worn.
If the problem persists, go to
“243.26—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-83
.
• Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• Reseat option tray 3
• If the problem persists, go to
Jam service check” on page 2-83
• Make sure that tray 3 is correctly inserted.
• If the problem persists, go to
Jam service check” on page 2-83
Tray 3 is not ready while printing.
Possible cause is paper tray 3 assembly failure.
Tray 3 page reached pass-through sensor early.
Possible cause:
• Incorrect paper loading
• Paper pick mechanism failure
• Pick arm roll damaged
• Defective pass-through sensor
• Input option damaged
Paper is jammed on tray 3 pass-through sensor during input options warm-up.
Possible damage:
• Obstruction on the pass-through sensor
• Damage on the pass-through sensor and flag
• Input option damaged
• Damaged option autoconnect cable
• Damaged system board
Tray 4 pass thru sensor made at
POR.
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaving page over the sensor
• defective pass thru sensor
1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used.
3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go to
“242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30,
244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-76
Go to
.
“242.32, 243.32, 244.32, 245.32—Paper
Jam service check” on page 2-78
.
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• If the problem persists, go to
Jam service check” on page 2-84
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-32
Service Manual
Error code
244.03
244.05
244.10
244.11
244.17
5026
Description Action
Pick timeout from tray 4 was exceeded without a tray 4 sensor break.
Possible causes:
• Tray 4 incorrect media setting
• Tray 4 incorrect paper loading
• Tray 4 incorrect media restraint setting
• Tray 4 assembly failure
• Aligner failure
• Transport belt module failure
Tray 4 picked, but page failed to reach the option sensor in time.
Possible causes:
• Tray 4 incorrect media setting
• Tray 4 incorrect paper loading
• Tray 4 incorrect media restraint setting
• Tray 4 paper pick mechanism assembly failure
• Loading card stock from the special media tray above the fill line
Tray 4 page exit pass thru made early.
Possible causes:
• Defective pass thru sensor
• Faulty cable in connector OPT1
1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
2. Maker sure proper media is set for the type of paper used in tray 4.
3. Fan the media, and stack flat in tray 4.
4. Properly set media restraints in tray 4.
If the problem persists, go to
Paper Jam service check” on page 2-85
.
1. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used in tray 4.
2. Fan media, and stack flat in tray 4.
3. Properly set the media restraints in tray 4.
4. Check the pick arm rolls (tires) in tray 4 and replace if worn.
If the problem persists, go to
“244.05—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-85
.
• Make sure proper media is set for the type of paper used in tray 4.
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• The exit pass thru sensor may not be functioning properly. Go to
Jam service check” on page 2-86
1. Ensure the proper media is set for the type of paper used in tray 4.
• Fan media, and then stack flat in tray 4.
• Properly set the media restraints in tray 4.
If the problem persists, go to
Paper Jam service check” on page 2-85
.
Tray 4 sensor never broke.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect tray 4 media setting
• Incorrect tray 4 paper loading
• Incorrect media restraint setting
• Paper tray failure
• Aligner failure
• Transport belt module failure
• Loading card stock from the special media tray above the fill line
• High humidity (replace paper)
Tray 4 detected a jam from idle.
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaving page over the sensor
• defective input sensor
• Faulty system board
• Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem,
“243.17—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-82
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-33
244.27
244.29
244.30
5026
Error code
244.21
244.26
244.32
Description Action
Tray 4 motor stalled.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect paper loading
• Paper pick mechanism failure
• Printer option cable connector damaged
• Input option damaged
• System board failure
While feeding from a lower tray, tray 4 pass thru sensor is not made.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect paper loading for the lower tray
• Incorrect media restraint setting for the lower tray
• Paper tray 4 assembly failure
• Paper tray 5 assembly failure
While feeding from a lower tray, tray 4 pass thru sensor did not break.
Possible cause is paper tray 4 assembly failure.
1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used.
3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go to
“242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30,
244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-76
.
1. Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
2. Make sure the proper media is set for the type of paper used in the lower tray.
3. Fan the media, and stack flat in the lower tray.
4. Properly set the media restraints in the lower tray.
5. Check the pick arm rolls in the lower feeding tray and replace if worn.
If the problem persists, go to
“244.26—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-87
.
• Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• Reseat option tray 4.
• If the problem persists, go to
Jam service check” on page 2-88
• Make sure that tray 4 is correctly inserted.
• If the problem persists, go to
Jam service check” on page 2-88
Tray 4 is not ready, or missing while printing.
Possible cause is paper tray 4 assembly failure.
Tray 4 page reached pass-through sensor early.
Possible cause:
• Incorrect paper loading
• Paper pick mechanism failure
• Pick arm roll damaged
• Defective pass-through sensor
• Input option damaged
Paper is jammed on tray 4 pass-through sensor during input options warm-up.
Possible damage:
• Obstruction on the pass-through sensor
• Damage on the pass-through sensor and flag
• Input option damaged
• Damaged option autoconnect cable
• Damaged system board
1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used.
3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go to
“242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30,
244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-76
.
• Go to
“242.32, 243.32, 244.32, 245.32—Paper
Jam service check” on page 2-78
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-34
Service Manual
Error code
245.02
245.03
245.05
245.10
245.11
245.17
5026
Description Action
Tray 5 pass thru sensor made at
POR.
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaving a page over the sensor
• Defective pass thru sensor
Pick timeout from tray 5 exceeded without a tray sensor break.
Possible causes:
• Tray 5 incorrect media setting
• Tray 5 incorrect paper loaded
• Tray 5 incorrect media restraint setting
• Tray 5 assembly failure
• Aligner failure
• Transport module failure
Possible causes:
• Incorrect media setting
• Incorrect paper loading
• Incorrect media restraint setting
• Tray 5 paper pick mechanism
• Loading card stock from the special media tray above the fill line
Tray 5 page exits pass thru sensor broken early.
Possible causes:
• Defective pass thru sensor
• Faulty cable in connector JOPT1 on the system board
Tray 5 sensor never broke.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect tray 5 media setting
• Incorrect tray 5 paper loading
• Incorrect media restraint setting
• Paper tray failure
• Aligner failure
• Transport belt module failure
• Loading card stock from the special media tray above the fill line
• High humidity (replace paper)
Tray 5 detected a jam from idle.
Possible causes:
• Paper jam leaves a page over the sensor
• Defective input sensor
• Faulty system board
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the media to jam.
• If the problem persists, go to
Jam service check” on page 2-92
1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
2. Make sure proper media is set for the type of paper used in tray 5.
3. Fan the media, and stack flat in tray 5.
4. Properly set the media restraints in tray 5.
If the problem persists, go to
Paper Jam service check” on page 2-90
.
1. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used in tray 5.
2. Fan media, and stack flat in tray 5.
3. Properly set the media restraints in tray 5.
4. Check the pick arm rolls (tires) in tray 5 and replace if worn.
If the problem persists, go to
“245.05—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-90
.
• Make sure the proper media is set for the type of paper used in tray 5.
• Check for anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to Jam.
• The exits pass thru sensor may not be functioning properly. Go to
1. Ensure the proper media is set for the type of paper used in tray 5.
2. Fan media, and then stack flat in tray 5.
3. Properly set the media restraints in tray 5.
4. Check the pick arm rolls (tires) in tray 5 and replace if worn.
If the problem persists, go to
Paper Jam service check” on page 2-90
.
• Clear away anything in the paper path that might cause the paper to jam.
• If the problem persists, go to
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-35
5026
Error code
245.21
245.29
245.30
245.32
250.03
250.05
2-36
Service Manual
Description Action
Tray 5 motor stalled.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect paper loading
• Paper pick mechanism failure
• Printer option cable connector damaged
• Input option damaged
• System board failure
Tray 5 is not ready or missing while printing.
Possible cause paper tray 5 assembly failure.
Tray 5 page reached pass-through sensor early.
Possible cause:
• Incorrect paper loading
• Paper pick mechanism failure
• Pick arm roll damaged
• Defective pass-through sensor
• Input option damaged
Paper is jammed on tray 5 pass-through sensor during input options warm-up.
Possible damage:
• Obstruction on the pass-through sensor
• Damage on the pass-through sensor and flag
• Input option damaged
• Damaged option autoconnect cable
• Damaged system board
While feeding from the multipurpose feeder, the input sensor did not break.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect media setting
• Incorrect paper loading
• Incorrect media restraint setting
• Transport belt failure
• Paper tray failure
While feeding from the multipurpose feeder, the input sensor is not made.
Possible causes:
• Incorrect media setting
• Incorrect paper loading
• Incorrect media restraint setting
• Multipurpose feeder pick mechanism failure
• System board failure
1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used.
3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go to
“242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30,
244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-76
.
• Make sure that tray 5 is correctly inserted.
• If the problem persists, go to
Jam service check” on page 2-93
1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used.
3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go to
“242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30,
244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-76
.
• Go to
“242.32, 243.32, 244.32, 245.32—Paper
Jam service check” on page 2-78
1. Remove all media present in the paper path.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used.
3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
4. Properly set media restraints in the paper tray.
5. Replace the paper tray.
If the problem persists, to
Jam error service check” on page 2-64
.
1. Remove all the media present in the paper path.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used.
3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
4. Properly set media restraints in the paper tray.
5. Check the MP feeder pick tires and clean if necessary.
6. Replace the paper tray.
If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go to
“146.xx, 148.xx—Motor (MPF/duplex) error service check” on page 2-55
Previous
Next
Go Back
Error code
250.21
5026
Description
Multipurpose feeder motor stalled.
Possible causes:
• Multipurpose feeder motor failure
• Cabling failure
• Multipurpose feeder gear assembly failure
• System board failure
• Defective media present sensor
Action
1. Remove all the media present in the paper path.
2. Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper used.
3. Fan media, and stack it flat in the tray or multipurpose feeder.
4. Properly set media restraints in the multipurpose feeder.
If the previous actions do not fix the problem, go to
“146.xx, 148.xx—Motor (MPF/duplex) error service check” on page 2-55
.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-37
5026
Error code Description
9xx service error messages
900.00–900.99
Software Error
(except 900.05)
900.05
Software Error.
Unrecoverable RIP software error.
Transfer module has failed
902.01–902.99
Engine Software Error
(except 902.59 and
902.60)
902.59
Error
902.60
Error
903.01–903.15
Engine Software Error
904.01–904.04
Software Error
905.00–905.99
Software Error
910.xx
Engine Software Error
920.01
POST Error
920.02
POST Error
920.03
POST Error
Action
Go to
“900.00–900.99 (except 900.05)—System software error service check” on page 2-93
Unrecoverable system software errors.
RIP NVRAM MGR problem.
Error communicating with cartridge.
Unrecoverable system software errors.
Unrecoverable system software errors.
Unrecoverable system software errors.
RIP software error interface violation
Multipurpose feeder/duplex motor assembly not connected.
Tray 1 motor not connected.
Transfer module not connected.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
Transfer module error service check” on page 2-96
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
POR the printer.
If the error message persists, go to
Engine software error, NVRAM MGR problem service check” on page 2-96
.
1. POR the printer.
2. If the error message persists, check for the correct cartridges.
3. Replace the cartridges.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• POR the printer.
• If the error persists, replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
920.01—POST (power-on self test) aligner error service check” on page 2-57
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
920.02—Autocomp (tray 1) motor error service check” on page 2-49
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
920.25—Transfer Module Missing or not connected service check” on page 2-97
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-38
Service Manual
Error code
920.04
POST Error
920.05
POST Error
920.06
POST Error
920.07
POST Error
920.08
POST Error
920.09
POST Error
920.10
POST Error
920.11
POST Error
920.12
POST Error
920.13
POST Error
920.14
POST Error
920.15
POST Error
5026
Description Action
Fuser motor not connected.
Printhead motor not connected.
Input sensor not connected.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
POST (power-on self test) fuser motor not connected error service check” on page 2-97
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
POST (power-on self test) printhead motor not connected error service check” on page 2-98
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
Input sensor service check” on page 2-99
Narrow media sensor not connected.
Exit sensor not connected.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
Exit sensor service check” on page 2-100
Four toner sensors are not connected.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
POST (power-on self test)—Four toner sensors not connected error service check” on page 2-102
Three toner sensors are not connected.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
POST (power-on self test)—Narrow media sensor error service check” on page 2-99
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
POST—Three toner sensors not connected error service check” on page 2-103
Two toner sensors are not connected.
One toner sensor is not connected.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
POST (power-on self test)—Two toner sensors not connected error service check” on page 2-104
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
POST (power-on self test)—One toner sensor not connected error service check” on page 2-105
Cartridge motor 1 (top) not connected.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
POST (power-on self test) cartridge motor 1 not connected error service check” on page 2-106
.
Cartridge motor 2 (middle) is not connected.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
POST (power-on self test)—Cartridge motor
2 not connected error service check” on page 2-107
.
Bad transfer module NVRAM data.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
920.20—POST (power-on self test)—Bad transfer module NVRAM data error service check” on page 2-108
.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-39
920.19
POST Error
920.20
POST Error
920.21
POST Error
920.22
POST Error
920.23
POST Error
920.25
POST Error
920.27
POST Error
920.28
POST Error
920.29
POST Error
5026
Error code
920.16
POST Error
920.17
POST Error
920.18
POST Error
Description Action
Bad printhead NVRAM data.
Output bin cable not connected.
Cartridge motor 3 (bottom) is not connected.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
POST (power-on self test)—Bad printhead
NVRAM data error service check” on page 2-108
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
POST (power-on self test)—Output bin cable not connected error service check” on page 2-109
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
POST (power-on self test)—Cartridge motor
3 not connected error service check” on page 2-110
.
Stepper motor not connected.
Incompatible transfer module.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
920.20—POST (power-on self test)—Bad transfer module NVRAM data error service check” on page 2-108
.
+24 V power supply failure.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the lowvoltage power supply. See
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
.
Fuser bubble sensor is not connected. If the error message persists, go to
“Bubble sensor service check” on page 2-122
Duplex motor is not connected.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
POST (power-on self test)—Duplex motor not connected error service check” on page 2-113
.
Bad temperature and humidity sensor.
• POR the printer.
• If the problem persists, go to
Transfer Module Missing or not connected service check” on page 2-97
.
Option board ID unknown.
Option type unknown.
If the error message persists, go to
920.28, 920.29—POST (power on self test) option tray error service check” on page 2-114
.
If the error message persists, go to
920.28, 920.29—POST (power on self test) option tray error service check” on page 2-114
.
Option product ID unknown.
If the error message persists, go to
920.28, 920.29—POST (power on self test) option tray error service check” on page 2-114
.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-40
Service Manual
Error code
920.30
POST Error
920.31
POST Error
920.32
925.01
Fan Error
925.02
Blower Error
925.03
Fan Error
925.04
Blower Error
925.05
Fan Error
925.06
Blower Error
945.01
Transfer Roll
945.02
Transfer Roll
945.03
Transfer Roll
Description
Option sensor disconnected.
Option hardware error (generic)
MPF paper present sensor not connected
Fan has stalled.
Blower has stalled.
Fan has stalled.
Blower has stalled.
Fan has stalled.
Blower has stalled.
Yellow transfer roll has failed.
Cyan transfer roll has failed.
Magenta transfer roll has failed.
5026
Action
Use the following list to determine which service check to use:
• Tray 2—Go to
“242.02—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-71
• Tray 3—Go to
“243.02—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-78
• Tray 4—Go to
“244.02—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-84
• Tray 5—Go to
“245.02—Paper Jam service check” on page 2-89
Contact your next level of support.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
MPF paper present sensor not connected service check” on page 2-114
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
925.03, 925.05—Fan error service check” on page 2-114
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
925.04, 925.06—Cartridge cooling fan error service check” on page 2-115
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
925.03, 925.05—Fan error service check” on page 2-114
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
925.04, 925.06—Cartridge cooling fan error service check” on page 2-115
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
925.03, 925.05—Fan error service check” on page 2-114
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
925.04, 925.06—Cartridge cooling fan error service check” on page 2-115
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
947.xx—Transfer roll error service check” on page 2-116
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
947.xx—Transfer roll error service check” on page 2-116
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
947.xx—Transfer roll error service check” on page 2-116
.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-41
5026
Error code
945.04
Transfer Roll
947.01
Transfer Roll
947.02
Transfer Roll
947.03
Transfer Roll
947.04
Transfer Roll
950.00–950.29
NVRAM Failure
951.01–951.99
NVRAM Failure
952.01–952.99
NVRAM Error
953.01–953.99
NVRAM Failure
954.01–954.99
NVRAM Failure
955.01–955.99
Code Failure
956.01–956.99
System Card Failure
957.00–857.99
System Failure
Description
Black transfer roll has failed.
Yellow transfer roll has failed.
Cyan transfer roll has failed.
Magenta transfer roll has failed.
Black transfer roll has failed.
A mismatch between the operator panel assembly and the system board.
System board NVRAM failure.
CRC error has occurred. This is recoverable.
Operator panel assembly NVRAM failure.
System NVRAM failure.
System board memory failure.
Processor failure.
ASIC failure.
Action
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
947.xx—Transfer roll error service check” on page 2-116
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
947.xx—Transfer roll error service check” on page 2-116
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
947.xx—Transfer roll error service check” on page 2-116
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
947.xx—Transfer roll error service check” on page 2-116
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
947.xx—Transfer roll error service check” on page 2-116
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
950.29—EPROM mismatch failure” on page 2-118
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Perform a POR to clear the error.
• POR the printer.
• Replace the operator panel assembly if the error message persists. See
“Operator panel assembly removal (C746)” on page 4-34
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, go to
System board failure service check” on page 2-119
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-42
Service Manual
5026
Error code
958.01–958.99
Memory Failure
959.00–959.05
Engine Code Error
959.20–959.28
System Failure
960.00—960.99
Memory Error
961.00–961.99
Memory Failure
962.00–962.99
Memory Failure
963.00–963.99
Memory Failure
964.00–964,88
Emulation Error
975.00–975.99
Network Error
976.00–976.99
Network Error
978.00–978.99
Network Error
979.00–979.99
Network Error
980.00–980.99
<device>
Communications Error
981.00–981.99
<device>
Communications Error
Description
Processor failure.
Invalid engine code
System board failure.
Memory failure.
Memory failure.
Memory failure.
Memory failure.
Download emulation CRC error.
Action
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, download the engine code again.
• POR the printer again.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, RAM soldered on board is bad. Replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, download code a second time.
Contact your next level of support.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Unrecognized network port.
Unrecoverable software error in network port.
Bad checksum while programming network port
Flash parts failed while programming network port.
Unreliable communications with specified device.
Contact your next level of support.
Contact your next level of support.
Contact your next level of support.
Protocol violation by specified device.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• POR the printer.
• If the error persists, replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Diagnostic information
2-43
5026
Error code
982.00–982.12
<device>
Communications Error
983.00–983.99
<device>
Communications Error
984.00–984.99
<device>
Communications Error
Description
Communications error by specified device.
Invalid command parameter by specified device.
Invalid command parameter by specified device.
Action
1. Turn the power off.
2. Remove, and reinstall the option.
3. Turn the main power back on.
4. Check all option interface connections if the problem remains.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Contact your next level of support.
990.00—990.29
Option Error
991.00–991.29
<device> Error
1565 Emul Error Load
Emul Option
In IRs
Specified device has detected an error.
• POR the printer.
• If the error message persists, replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
The DLE version contained in the firmware card will not function with the printer code. The message automatically clears in 30 seconds and the DLE is disabled. Download the correct version of the DLE.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-44
Service Manual
5026
Service checks
31.xx—Cartridge errors service check
Step Questions / actions
1
POR the printer.
Did this fix the problem?
2
Replace the toner cartridge.
Did this fix the problem?
3
Reseat the toner cartridges and make sure they are installed to their correct color slots.
Did this fix the problem?
4
5
1. Check the contacts on the toner cartridge chip for damage and contamination.
2. Clean the contacts.
Are the chip contacts damaged?
1. Check the cartridge contact and bell crank on the printer.
2. Press each of the contacts to check the spring force.
3. Check the bell crank for any damage.
Are the bell crank and cartridge contacts damaged?
6
1. Check JSB1 on the system board for proper connection.
2. Check for damage and pinch points on the connector.
3. Reseat cable.
Is the cable connector free of damaged?
7
Check the whole length of the cable going to the cartridge contact. Check for any damage and pinch points.
Are the cables damaged?
8
Replace the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Did this fix the problem?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Problem resolved.
Problem resolved.
Replace toner cartridge.
Replace the cartridge contact with bell crank.
Note:
Only replace the parts that are damaged.
Replace the cartridge contact with bell crank.
Note:
Only replace the parts that are damaged.
Replace the cartridge contact with bell crank.
Note:
Only replace the parts that are damaged.
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 7.
Go to step 8.
Replace the cartridge contact with bell crank.
Note:
Only replace the parts that are damaged.
110.xx—Mirror motor service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
View the Event Log:
1. Turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer.
2. Select EVENT LOG.
3. Select Display Log.
Has an 110.xx error occurred three times or more?
Yes
Replace the printhead. See
“Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-145
Go to step 2.
No
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-45
5026
Step Questions / actions
2
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
. Check the cable in connector JMIRR1 for proper connection to the system board, the printhead cable for pinch points, and the cable or connector for any other damage.
Is the cable damaged?
3
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
4
Perform the printhead verification to check whether the new printhead will solve the problem. See
“Printhead verification” on page 3-39
.
Perform the Mirror Motor Test. See
Did the Mirror Motor pass the test?
Yes
Replace the printhead. See
“Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-145
Go to step 3.
No
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Replace the printhead. See
“Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-145
Go to step 4.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
111.xx, 112.xx, 113.xx, and 114.xx—Printhead error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
View the Event Log:
1. Turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer.
2. Select EVENT LOG.
3. Select Display Log.
Has an 111.xx,112.xx, 113.xx, or 114.xx error occurred three times or more?
2
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
. Check the cable in connector JPH1 for proper connection to the system board, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or connector for any other damage.
Is the cable damaged?
3
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
4
Perform the printhead verification to check whether the new printhead solves the problem. See
“Printhead verification” on page 3-39
.
Perform the Servo Laser Test. See
.
Did the printhead motor pass the test?
Yes
Replace the printhead. See
“Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-145
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the 5 V interlock
“5 V interlock switch cable removal” on page 4-61
.
Go to step 3.
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Replace the printhead. See
“Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-145
Go to step 4.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-46
Service Manual
120.xx—Fuser error service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
Check the input voltage switch on the back of the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
Note:
Some LVPS FRU do not have switches and switch automatically. If your does not have a switch, go to step 2.
Yes
Go to step 2.
230
5026
Previous
No
Set the switch for the proper country voltage.
Next
Go Back
2
A
Is the voltage level (115 V/230 V) properly set?
.
2. Check the fuser AC autoconnect cable for damage, check the other end of the cable for damaged pins.
Fuser autoconnects
Replace the appropriate
“Fuser AC cable removal” on page 4-112
“Fuser DC cable removal” on page 4-113
Go to step 3.
3. Check the fuser DC autoconnect cable for damaged pins.
DC autoconnect
On printer
AC autoconnect
Are the connections damaged?
3
Replace the fuser. See
Does the error clear?
Problem resolved.
Go to step 4.
Diagnostic information
2-47
5026
Step Questions / actions
4
Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
. Check the cable in connector JFUSER1 (fuser DC cable) for proper connection to the system board, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or connector for any other damage.
Is the cable damaged?
5
Check the cable in connector JLVPS2 for proper connection to the system board, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or connector for any other damage.
Is the cable damaged?
6
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
7
Check for the following continuity between the
DC autoconnect JFUSER1 on the system board.
JFUSER1 DC autoconnect
Pin 9
Pin 10
Pin 9
Pin 10
Yes
Replace the fuser DC
“Fuser DC cable removal” on page 4-113
Replace the LVPS. See
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
Go to step 5.
No
Go to step 6.
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Go to step 8.
Go to step 7.
Replace the fuser DC cable. See
“Fuser DC cable removal” on page 4-113
.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is continuity present?
8
Check for continuity between the following pins of the AC autoconnect and the pins of the connector that connects to the LVPS.
LVPS connect
Pin 1
Pin 3
AC Autoconnect
Pin 5
Pin 1
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Replace the fuser AC cable. See
“Fuser AC cable removal” on page 4-112
.
Is continuity present?
2-48
Service Manual
5026
140.xx, 920.02—Autocomp (tray 1) motor error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
3
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Check the cable in connector JFDPCK1 for proper connection to the system board, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or connector for any other damage.
4. Reseat the cable.
5. POR the printer.
Did the error clear?
2
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
1. Disconnect the cable in the connector
JFDPCK1.
2. Connect the cable for the new paper pick mechanism.
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(Turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
4. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > Tray 1.
Did the new pick motor turn before the feed error occur?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Replace the paper pick mechanism. See
“Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-137
Go to step 3.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
142.xx, 906.01–906.04—Motor (fuser) error service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Check the cables in connectors JCARTP1 and JCARTS1 (cartridge motor 1/fuser motor cable) for proper connection to the system board, for cable pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or connectors.
Is either cable damaged?
Yes
Go to step 3.
Go to step 2.
No
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-49
5026
Step
2
Questions / actions
1. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
2. Check the cartridge motor 1/fuser motor cable for proper connection to the EP drive assembly (A), for pinch points for the cable, and for cable or connector damage.
Yes
Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
No
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is either cable damaged?
3
Replace the cartridge motor1/fuser motor
“Cartridge motor 1/fuser cable removal” on page 4-67
.
Note:
Make sure to check the replacement cable first before installation, leaving the original cable in place. Make sure to verify if the new cable is working properly. If new cable does not correct problem, do not install it.
Did the error clear?
4
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
5
1. Plug the cartridge motor1/fuser motor cable to a new EP drive assembly.
2. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(Turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
3. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > Tray 1.
Did the error clear?
Problem solved Go to step 4.
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Replace EP drive assembly. See
(EP) drive assembly removal” on page 4-90
.
Go to step 5.
replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
2-50
Service Manual
143.xx—Motor (EP drive assembly top cartridge 1 motor) error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Check the cable in connector JCARTP1 and JCARTS1 (cartridge motor 1/fuser motor cable) for proper connection to the system board, for the cable for pinch points, and for the cable or connector for any other damage.
Is the cable damaged?
2
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
. Check the cartridge motor 1/fuser motor cable (A) for proper connection to the EP drive assembly, for pinch points for the cable, or damage to the cable or connector.
Yes
Replace the cartridge motor 1/fuser cable. See
“Cartridge motor 1/fuser cable removal” on page 4-67
.
Replace the cartridge motor 1/fuser motor cable.
See
“Cartridge motor 1/ fuser cable removal” on page 4-67
.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
4
Is either cable damaged?
3
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
1. Disconnect the cartridge motor 1/fuser motor cable on the motor and on the system board.
2. Connect a new motor 1/fuser motor cable on the motor and on the system board.
3. Run diagnostics motor check. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu (turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and
6
, then turn on the printer).
4. Select MOTOR TESTS.
Did the motor run?
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Replace the cartridge motor 1/fuser motor cable.
See
“Cartridge motor 1/ fuser cable removal” on page 4-67
.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Diagnostic information
2-51
5026
Step
5
6
Questions / actions
1. Return the old motor 1/fuser motor cable.
2. Disconnect the motor drive cable from the
EP drive assembly and connect it to the motor on a new EP drive assembly.
Note:
Do not install the new EP drive assembly yet.
3. Run diagnostic motor check. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu (turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and
6
, then turn on the printer).
4. Select MOTOR TESTS.
Did the motor run?
1. Connect the new EP drive assembly with a new cable from outside the machine.
2. Run diagnostics motor check. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu (turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and
6
, then turn on the printer).
3. Select MOTOR TESTS.
Did motor run?
Yes
Replace the EP drive assembly. See
(EP) drive assembly removal” on page 4-90
.
Replace the cable.
Go to step 6.
No
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
144.xx—Motor (EP drive assembly middle cartridge) error service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Check the cables in connector JCARTP2 and JCARTS2 (cartridge motor 2/3 cable) for proper connection to the system board, for cable pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
Yes
Replace cartridge motor 2/
3 cable. See
“Cartridge motor 2/3 cable removal” on page 4-69
.
Go to step 2.
No
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-52
Service Manual
Step Questions / actions
2
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
. Check the cartridge motor 2/3 cable for proper connection to the
EP drive assembly, pinch points for the cable, or damage to the cable or connector (A).
Yes
Replace the cartridge motor 2/3 cable. See
“Cartridge motor 2/3 cable removal” on page 4-69
.
Go to step 3.
No
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
4
Is either cable damaged?
3
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
1. Disconnect the cartridge motor 2/3 cable on the motor and on the system board.
2. Connect a new motor 1/fuser motor cable on the motor and on the system board.
3. Run diagnostics motor check. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu (turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and
6
, then turn on the printer).
4. Select MOTOR TESTS.
5
Did the motor run?
1. Return the old cartridge motor 2/3 motor cable.
2. Disconnect the motor drive cable from the
EP drive assembly and connect it to the motor on a new EP drive assembly.
Note:
Do not install the new EP drive assembly yet.
3. Run diagnostic motor check. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu (turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and
6
, then turn on the printer).
4. Select MOTOR TESTS.
Did the motor run?
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Replace the cartridge motor 2/3 cable. See
“Cartridge motor 2/3 cable removal” on page 4-69
.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Replace the EP drive assembly. See
(EP) drive assembly removal” on page 4-90
.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Diagnostic information
2-53
5026
145.xx—Motor (EP drive assembly bottom cartridge) error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Check the cables in connector JCARTP2 and JCARTS2 (cartridge motor 2/3 cable) for proper connection to the system board, for cable pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
2
Remove the right cover. Check the cartridge motor 2/3 cable for proper connection to the
EP drive assembly, pinch points for the cable, and damage to the cable or connector (A).
Yes
Replace cartridge motor 2/
3 cable. See
“Cartridge motor 2/3 cable removal” on page 4-69
.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the cartridge motor 2/3 cable. See
“Cartridge motor 2/3 cable removal” on page 4-69
.
Go to step 3.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4
Is either cable damaged?
3
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
1. Disconnect the motor drive cable from the
EP drive assembly and connect it to the motor on a new EP drive assembly.
Note:
Do not install the new EP drive assembly yet.
2. Run diagnostic motor check. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu (turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and
6
, then turn on the printer).
3. Select MOTOR TESTS.
Did the motor run?
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Replace the EP drive assembly. See
(EP) drive assembly removal” on page 4-90
.
Go to step 4.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
2-54
Service Manual
5026
146.xx, 148.xx—Motor (MPF/duplex) error service check
Step
1
2
3
4
Questions / actions
1. Open the rear frame cover.
2. Reseat JDX1 cable.
Does the problem persist?
1. Remove the tray.
2. Check the MPF/duplex gear for any damage.
3. Check if the MPF/duplex gear can engage the duplex drive gear.
4. Manually turn the gear and check for any damage.
Does the error still exist?
1. Open the front door cover.
2. Disengage the duplex belt connecting to duplex drive gear/duplex rollers. The duplex reference edge assembly should not turn for isolation.
3. Remove the input tray.
4. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(Turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
5. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > Duplex >
Forward
or Reverse.
6. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > MPF Test>
Forward
or Reverse.
Does the error still exist?
1. Connect a new MPF motor with cable to the JDX1 connector on the system board from outside of the machine.
2. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(Turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
3. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > Duplex >
Forward
or Reverse.
Note:
Perform this test for 5 to 10 seconds only.
4. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > MPF Test>
Forward
or Reverse.
Note:
Perform this test for 5 to 10 seconds only.
5. Check if the motor would turn for each test.
Does this clear the problem?
Yes
Go to step 2.
Replace the MPF/duplex gear. See
“Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex gear and housing removal” on page 4-123
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
No
Problem resolved.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 7.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-55
5026
Step Questions / actions
5
1. Disconnect the MPF motor cable on the motor side.
2. Connect a new motor from outside of the machine.
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(Turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
4. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > Duplex >
Forward
or Reverse.
Note:
Perform this test for 5 to 10 seconds only.
5. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > MPF Test>
Forward
or Reverse.
Note:
Perform this test for 5 to 10 seconds only.
6. Check if the motor would turn for each test.
Does the error still exist?
6
Connect a new MPF motor cable to the old
MPF motor and connect it to JDX1 connector on the system board.
Does the error still exist?
Yes
Go to step 6.
Go to step 7.
No
Replace the MPF duplex motor assembly. See
(MPF)/duplex motor assembly removal” on page 4-125
.
7
8
1. Open the front door cover.
2. Check the duplex reference edge guide assembly for any damage.
3. Check rollers and belts for damage and misalignment.
4. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(Turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
5. Remove the input tray.
6. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > Duplex >
Forward
.
7. Check if the duplex assembly runs.
8. Check if the MPF/duplex gear turns.
Is the duplex reference edge guide assembly free of damage?
1. Check the front door assembly gears that engages to the MPF/duplex gear for any damage.
2. Close the front door assembly and open the front door cover.
3. Check if the front door cover assembly gears can engage the MPF/duplex gear.
4. Manually turn the gears.
5. Check the front door assembly for any damage.
Is the front door assembly gear or the front door assembly damaged?
Replace the duplex reference edge guide assembly. See
“Duplex reference edge guide assembly removal” on page 4-87
.
Replace the front door assembly. See
“Front door assembly removal” on page 4-100
Replace the MPF/duplex motor cable. See
(MPF)/duplex motor cable removal” on page 4-128
.
Go to step 8.
Go to step 9.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-56
Service Manual
5026
Step Questions / actions
9
1. Check the MPF tray for any damage.
2. Manually turn the MPF gear on the tray, and check if the MPF pick arm assembly would turn.
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(Turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
4. Lift the MPF pick arm using the lever.
5. Select MOTOR TESTS > MPF >
Forward
.
6. Check if the pick arm would turn.
Is the MPF pick arm assembly free of damage?
10
Remove the input tray and insert a new one.
Does this fix the problem?
Yes
Go to step 10.
Problem resolved.
No
Replace the input tray.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
147.xx, 920.01—POST (power-on self test) aligner error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Check JFDPCK1 connector for proper connection and damage.
4. Reseat the connector.
5. POR the printer.
6. Perform a print test.
Is the problem still present?
2
Check the cable in the connector JFDPCK1 for pinch points and for any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
3
1. Disconnect the cable in connector
JFDPCK1 and connect the cable from the new paper pick mechanism to JFDPCK1.
Let the paper pick assembly hang.
2. Close the front cover and install the waste box on the side of the printer.
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
4. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > Align
Motor Test > Forward
.
Does the aligner motor run?
Yes
Go to step 2.
Replace paper pick mechanism. See
“Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-137
Replace the paper pick mechanism. See
“Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-137
No
Problem resolved.
Go to step 3.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-57
5026
155.xx—Cam motor error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Check the motor driver cable in connector
JDVR1 on the system board for proper connection, for cable pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
2
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
. Check the motor driver cable (A) for proper connection to the
EP drive assembly, pinch points for the cable, and damage for the cable or connector.
Yes
Replace the motor driver
“Motor driver cable removal” on page 4-122
Replace the motor driver
“Motor driver cable removal” on page 4-122
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the cable damaged?
3
Check the CAM motor cable from the cam motor to the motor driver card for poor connections or damage.
Replace the EP drive assembly. See
(EP) drive assembly removal” on page 4-90
.
Go to step 4.
Is the cable damaged?
4
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Go to step 5.
2-58
Service Manual
Step Questions / actions
5
Visually inspect the motor driver card.
Yes
Replace the motor driver
“Motor driver card removal” on page 4-121
No
Go to step 6.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
6
7
Is the motor driver card damaged?
1. Connect a new motor driver card without mounting it to the printer.
2. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
3. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > CAM.
Did the motor run?
1. Reinstall old motor driver card to the printer.
2. Plug in the CAM motor of the EP drive assembly to the EP driver card electrically without installing it into printer.
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
4. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > CAM.
Did the motor run?
Install the new motor driver card.
Go to step 7.
Replace EP drive assembly. See
(EP) drive assembly removal” on page 4-90
.
Replace system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Diagnostic information
2-59
5026
156.xx—COD (Color On Demand) motor service check
Step Questions / actions
1
3
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Check the cable in connector JBOR1 on the system board for proper connection, for cable pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
2
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
1. Disconnect the cable in connector JBOR1 and then connect the cable from the new
COD group assembly.
2. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
3. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > COD >
Forward
. If nothing happens, select
Reverse
.
Did the COD motor pass the test?
Yes
Replace the COD assembly. See
“Color on demand assembly removal” on page 4-70
.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Replace the COD assembly. See
“Color on demand assembly removal” on page 4-70
.
Go to step 3.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
160.xx, 161.xx—Motor Error (option tray 2) service check
Step
1
2
Questions / actions
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Reseat option tray 2.
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
4. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > Tray 2 >
Single
.
Did the page print?
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Check the option cable in connector
JOPT1 on the system board for proper connection, for cable pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or connector
Is the cable damaged?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-60
Service Manual
Step Questions / actions
3
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
.
Check the option cable for pinch points and any damage.
Yes
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 4.
No
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the cable damaged?
4
Is the option tray 2 the high-capacity input tray
(2,000-sheet feeder)?
Replace the HCIT top plate assembly. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
Replace the option tray 2 assembly.
162.xx, 163.xx—Motor Error (option tray 3) service check
Step Questions / actions
1
2
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Reseat option tray 3.
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
4. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > Tray 3 >
Single
.
Did the page print?
1. Remove all input options connected to the machine.
2. Connect tray 3 directly on the printer making it tray 2.
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, and turn on the printer).
4. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > Tray 2 >
Single
.
Did the page print?
3
Check the top and bottom autoconnect connectors of tray 2 (input option above tray
3) for damages.
Are the autoconnect connectors damaged?
4
Check the top and bottom autoconnect connectors of tray 3 for damages.
Are the autoconnect connectors damaged?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 3.
Replace tray 2 550 input option
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 4
Go to step 4.
• For 550 option, replace tray 3 550 input option.
• For HCIT, replace the
HCIT top plate assembly.
Go to step 5.
Diagnostic information
2-61
5026
Step
5
Questions / actions
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Check the option cable in connector
JOPT1 on the system board for proper connection, for cable pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or connector.
4. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
5. Check the option cable for pinch points and any damage.
6. Check the autoconnect connector for damage.
Is the cable damaged?
Yes
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
164.xx, 165.xx—Motor Error (option tray 4) service check
No
• For 550 option, replace tray 3 550 input option.
• For HCIT, replace the
HCIT top plate assembly.
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Reseat option tray 4.
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
4. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > Tray 4 >
Single
.
Did the page print?
2
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Check the option cable in connector JOPT1 on the system board for proper connection, for cable pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
3
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
.
Check the option cable for pinch points and any damage.
Yes
Problem resolved.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the cable damaged?
2-62
Service Manual
5026
Step Questions / actions
4
Is the option tray 4 the high-capacity input tray
(2,000-sheet feeder)?
Yes
Replace the HCIT top plate assembly. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
No
Replace the option tray 4 assembly.
166.xx, 167.xx—Motor Error (option tray 5) service check
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Reseat option tray 5.
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
4. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > Tray 5 >
Single
.
Did the page print?
2
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Check the option cable in connector
JOPT1) on the system board for proper connection, for cable pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
3
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
.
Check the option cable for pinch points and any damage.
Yes
Problem resolved.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the cable damaged?
4
Is the option tray 5 the high-capacity input tray
(2,000-sheet feeder)?
Replace the HCIT top plate assembly. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
Replace the option tray 5 assembly.
Diagnostic information
2-63
5026
168.xx—Motor (HCIT elevator) error service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
Is the paper properly loaded in the highcapacity input tray (HCIT)?
Yes
Go to step 2.
2
3
4
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Reseat option the HCIT option.
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
4. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > HCIT >
Single
.
Did the error clear?
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Check the option cable in connector
JOPT1 on the system board for proper connection, for cable pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
1. Remove the HCIT right cover. See
“HCIT right cover removal” on page 4-196
.
2. Check the cable in the HCIT.
Is the cable damaged?
Problem resolved.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Replace the elevator-up cable.
No
Fan the media, and then stack flat in the HCIT drawer.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Replace the elevator motor with sensor. See
“HCIT elevator motor with sensor removal” on page 4-200
.
200.11, 250.03—Paper Jam error service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
Open the front access door. Turn the transport belt gear clockwise.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the transport belt.
“Transfer module removal” on page 4-171
Previous
Next
Go Back
Did the transport belt move?
2-64
Service Manual
5026
Step Questions / actions
2
Run align motor test with old pick assembly installed in the machine.
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > Align
Motor Test > Forward
.
Can you hear the align motor run?
3
1. Plug in the new pick assembly into the
JFDPCK1 connector from outside the machine.
2. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
3. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > Align
Motor Test > Forward
.
Can you hear the align motor run?
Yes
Go to
“920.06—Input sensor service check” on page 2-99
.
Go to step 3.
No
Replace the paper pick mechanism. See
“Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-137
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
201.06, 201.08, 201.31—Paper Jam error service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
Open the front access door. Turn the transport belt gear clockwise.
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the transport module. See
“Transfer module removal” on page 4-171
.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2
Did the transport belt move?
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Perform the Align Motor Test. See
Can you hear the align motor run?
Go to step 3.
Replace the paper pick mechanism. See
“Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-137
.
Diagnostic information
2-65
5026
Step Questions / actions
3
Turn the printer off, and then remove the fuser. See
.
Yes
Replace the fuser. See
Go to step 4.
No
Previous
Next
Go Back
5
Is the exit sensor flag damaged?
4
Verify the paper is loaded properly in the paper tray or manual feed slot.
Is the paper properly loaded?
.
Note:
Do not reset the fuser count until the problem is resolved.
2. Turn the printer off.
3. POR the printer.
Did the error clear?
6
Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
Check the fuser DC cable in the connector
JFUSER1 for proper connection to the system board, for pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or the connector.
Is the cable damaged?
7
1. POR the printer.
2. Place a voltmeter between pin 8 and pin 6 on the JFUSER1 connector.
Go to step 5.
Problem resolved
Replace the fuser DC
“Fuser DC cable removal” on page 4-113
Go to step 8.
Load paper correctly.
Replace the original fuser, and go to step 6.
Go to step 7
Replace the system board.
.
Pin 8
Does the meter read +5 V dc?
Pin 6
(ground)
2-66
Service Manual
Step Questions / actions
8
Place a voltmeter between Fuser DC autoconnect pin 8 and ground (pin 6).
Yes
Go to step 9.
5026
No
Replace the fuser DC cable. See
“Fuser DC cable removal” on page 4-113
.
Previous
Next
Go Back
9
Does the meter read +5 V dc?
.
2. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
3. Navigate to SENSOR TESTS > Dynamic
Sensors
> Fuser Exit.
4. Open the front access door and the top access cover.
Problem resolved Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Did the fuser exit sensor change from Open to
Closed?
Diagnostic information
2-67
5026
203.09—Paper Jam error service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
Open the front access door. Turn the transport belt gear clockwise.
Yes
Go to step 2.
Previous
No
Replace the transport belt.
“Transfer module removal” on page 4-171
Next
Go Back
Did the transport belt move?
2
Turn the printer off, and then remove the fuser. See
.
Replace the fuser. See
Go to step 3.
Is the exit sensor flag damaged?
3
Verify the paper is loaded properly in the paper tray or manual feed slot.
Is the paper properly loaded?
4
Replace the fuser. See
Did the error clear?
5
1. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
2. Check the fuser DC cable in the connector
JFUSER1 for proper connection to the system board, for pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or the connector.
Is the cable damaged?
Go to step 4.
Problem resolved.
Replace the fuser DC
“Fuser DC cable removal” on page 4-113
Load paper correctly.
Remove the new fuser, and go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
2-68
Service Manual
Step
6
Questions / actions
1. POR the printer.
2. Place a voltmeter between pin 8 and pin 6
(ground) on the JFUSER1 connector on the system board.
Yes
Go to step 7.
5026
No
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Previous
Next
Go Back
Pin 8 Pin 6
(ground)
3. Does the meter read +5 V dc?
7
Place a voltmeter between the fuser autoconnect pin 8 and ground (6).
Go to step 8.
Replace the fuser DC cable. See
“Fuser DC cable removal” on page 4-113
.
Does the meter read +5 V dc?
Diagnostic information
2-69
5026
Step
8
Questions / actions
.
2. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
3. Navigate to SENSOR TESTS > Dynamic
Sensors > Fuser Exit
.
4. Open the front access door and top access cover.
5. Activate the fuser exit sensor.
Yes
Problem resolved.
No
Replace the system board.
.
Previous
Next
Go Back
6. Did the fuser exit sensor change from
Open to Closed?
230.03, 230.05—Paper Jam error service check
Step
1
2
Questions / actions
Check the tray for any damage.
Is the tray damaged?
Check the MPF duplex gear for any damage.
Is the MPF Duplex gear damaged?
3
1. Turn the printer off
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Check the MPF/duplex motor cable in connector JDX1 for proper connection to the system board, cable pinch points, and any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
4
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
Yes
Replace the tray.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the MPF duplex gear. See
“Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex gear and housing removal” on page 4-123
Replace the MPF duplex motor cable. See
(MPF)/duplex motor cable removal” on page 4-128
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Go to step 5.
2-70
Service Manual
5026
Step
5
6
7
8
Questions / actions
• Check the front access cover for any damage.
• Make sure the front access cover can close correctly.
• Check the front access cover if its securely fastened to its hinge.
Is the front access cover damaged?
1. Check the duplex reference edge guide assembly for damages.
2. Check the gears, rollers and belt for damage and contamination. Manually turn the gears.
Is the duplex reference edge guide assembly damaged?
1. Check the front door for any damage.
2. Check the paper path for any obstruction.
3. Check roller gears for any damage.
Is the front door assembly damaged?
1. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
2. Check the MPF duplex motor assembly for proper installation.
3. Check the connectors. Reseat the connector on the motor side and JDX1 on the system board.
Is the MPF duplex motor assembly damage?
Yes
Replace the front access cover. See
“Front access cover assembly removal” on page 4-29
.
Go to step 6.
No
Replace the duplex reference edge guide assembly. See
“Duplex reference edge guide assembly removal” on page 4-87
.
Replace the front door assembly. See
“Front door assembly removal” on page 4-100
Replace the MPF duplex motor assembly. See
(MPF)/duplex motor assembly removal” on page 4-125
Go to step 7.
Go to step 8.
“920.06—Input sensor service check” on page 2-99
242.02—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
2
Questions / actions
Has paper been fed from an input option before?
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
4. Check the cable in connector JOPT1 for proper connection to the system board, cable pinch points, and any other damage to the cable or connector.
Yes
Go to step 4.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the cable damaged?
Diagnostic information
2-71
5026
Step Questions / actions
3
Carefully lift the printer off the option, and lay the printer on its back. Check the option connector for damage.
Yes
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 4.
No
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the option cable connector or cable damaged?
4
Replace the complete tray 2 option.
Does the error clear?
Problem resolved.
242.03, 242.11—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
2
Questions / actions
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Select PRINT TESTS.
3. Select a tray below tray 2
4. Select Single.
Did the page feed correctly?
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Open the front access door.
3. Turn the transport belt gear clockwise.
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 3.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the transport belt.
“Transfer module removal” on page 4-171
3
Did the transport belt move?
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > Align
Motor Test
.
Can you hear the align motor run?
Go to step 4.
2-72
Service Manual
Replace the paper pick mechanism. See
“Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-137
.
5026
Step Questions / actions
4
Is tray 2 a high-capacity input tray (2,000sheet feeder)?
Yes
Replace the HCIT top plate. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
No
Replace the entire tray 2 option.
242.05—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
2
3
Questions / actions
Has the paper been fed from an input option before?
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > select a tray below tray 2 > Single.
Did the page feed correctly?
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
4. Check the cable in connector JOPT1 for proper connection to the system board, cable pinch points, and any other damage to the cable or connector.
Yes
Go to step 5.
Problem resolved.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the cable damaged?
Diagnostic information
2-73
5026
Step Questions / actions
4
Carefully lift the printer off the option, and lay the printer on its back.
Check the option connector for damage.
Yes
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 5.
No
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the connector damaged?
5
Is tray 2 a high-capacity input tray (2,000sheet feeder)?
6
Replace the tray 2 option.
Does the error clear?
7
Replace the HCIT top plate. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
.
Go to step 7.
Problem resolved.
Problem resolved.
242.10—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > select a tray below tray 2 > Single.
Did the page print correctly?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 6.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
No
Replace the complete tray 2 option.
2-74
Service Manual
242.17—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
2
Questions / actions
Has paper been fed from an input option before?
1. Turn the printer off
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
4. Check the cable in connector JOPT1 for proper connection to the system board, cable pinch points, and any other damage to the cable or connector.
Yes
Go to step 4.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the cable damaged?
3
Carefully lift the printer off the option, and lay the printer on its back. Check the option connector for damage.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 4.
Is the option cable connector or cable damaged?
4
Is tray 2 an high-capacity input tray (HCIT)?
Replace the HCIT top plate. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
Replace the complete tray 2 option.
Diagnostic information
2-75
5026
242.21, 243.21, 244.21. 245.21, 242.30, 243.30, 244.30, 245.30—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
2
Questions / actions
1. Fan the media on the tray.
• Use Tray 2 for 242.21 and 242.30 errors.
• Use Tray 3 for 243.21 and 243.30 errors.
• Use Tray 4 for 244.21 and 244.30 errors.
• Use Tray 5 for 245.21 and 245.30 errors.
2. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
3. Navigate to Print Test > Tray # > Single.
Does the printer feed from tray 2 successfully?
1. Remove printer from the option tray.
2. Inspect the autonnect cables on the option tray.
Is the autoconnect connector damaged?
3
• For 550 input option, install a new 550 input option.
• For HCIT input option, install a new top plate assembly. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
Does this fix the problem?
4
For HCIT input option, replace the HCIT
controller board assembly. See
“HCIT controller board assembly removal” on page 4-199
Does this fix the problem?
Yes
Problem resolved.
• For 550 input option, replace the 550 input option.
• For HCIT input option, replace the HCIT top plate assembly. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
.
• For 550 input option, replace the 550 input option.
• For HCIT input option, replace the HCIT top plate assembly. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
.
Problem resolved
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
242.26—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
1. Determine the input tray.
2. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
3. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > select the tray you indicated > Single.
Did the page feed correctly?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-76
Service Manual
5026
Step Questions / actions
2
Is the tray 3 a high-capacity input tray (2,000sheet feeder)?
Yes
Replace the HCIT top plate. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
242.27—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
2
Questions / actions
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > select the tray below tray 2 > Single.
Did the page feed correctly?
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Open the front access door.
3. Turn the transport belt gear clockwise.
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 3.
No
Replace the complete tray 3 option.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the transport belt.
“Transfer module removal” on page 4-171
Previous
Next
Go Back
3
Did the transport belt move?
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to MOTOR TESTS > Align
Motor Test
.
Can you hear the align motor run?
Replace the complete tray 2 option.
242.29—Paper Jam service check
Replace the paper pick mechanism. See
“Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-137
.
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > Tray 5 >
Single
.
Did the page feed correctly?
2
Is tray 2 a high-capacity input tray (2,000sheet feeder)?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the HCIT elevator up sensor. See
“HCIT elevator motor with sensor removal” on page 4-200
Replace the complete tray 2 option.
Diagnostic information
2-77
5026
242.32, 243.32, 244.32, 245.32—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
2
3
Questions / actions
1. Remove the input option tray.
• Remove tray 2 for 242.32 errors.
• Remove tray 3 for 243.32 errors.
• Remove tray 4 for 244.32 errors.
• Remove tray 5 for 245.32 errors.
2. Check for obstruction on the paper path.
3. Check the input option pass-through sensor flag for any damage.
4. Remove the input option from the printer and check the autoconnect connector for damage.
Is the input option damaged?
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to Print Test > Tray # > Single.
Does the printer print correctly?
• For 550 input option, try installing an new
550 input option.
• For HCIT input option, install a new top plate assembly to verify the problem.
Does this fix the problem?
Yes
Replace the input option tray.
If the input option is an
HCIT, replace the HCIT top plate assembly. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Go to step 3.
4
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
4. Check the connector JOPT1 for proper connection to the system board, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or connector for any other damage.
5. Reseat JOPT1.
6. Carefully lift the printer off the options, and lay the printer on its back.
7. 7.Check the option connector for damage is the option cable connector damage?
• For 550 input option, replace the 550 input option assembly.
• For HCIT input option, replace the top plate assembly. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 4.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
243.02—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
Has paper been fed from an input option before?
Yes
Go to step 4.
Go to step 2.
No
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-78
Service Manual
Step
2
Questions / actions
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
4. Check the connector JOPT1 for proper connection to the system board, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or connector for any other damage.
Yes
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 3.
No
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the cable damaged?
3
Carefully lift the printer off the option, and lay the printer on its back.
Check the option connector for damage.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 4.
Is the connector damaged?
4
Replace the complete tray 3 option.
Does the error clear?
Problem resolved.
243.03, 243.11—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > select a tray below tray 3 > Single.
Did the page print correctly?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Go to step 2.
No
Diagnostic information
2-79
5026
Step Questions / actions
2
Is tray 3 a high-capacity input option (2,000sheet feeder)?
Yes
Replace the HCIT top plate. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
243.05—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
2
3
Questions / actions
Has paper been fed from an input option before?
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > select a tray below tray 3 > Single.
Did the page print correctly?
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
4. Check the connector at JOPT1 on the system board for proper connection, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or connector for any other damage.
Yes
Go to step 5.
Problem resolved.
Replace the option cable.
No
Replace the complete tray 3 option.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the cable damaged?
2-80
Service Manual
Step
4
Questions / actions
1. Carefully lift the printer off the option, and lay the printer on its back.
2. Check the option connector for damage.
Yes
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 5.
No
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the connector damaged?
5
Is tray 3 a high-capacity input option (2,000sheet feeder)?
6
Replace the complete tray 3 option.
Does the error clear?
7
Replace the high-capacity input tray (2,000sheet feeder)?
Go to step 7.
Problem resolved.
Problem resolved.
243.10—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > select a tray below tray 3 > Single.
Did the page feed correctly?
Yes
Problem resolved
Go to step 6.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
No
Replace the complete tray 3 option.
Diagnostic information
2-81
5026
243.17—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
2
Questions / actions
Has paper been fed from an input option before?
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
4. Check the cable in connector JOPT1 for proper connection to the system board, cable pinch points, and any other damage to the cable or connector.
Yes
Go to step 4.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the cable damaged?
3
Carefully lift the printer off the option, and lay the printer on its back. Check the option connector for damage.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 4.
Is the option cable connector or cable damaged?
4
Is tray 3 an high-capacity input tray (HCIT)?
Replace the HCIT top plate. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
Replace the complete tray 3 option.
2-82
Service Manual
243.26—Paper Jam service check
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Determine the input tray.
2. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
3. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > select indicated input tray > Single.
Did the page feed correctly?
2
Is tray 2 a high-capacity input tray (2,000sheet feeder)?
Yes
Problem resolved
Replace the HCIT top plate. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
243.27—Paper Jam service check
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the complete tray 4 option.
Step
1
Questions / actions
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > select a tray below tray 4 > Single.
Did the page feed correctly?
Yes
Problem resolved.
243.29—Paper Jam service check
No
Replace the complete tray 4 option.
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > Tray 3 >
Single
.
Did the page feed correctly?
2
Is tray 3 a high-capacity input tray (2,000sheet feeder)?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the HCIT elevatorup sensor. See
“HCIT elevator motor with sensor removal” on page 4-200
Replace the complete tray 3 option.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-83
5026
244.02—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
2
Questions / actions
Has paper been fed from an input option before?
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
4. Check the connector JOPT1 for proper connection to the system board, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or connector for any other damage.
Yes
Go to step 4.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3
Is the cable damaged?
1. Carefully lift the printer off the options, and lay the printer on its back.
2. Check the option connector for damage.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 4.
Is the connector damaged?
4
Replace the complete tray 4 option.
Does the error clear?
Problem resolved.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
2-84
Service Manual
244.03, 244.11—Paper Jam service check
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > select a tray below tray 4 > Single.
Did the page print correctly?
2
Is tray 4 a high-capacity input option (2,000sheet feeder)?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Replace the HCIT top plate. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
244.05—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
2
3
Questions / actions
Has paper been fed from an input option before?
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > select a tray below tray 3 > Single.
Did the page print correctly?
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
4. Check the connector at JOPT1 on the system board for proper connection, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or connector for any other damage.
Yes
Go to step 5.
Problem resolved.
Replace the option cable.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the complete tray 4 option.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the cable damaged?
Diagnostic information
2-85
5026
Step
4
Questions / actions
1. Carefully lift the printer off the option, and lay the printer on its back.
2. Check the option connector for damage.
Yes
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 5.
No
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the connector damaged?
5
Is tray 4 a high-capacity input option (2,000sheet feeder)?
6
Replace the complete tray 4 option.
Does the error clear?
7
Replace the high-capacity input tray (2,000sheet feeder)?
Go to step 7.
Problem resolved.
Problem resolved.
244.10—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > select a tray below tray 4 > Single.
Did the page feed correctly?
Yes
Problem resolved
244.17—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
Has paper been fed from an input option before?
Yes
Go to step 4.
Go to step 6.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
No
Replace the complete tray 4 option.
Go to step 2.
No
2-86
Service Manual
Step
2
Questions / actions
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
4. Check the connector in JOPT1 for proper connections to the system board, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or connector for any other damage.
Yes
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 3.
No
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the cable damaged?
3
Carefully lift the printer off the option, and lay the printer on its back.
Check the option connector for damage
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 4.
Did the page feed correctly?
4
Is tray 4 an high-capacity input tray (HCIT)?
Replace the HCIT top plate. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
244.26—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
1. Determine the input tray.
2. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
3. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > select the input tray > Single.
Did the page feed correctly?
Yes
Problem resolved
Replace the complete tray 4 option.
Go to step 2.
No
Diagnostic information
2-87
5026
Step Questions / actions
2
Is tray 5 a high-capacity input tray (2,000sheet feeder)?
Yes
Replace the HCIT top plate. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
244.27—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > select a tray below tray 4 > Single.
Did the page feed correctly?
Yes
Problem resolved.
244.29—Paper Jam service check
No
Replace the complete tray 5 option.
No
Replace the complete tray 4 option.
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > Tray 4 >
Single
.
Did the page feed correctly?
2
Is tray 4 a high-capacity input tray (2,000sheet feeder)?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the HCIT elevatorup sensor. See
“HCIT elevator motor with sensor removal” on page 4-200
Replace the complete tray 4 option.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-88
Service Manual
245.02—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
2
Questions / actions
Has paper been fed from an input option before?
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
4. Check the connector JOPT1 for proper connection to the system board, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or connector for any other damage.
Yes
Go to step 4.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the cable damaged?
3
Carefully lift the printer off the options, and lay the printer on its back.
Check the option connector for damage.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 4.
Is the connector damaged?
4
Replace the complete tray 5 option.
Does the error clear?
Problem resolved.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Diagnostic information
2-89
5026
245.03, 245.11—Paper Jam service check
Step Questions / actions
1
1. ring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn the multifunction printer off, press and hold 3 and 6, turn the MFP on, and then release the buttons when the progress bar displays).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > select a tray below tray 3 > Single.
Did the page print correctly?
2
Is tray 5 a high-capacity input option (2,000sheet feeder)?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Replace the HCIT top plate. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
245.05—Paper Jam service check
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the complete tray 5 option.
Step
1
2
3
Questions / actions
Has paper been fed from an input option before?
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > Tray 5 >
Single
.
Did the page feed correctly?
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
4. Check the connector at JOPT1 on the system board for proper connection, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or connector for any other damage.
Yes
Go to step 5.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the cable damaged?
2-90
Service Manual
Step Questions / actions
4
Carefully lift the printer off the option, and lay the printer on its back.
Check the option connector for damage.
Yes
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 5.
No
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the connector damaged?
5
Is tray 4 a high-capacity input option (2,000sheet feeder)?
6
Replace the complete tray 5 option.
Does the error clear?
7
Replace the HCIT top plate. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
.
Go to step 7.
Problem resolved.
Problem resolved.
245.10—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostic menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > select a tray below tray 5 > Single.
Did the page feed correctly?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Got to step 6.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
No
Replace the complete tray
5 option.
Diagnostic information
2-91
5026
245.17—Paper Jam service check
Step
1
2
Questions / actions
Has paper been fed from an input option before?
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
4. Check the connector JOPT1 for proper connection to the system board, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or connector for any other damage.
Yes
Go to step 4.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is the cable damaged?
3
Carefully lift the printer off the options, and lay the printer on its back.
Check the option connector for damage.
Replace the option cable.
See
“Option cable removal” on page 4-135
.
Go to step 4.
Is the connector damaged?
4
Replace the complete tray 5 option.
Does the error clear?
Problem resolved.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
2-92
Service Manual
5026
245.29—Paper Jam service check
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Bring the printer up in Diagnostic menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Navigate to PRINT TESTS > Tray 5 >
Single
.
Did the page feed correctly?
2
Is tray 5 a high-capacity input tray (2,000sheet feeder)?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the HCIT elevatorup sensor. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
Replace the complete tray 5 option.
900.00–900.99 (except 900.05)—System software error service check
There are different types of 900.xx errors that can occur. There may be a communication problem (Bad cable, network connection, and so on) software issue, or a hardware problem with the controller board, or ISP (Internal solutions port). The communication and software aspects should be checked first. Determine if the problem is constant or intermittent. Use the troubleshooting procedure below to isolate the issue. Take any notes as instructed. You will need that information in the event you need to contact your next level support.
Note:
Before troubleshooting, determine the operating system used when the error occurred. If possible determine whether a PostScript or PCL file was sent to the device when the error occurred. Ask the customer which Lexmark Solutions applications are installed on the device.
Step
1
2
Action and questions
POR the device.
Does the error reoccur?
• Write down the exact 900.xx error code displayed on the device.
• Turn the device off.
• Clear the print queues.
• Disconnect all communication cables, and remove all memory options.
• Remove all ISP and modem cards.
• Restart the device into diagnostic mode.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur during startup?
3
Check all the cables connected to the RIP board for proper connectivity.
Are the cables properly connected?
4
Properly connect the cables to the RIP board. Restart the device into diagnostic mode.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur during startup?
5
Replace the RIP board, and restart the device.
Does this fix the problem?
Note:
If an error, different from the original 900.xx, is displayed, consult the service check for that error.
Yes
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 5.
Problem resolved.
No
Problem resolved.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 31.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-93
5026
Step Action and questions
6
Print the following:
• Error log
• Menu settings page
• Network settings page
Yes
Go to step 31.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur while these pages were printing?
7
Re-attach the communications cable. Restart the printer to operating mode. Send the printer a print job.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
Note:
Before performing this step, write down this information about the file being sent to the printer:
• Application used
• Operating system
• Driver type
• File type (PCL, PostScript, XPS, etc.)
8
Restart the printer to operating mode. Send a different print job to the device.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
9
Upgrade the firmware. Contact your next level of support for the correct firmware level to use.
Restart the printer to operating mode. Send the printer a print job.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
10
Is the device a Multi Function Printer?
11
Run a copy job.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
12
Run a scan to PC job.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
13
Is there optional memory installed?
14
Reinstall the memory, and send a print job to the device.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
15
Install a Lexmark recommended memory option. Send a print job to the device.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
16
Is there a modem installed on the device?
17
Reinstall the modem. Restart the device.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
18
Upgrade the firmware. Contact your next level of support for the correct firmware level to use.
Restart the printer to operating mode. Send the printer a print job.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
Go to step 8.
Go to step 9.
Go to step 31.
Go to step 11.
Go to step 31.
Go to step 31.
Go to step 14.
Go to step 15.
Go to step 31.
Go to step 17.
Go to step 18.
Go to step 19.
No
Go to step 7.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 13.
Go to step 12.
Go to step 13.
Go to step16.
Go to step 16.
Problem resolved.
Go to step 21.
Go to step 20.
Problem resolved.
2-94
Service Manual
Previous
Next
Go Back
5026
Step Action and questions Yes No
19
Replace the modem. Restart the device.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
20
Run a fax job.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
21
Are there any ISP (internal solutions port) options installed?
22
Reinstall the first ISP option. Restart the device.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
Go to step 31.
Go to step 31.
Go to step 22.
Go to step 24.
Problem resolved.
Go to step 21.
Problem resolved.
Go to step 23.
23
Run a job to test the option.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
24
Upgrade the firmware. Contact your next level of support for the correct firmware level to use.
Restart the printer to operating mode.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
25
Replace the faulty ISP option. Restart the device.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
26
Are there any more ISP options to install?
Go to step 24.
Go to step 25.
Go to step 31.
Go to step 26.
Problem resolved.
Go to step 26.
Go to step 27 Problem resolved.
Go to step 28.
27
Install the next ISP option. Restart the device.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
28
Run a job to test the option.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
Go to step 29.
Go to step 29.
Go to step 26.
29
Upgrade the firmware. Contact your next level of support for the correct firmware level to use.
Restart the printer to operating mode.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
Go to step 30.
Go to step 26.
30
Replace the faulty ISP option. Restart the device.
Does the 900.xx error reoccur?
Go to step 31.
Go to step 26.
31
Contact your next level of support. You will need the following information for them:
• Exact 900.xx error digits and complete error message
• Printed menu settings page
• Printed network settings page
• Device error log
• A sample print file if error appears to be isolated to a single file
• File/Application used if error is related to specific print file
• Device Operating System
• Driver used (PCL/PS)
• Frequency of the occurrence of the error
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-95
5026
900.05—Transfer module error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Check the transport cable in connector
JTPS1 for proper connection to the system board.
4. Open the front access door and check the transport cable for pinch points and any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
2
Replace the transfer module.
Does the error clear?
Yes
Replace the transport
“Transport cable removal” on page 4-173
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
902.59—Engine software error, NVRAM MGR problem service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
1. Turn off the printer.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Check JPH1 and JTPS1 for proper connection and damage.
4. Check the transport cable on the transfer belt module side for any damage.
Is either of the cables damaged?
2
1. Reseat the JPH1 and JTPS1 cables.
2. Reseat the transport cable on the transfer belt module side.
3. Power on the printer.
Does the problem persist?
3
Install a new transfer module to verify if the old transfer module is defective.
Does the problem persist?
4
Connect a new transport cable from outside of the machine.
Does the problem persist?
5
Connect a new printhead assembly from outside of the printer and verify the printhead.
“Printhead verification” on page 3-39
.
Does the problem persist?
Yes
If the JTPS1 cable is damaged, replace the
JTPS1 cable.
If the JPH1 cable is damaged, replace the printhead assembly. See
“Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-145
Go to step 3.
Go to step 2.
No
Problem resolved.
Go to step 4.
1. Return the old transfer module and transport cable.
2. Go to step 5.
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Replace the transfer module. See
“Transfer module removal” on page 4-171
.
Replace the transport cable. See
“Transport cable removal” on page 4-173
.
Replace the printhead assembly. See
“Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-145
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-96
Service Manual
920.03, 920.25—Transfer Module Missing or not connected service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
Open the front access door. Reseat the transport cable.
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Does the error clear?
2
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Reseat the transport cable in connector
JTPS1.
Does the error clear?
3
Check the transport cable in connector JTPS1 for pinch points and for any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
4
Replace the transport belt assembly. See
“Transfer module removal” on page 4-171
.
Does the error clear?
5
Connect a new transport cable to the transfer belt module and the system board from outside of the machine.
Does the error clear?
Problem resolved.
Replace the transport
“Transport cable removal” on page 4-173
Problem resolved.
Replace the transport
“Transport cable removal” on page 4-173
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
920.04—POST (power-on self test) fuser motor not connected error service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Reseat the cables in connectors JCARTP1) and JCARTS1.
Does the error clear?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Diagnostic information
2-97
5026
Step Questions / actions
2
Check the cartridge motor 1/fuser cable in connector JCARTP1 and JCARTS1 for pinch points and the cables or connectors for any other damage.
Are the cables damaged?
3
Remove the right cover.See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
. Check the cartridge motor 1/fuser motor cable (A) for proper connection to the EP drive assembly, pinch points for the cable, and damage to the cable or connector.
Yes
Replace the cartridge motor1/fuser cable. See
“Cartridge motor 1/fuser cable removal” on page 4-67
.
Replace the cartridge motor 1/fuser motor cable.
See
“Cartridge motor 1/ fuser cable removal” on page 4-67
.
Go to step 3.
No
Go to step 4.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4
Is either cable damaged?
1. Disconnect the cable connecting motor 1/ fuser motor cable and cartridge motor 2/ motor 3, and connect the cable to the new
EP drive assembly outside the machine.
2. POR the printer, then check if the error remains.
Did the error clear?
5
Connect a new cartridge motor1/fuser motor cable to the old EP drive assembly without installing it into the machine.
Did the error clear?
Replace the EP drive assembly. See
(EP) drive assembly removal” on page 4-90
.
Replace the cartridge motor 1/fuser motor cable.
See
“Cartridge motor 1/ fuser cable removal” on page 4-67
.
Go to step 5.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
920.05—POST (power-on self test) printhead motor not connected error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Reseat the cables in connector JMIRR1.
Does the error clear?
2
Check the cables in connector JMIRR1 for pinch points and any other damage to the cables or connectors.
Is the cable damaged?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the printhead. See
“Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-145
Go to step 3.
2-98
Service Manual
5026
Step Questions / actions
3
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
4
1. Perform the printhead verification to check whether the new printhead solves the problem. See
“Printhead verification” on page 3-39
2. Navigate to PRINTHEAD TESTS > Mirror
Motor Test
.
Did the mirror motor pass the test?
Yes
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Replace the printhead. See
“Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-145
Go to step 4.
No
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
920.06—Input sensor service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
Is the input sensor flag damaged?
2
3
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Check the cable in connector JTRAY1 for proper connection to the system board, for pinch points, and any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
1. Disconnect the cable in connector
JTRAY1.
2. Connect the cable from the new paper pick assembly in connector JTRAY1.
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
4. Navigate to SENSOR TESTS > Dynamic
Sensors
> Input.
5. Activate the input sensor.
Did the input sensor change from Open to
Closed?
Yes
Replace the paper pick
“Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-137
Replace the paper pick mechanism. See
“Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-137
Replace the paper pick mechanism. See
“Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-137
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
920.07—POST (power-on self test)—Narrow media sensor error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Reseat the cable in connector JTRAY1.
Does the error clear?
2
Check the cable in connector JTRAY1 for pinch points and the cable or connector for any other damage.
Is the cable damaged?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Replace the paper pick
“Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-137
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Diagnostic information
2-99
Previous
Next
Go Back
5026
Step Questions / actions
3
POR the printer. Place a voltmeter between
JTRAY1(pin 4), and ground (pin 1).
Does the meter read 5 V dc?
4
1. Disconnect the cable in JTRAY1.
2. Connect the cable from the new paper pick mechanism.
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostic menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
4. Navigate to SENSOR TESTS > Dynamic
Sensors
> Narrow Media.
5. Activate the narrow media sensor.
Yes
Go to step 4.
Replace the paper pick mechanism. See
“Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-137
No
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Previous
Next
Go Back
Did the narrow media sensor change from
Closed to Open?
920.08—Exit sensor service check
Step Questions / actions
1
2
Verify the paper is loaded properly in the paper tray or manual feed slot.
Is the paper properly loaded?
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Install the new fuser. See
Note:
Do not reset fuser count or run motor calibration yet.
3. POR the printer.
Did the error clear?
3
Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
Check the fuser DC cable in the connector
JFUSER1 for proper connection to the system board, for pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or the connector.
Is the cable damaged?
Yes
Go to step 2.
Problem resolved.
Note:
Complete the fuser installation: reset fuser count and run motor calibration. See
.
Replace the fuser DC
“Fuser DC cable removal” on page 4-113
No
Load paper correctly.
Remove the new fuser, and go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
2-100
Service Manual
Step Questions / actions
4
Place a voltmeter between the fuser DC autoconnect pin 8 and ground (pin 6).
Yes
Go to step 6.
Go to step 5.
No
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Does the meter rear +5 V dc?
5
Place a voltmeter between the connector
JFUSER1 pin 8 and ground (pin 6) on the system board.
Does the meter read +5 V dc?
6
1. Replace the fuse without resetting the fuser count.
2. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
3. Navigate to SENSOR TESTS > Dynamic
Sensors > Fuser Exit
.
4. Open the front door, and then the top access cover.
5. Activate the fuser exit sensor.
Go to step 6.
Replace fuser and reset the fuser count. See
Replace the fuser DC cable. See
“Fuser DC cable removal” on page 4-113
.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Did the fuser exit sensor change from Open to
Closed?
Diagnostic information
2-101
5026
920.09—POST (power-on self test)—Four toner sensors not connected error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Reseat the cable in connector JHVPS1.
Does the error clear?
2
Check the HVPS cable in connector JHVPS1 for pinch points and any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
3
1. Remove the left cover. See
“Left cover removal” on page 4-31
.
2. Reseat and check all the toner level sensor cables (A) connected to the rear of the HVPS for damages and if they are installed correctly.
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the HVPS cable.
See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) cable removal” on page 4-117
.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 3.
Problem resolved.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Does the problem persist?
4
Connect four new toner level sensors outside the machine and perform a POR.
Note:
Keep track of which sensors change the error code to reduce the number of failing sensors. Keep the old sensor which does not reduce the failing number, leaving three new sensors and no error reported.
Does the problem persist?
5
Replace the HVPS board. See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal” on page 4-115
Does the error clear?
6
1. Install the old HVPS back to the machine.
2. Replace the HVPS cable. See
“Highvoltage power supply (HVPS) cable removal” on page 4-117
Does the problem persist?
Remove the four new toner level sensors and go to step 5.
Replace the failing toner
“Toner level sensor removal” on page 4-163
.
Problem resolved.
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Go to step 6.
Problem resolved.
2-102
Service Manual
920.10—POST—Three toner sensors not connected error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Reseat the cable in connector JHVPS1.
Does the error clear?
2
Check the HVPS cable in connector JHVPS1 for pinch points and any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
3
Remove the left cover. See
“Left cover removal” on page 4-31
.
Reseat then and check all the toner level sensor cables (A) connected to the rear of the
HVPS for damages and if they are installed correctly.
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the HVPS cable.
See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) cable removal” on page 4-117
.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 3.
Problem resolved.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Does the problem persist?
4
Connect four new toner level sensors outside the machine and perform a POR.
Note:
Keep track of which sensors change the error code to reduce the number of failing sensors. Keep the old sensor which does not reduce the failing number, leaving three new sensors and no error reported.
Does the problem persist?
5
Replace the HVPS board. See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal” on page 4-115
Does the error clear?
6
1. Install the old HVPS back to the machine.
2. Replace the HVPS cable. See
“Highvoltage power supply (HVPS) cable removal” on page 4-117
Does the problem persist?
Go to step 5.
Problem resolved.
Replace the failing toner
“Toner level sensor removal” on page 4-163
.
Go to step 6.
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Problem resolved.
Diagnostic information
2-103
5026
920.11—POST (power-on self test)—Two toner sensors not connected error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Reseat the cable in connector JHVPS1.
Does the error clear?
2
Check the HVPS cable in connector JHVPS1 for pinch points and any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
3
Remove the left cover. See
“Left cover removal” on page 4-31
.
Reseat then and check all the toner level sensor cables (A) connected to the rear of the
HVPS for damages and if they are installed correctly.
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the HVPS cable.
See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) cable removal” on page 4-117
.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 3.
Problem resolved.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Does the problem persist?
4
Connect four new toner level sensors outside the machine and perform a POR.
Note:
Keep track of which sensors change the error code to reduce the number of failing sensors. Keep the old sensor which does not reduce the failing number, leaving three new sensors and no error reported.
Does the problem persist?
5
Replace the HVPS board. See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal” on page 4-115
Does the error clear?
6
1. Install the old HVPS back to the machine.
2. Replace the HVPS cable. See
“Highvoltage power supply (HVPS) cable removal” on page 4-117
Does the problem persist?
Go to step 5.
Problem resolved.
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Replace the failing toner
“Toner level sensor removal” on page 4-163
.
Go to step 6.
Problem resolved.
2-104
Service Manual
5026
920.12—POST (power-on self test)—One toner sensor not connected error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Reseat the cable in connector JHVPS1.
Does the error clear?
2
Check the HVPS cable in connector JHVPS1 for pinch points and any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
3
Remove the left cover. See
“Left cover removal” on page 4-31
.
Reseat then and check all the toner level sensor cables (A) connected to the rear of the
HVPS for damages and if they are installed correctly.
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the HVPS cable.
See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) cable removal” on page 4-117
.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 3.
Problem resolved.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Does the problem persist?
4
Connect four new toner level sensors outside the machine and perform a POR.
Note:
Keep track of which sensors change the error code to reduce the number of failing sensors. Keep the old sensor which does not reduce the failing number, leaving three new sensors and no error reported.
Does the problem persist?
5
Replace the HVPS board. See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal” on page 4-115
Does the error clear?
6
1. Install the old HVPS back to the machine.
2. Replace the HVPS cable. See
“Highvoltage power supply (HVPS) cable removal” on page 4-117
Does the problem persist?
Go to step 5.
Problem resolved.
Replace the failing toner level sensor. See
“Toner level sensor removal” on page 4-163
.
Go to step 6.
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Problem resolved.
Diagnostic information
2-105
5026
920.13—POST (power-on self test) cartridge motor 1 not connected error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Reseat the cables in connectors JCARTP1 and JCARTS1.
Does the error clear?
2
Check the cables in connectors JCARTP1 and JCARTS1 for pinch points and any other damage to the cables or connectors.
Is the cable damaged?
3
Remove the right cover. Check the cartridge motor 1/fuser motor cable (A) for proper connection to the EP drive assembly, pinch points for the cable, or any other damage to the cable or connector.
Yes
Problem resolved.
Replace the cartridge motor 1/fuser cable. See
“Cartridge motor 1/fuser cable removal” on page 4-67
.
Replace the cartridge motor 1/fuser motor cable.
See
“Cartridge motor 1/ fuser cable removal” on page 4-67
.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is either cable damaged?
4
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
5
Plug in a new EP drive assembly cartridge motor 1 with the old cable from outside the machine.
Does the problem persist?
6
Plug in a new EP drive assembly cartridge motor 1 with a new cable from outside the machine.
Does the problem persist?
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 5.
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
.Replace the EP drive assembly. See
(EP) drive assembly removal” on page 4-90
.
Replace cartridge motor 1/ fuser cable. See
“Cartridge motor 1/fuser cable removal” on page 4-67
2-106
Service Manual
5026
920.14—POST (power-on self test)—Cartridge motor 2 not connected error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Reseat the cables in connector JCARTP2 and JCARTS2.
Does the error clear?
2
Check the cable in connector JCARTP2 and
JCARTS2 for pinch points and any other damage to the cable or connector.
Are the cables damaged?
3
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
. Check the cartridge motor 2/3 cable for the proper connection to the EP drive assembly, pinch point for the cable, or damage to the cable or connectors.
Yes
Problem resolved.
Replace the cartridge motor 2/3 cable. See
“Cartridge motor 2/3 cable removal” on page 4-69
.
Replace the cartridge motor 2/3 cable. See
“Cartridge motor 2/3 cable removal” on page 4-69
.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is either cable damaged?
4
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
5
Connect a new cartridge motor 1/fuser cable from the outside of the machine.
Did the error clear?
6
Connect the old cartridge motor 1/fuser motor cable to a new EP drive assembly outside of the machine.
Did the error clear?
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-157
.
Replace the cartridge motor 1/fuser cable. See
“Cartridge motor 1/fuser cable removal” on page 4-67
.
Replace the EP drive assembly. See
(EP) drive assembly removal” on page 4-90
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Replace system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Diagnostic information
2-107
5026
920.15, 920.20—POST (power-on self test)—Bad transfer module NVRAM data error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-37
.
3. Check the JTPS1 connector for any damage, and then reseat the JTPS1 cable.
4. Check the transport cable connection to the transport belt for any damages.
a.Open the front door cover b.Reseat the transport cable in the transfer belt module.
Did the error clear?
2
Replace the transfer belt module. See
“Transfer module removal” on page 4-171
.
Does the problem persist?
3
Connect a new transport cable from outside of the machine.
Does the problem persist?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 3.
Return the old transport belt module and old transport cable then replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Go to step 2.
No
Problem resolved.
Return the old transport belt module and replace the transport cable. See
“Transport cable removal” on page 4-173
920.16—POST (power-on self test)—Bad printhead NVRAM data error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Reseat the large printhead cable in connector
JPH1.
Does the error clear?
2
Check the cable in connector JPH1 for pinch points and any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
3
Perform the printhead verification to check whether the printhead replacement fixes the problem. See
“Printhead verification” on page 3-39
.
POR the printer.
Did the error clear?
Yes
Problem resolved. Go to step 2.
No
Replace the printhead. See
“Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-145
Replace the printhead. See
“Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-145
Go to step 3.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-108
Service Manual
5026
920.17—POST (power-on self test)—Output bin cable not connected error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3. Reseat the bin full sensor cable in connector JBIN1.
Does the error clear?
2
Check the bin full sensor cable in connector
JBIN1 for pinch points and any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
3
1. Disconnect the cable in the JBIN1 connector.
2. Connect the new bin full flag cable in the
JBIN connector.
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostic menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
4. Navigate to SENSOR TESTS > Other
Sensors > Bin Full Test
.
5. Activate the new bin full sensor by placing a sheet of paper in the sensor.
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the bin full sensor with cable. See
“Bin full sensor removal” on page 4-65
.
Replace the bin full sensor and cable. See
“Bin full sensor removal” on page 4-65
.
Go to step 3.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Previous
Next
Go Back
Did the bin full sensor change from Open to
Closed?
Diagnostic information
2-109
5026
920.18—POST (power-on self test)—Cartridge motor 3 not connected error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
3
Turn the printer off and remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Reseat the cables in connectors JCARTP2 and JCARTS2.
Does the error clear?
2
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
1. Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
2. Check the connections on the cartridge motor 2/3 cables and reseat the cables.
3. Check the routing on the cables for pinch points and any other damage to the cables or the connectors.
Is the cable free from damage?
4
Connect a new Cartridge motor 2/3 cable from outside of the machine, then POR the printer.
Note:
Verify first if the cable is working properly by testing connections of the cable on motor 2 and 3 to the JCARTP2 and
JCARTS2 connectors. Route the cables properly only when you have verified that the cables are working properly.
Did the error clear?
5
Connect a new EP drive assembly from the outside of the machine.
Yes
Problem resolved.
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Replace the cartridge motor 2/3 cable. See
“Cartridge motor 2/3 cable removal” on page 4-69
.
Replace the cartridge motor 2/3 cable. See
“Cartridge motor 2/3 cable removal” on page 4-69
.
Note:
Verify first if the EP drive assembly is working properly. Connect the cables on the fuser motor, cartridge motor 1, 2, and 3 on the new EP drive assembly. Route the cables properly only when you have verified that the cables are working properly.
Did the error clear?
Return the old cartridge motor 2/3 cable and replace the EP drive assembly. See
(EP) drive assembly removal” on page 4-90
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Return the old EP drive assembly and the old cartridge motor 2/3 cable, then replace the system
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
920.19—POST (power-on self test)—Transfer module stepper motor not connected error service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Reseat the motor driver cable in connector
JDVR1.
Does the error clear?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-110
Service Manual
Step Questions / actions
2
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
3
1. Open the right cover.
2. Reseat the motor driver cable on the motor driver side (A).
3. Reseat all cables connected to the motor driver card.
Yes
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Problem resolved.
Go to step 3.
No
Go to step 4.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Did this clear the error?
4
Note:
Connect a new motor driver cable from outside of the machine.Make sure to verify first if the motor driver cable is working properly by connecting one end to the motor driver card, and the other end to the JDVR1 connector on the system board. Route the cables properly only when you have verified that the cable is working properly.
Did this clear the error?
5
Connect a new transport motor cable.
Did this clear the error?
Replace the motor driver
“Motor driver cable removal” on page 4-122
6
7
Connect a new motor driver card.
Did this clear the error?
1. Connect a new EP drive assembly from outside of the machine.
2. Transfer the motor driver card and cables to the new EP drive assembly and connect the cables.
Did this clear the error?
Go to step 5.
Return the original part from the printer and replace the transport motor
“Transport motor cable removal” on page 4-175
Return the original parts of the printer and replace the motor driver card. See
“Motor driver card removal” on page 4-121
.
Replace the EP drive assembly and connect the original parts back to the machine. See
(EP) drive assembly removal” on page 4-90
.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 7.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Diagnostic information
2-111
5026
920.21—POST (power-on self test)—24 V power supply failure error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
2
3
4
Note:
The LVPS must be turned off for several seconds before turning back on. This error can occur if the LVPS does not have time to recover after being turned off.
1. Open the front door cover
2. Check the 24V interlock switch for damage and proper installation.
3. Check if the front door actuator can trigger the sensor.
Is the front door sensor actuator able to trigger the sensor?
1. Check if the front door assembly can close properly.
2. Check the front door pivot for any damage.
3. Check if the front door can close properly.
Is the front door damaged?
1. Check the cable in connector JCVR1 for proper connection to the system board, pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or connector.
2. Reseat the cable.
Did the error clear?
1. Disconnect the cable in connector JCVR1
2. Connect a new 24 V interlock switch without properly routing the cables.
Note:
The 24V interlock switch should be plugged in without installing inside the machine. Close the covers, manually actuate the switch, and then turn on the machine.
Did the error clear?
5
Check the input voltage switch on the back of the low-voltage power supply (LVPS). Some power supplies do not have the switch.
Note:
If your FRU does not have a switch, proceed to step 6.
Is the voltage level (115/230) properly set?
6
Reseat the cable in connector JLVPS1.
Did the error clear?
7
Replace the LVPS.
Note:
Verify first if the new LVPS is working properly before installing it inside the machine. Remove the old LVPS, and install the new LVPS without installing the screws.
Connect the fuser and JLVPS1 connectors to the new LVPS.
Did the error clear?
Yes
Go to step 3.
Replace the front door. See
“Front door assembly removal” on page 4-100
.
Go to step 3.
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 4.
Replace the 24 V interlock
“24 V interlock switch removal” on page 4-63
.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Problem resolved.
Replace the LVPS. See
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
Set the switch for the proper voltage supported by your country.
Go to step 7.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-112
Service Manual
5026
920.23—POST (power-on self test)—Duplex motor not connected error service check
Previous
Step Questions / actions
1
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Reseat the cable in connector JDX1.
Does the error clear?
2
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
3
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
. Check the MPF/ duplex motor cable in connector JDX1 for pinch points and any other damage to the cable or connector. Check both ends of the cable.
Yes
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Replace the MPF/duplex motor cable. See
(MPF)/duplex motor cable removal” on page 4-128
Note:
Make sure to verify if the new cable is working properly first. Route the cables properly only when you have verified that the cables are working properly.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Next
Go Back
4
Is the cable damaged?
1. Replace the MPF/duplex motor assembly.
“Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex motor assembly removal” on page 4-125
.
Note:
Before replacing a motor, always verify if the new part is working properly by connecting it outside of the machine,
2. POR the printer and check if the error is gone.
Did the error clear?
Problem resolved.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Diagnostic information
2-113
5026
920.27, 920.28, 920.29—POST (power on self test) option tray error service check
Step Questions / actions Yes
1
Is the specified option the 550-sheet tray?
Replace the 550-sheet tray with a new 550-sheet tray option.
2
Is the specified option the special media tray?
Replace the special media tray with a new special tray option.
3
Is the specified option the high-capacity input tray (HCIT)?
Replace the HCIT controller board assembly.
See
“HCIT controller board assembly removal” on page 4-199
.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
920.32—MPF paper present sensor not connected service check
Go to step 2.
No Step Questions / actions
1
2
Check the cable in connector JMPFPP1 for proper connection, reseat cable.
Did the error clear?
1. Check the connection on the paper present sensor side.
2. Check for damage and pinch points on the cable.
3. Reseat cable.
Did this fix the problem?
3
Replace the MPF paper present sensor. See
“Multipurpose feeder (MPF) paper present sensor” on page 4-129
.
Note:
Before replacing a part, always verify by connecting the part outside of the machine.
Did the error clear?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Problem resolved.
Problem resolved.
925.01, 925.03, 925.05—Fan error service check
Go to step 3.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Step Questions / actions
1
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Check the cable in connector JFAN1 for proper connection to the system board, for pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or the connector.
Is the cable damaged?
2
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
Yes
Replace the fan. See
“Cooling fan removal” on page 4-85
.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Go to step 3.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-114
Service Manual
5026
Step
3
Questions / actions
1. Disconnect the cable in connector JFAN1, and install a new fan.
2. Turn the multifunction printer off, and turn the MFP on (perform a POR).
Note:
After installing the new fan, a print test is required to verify operation. Print one page every 30 seconds for 20 minutes to test the highest fan speed. Do not test unless the fan is installed in the machine.
Did the error clear?
Yes
Replace the cooling fan.
See
“Cooling fan removal” on page 4-85
.
925.02, 925.04, 925.06—Cartridge cooling fan error service check
No
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Step Questions / actions
1
3
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Check the cable in connector JBLW1 for proper connection to the system board, for pinch points, and any other damage to the cable or connector, and reseat the cable.
Did the error clear?
2
Measure the continuity across all of the fuses on the system board.
Are any of the fuses blown?
1. Replace the cartridge cooling fan. See
“Cartridge cooling fan removal” on page 4-66
2. Turn the multifunction printer off, and turn the MFP on (perform a POR).
Note:
After installing the new fan, a print test is required to verify operation. Print one page every 30 seconds for 20 minutes to test the highest fan speed. Do not test unless the fan is installed in the machine.
Did the error clear?
Yes
Problem resolved. Go to step 2.
No
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Problem resolved.
Go to step 3.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-115
5026
945.xx, 947.xx—Transfer roll error service check
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Replace the transfer module. See
“Transfer module removal” on page 4-171
.
2. POR the printer.
Note:
Print 5 pages one at a time to check operation.
Did the error clear?
2
Turn the printer off, and then remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Check the cable in connector JHVPS1 for proper connection to the system board, the cable for pinch points, and the cable or connector for any other damage.
Is the cable damaged?
3
Disconnect JHVPS1 from system board and
HVPS. Check for the following continuity.
Yes
Problem resolved.
No
Replace the original transfer module. Go to step
2.
Replace the HVPS cable.
See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) cable removal” on page 4-117
.
Go to step 2.
Go to step 3.
Replace the HVPS cable.
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) cable removal” on page 4-117
Pin 23
Pin 1
Pin 24
Pin 23
Pin 2
Pin 24
Pin 2 Pin 1
JHVPS1 cable to:
HVPS
Pin 19
Pin 20
Pin 15
Pin 16
Pin 17
Pin 18
Pin 23
Pin 24
System board
Pin 19
Pin 20
Pin 15
Pin 16
Pin 17
Pin 18
Pin 23
Pin 24
Error code
945.01, 946.01, 947.01
945.02, 946.02, 947.02
945.03, 946.03, 947.03
945.04, 946.04, 947.04
Is continuity present?
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-116
Service Manual
Step Questions / actions
4
Remove the HVPS. See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal” on page 4-115
. Check for continuity between the
contacts (yellow1 and yellow2, cyan1 and cyan2, magenta1 and magenta2, or black1 and black2) on the transfer contact assembly.
Yes
Go to step 4.
No
Replace the transfer contact assembly.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back yellow2 cyan2 magenta2 black2 yellow1 cyan1 magenta1 black1
4
Is continuity present?
Replace the HVPS. See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal” on page 4-115
Does the error clear?
Problem resolved.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Diagnostic information
2-117
5026
950.00–950.29—EPROM mismatch failure
Warning:
When replacing any one of the following components:
•
System board
•
Operator assembly card or top access cover assembly
Replace only one component at a time or the printer will be rendered inoperable. Replace the required component, bring the printer up in Diagnostic menu (see
“Diagnostics menu” on page 3-2
), and verify that the problem is fixed before performing a POR.
This error code indicates a mismatch between the operator panel assembly and the system board.
Step
1
Questions / actions
Has the operator panel assembly been replaced recently?
2
3
Has the top access cover assembly been replaced recently?
Has the system board been replaced recently?
4
Turn the printer power off for ten or more seconds. Then turn the printer back on (POR the printer).
Is the error gone, and can the printer print?
5
Clear the NVRAM of the printer:
1. Turn the printer power off.
2. With the printer off, press and hold buttons 2, 6, 7, and 8.
3. Turn the printer power on.
4. When the printer screen displays
Restoring Factory Defaults, release the buttons.
Note:
If the printer locks up on the
Restoring Factory Defaults, wait two minutes, and then turn the printer power off. After ten seconds or more, turn the printer power back on without holding down any buttons.
Is the error message still displayed?
Go to step 6.
Yes
Replace the operator panel assembly with a new, and not previously installed, operator panel assembly,
See
“Operator panel assembly removal
or
“Operator panel assembly removal
.
Replace the top access cover assembly with a new, and not previously installed, operator panel assembly. See
“Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-54
.
Replace the system board with a new, and not previously installed, system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Problem resolved.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Problem resolved.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-118
Service Manual
Step Questions / actions
6
Replace the operator panel assembly. See
“Operator panel assembly removal
or
“Operator panel assembly removal (C748)” on page 4-37
Is the error message still displayed?
956.xx—System board failure service check
Yes
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
No
Problem resolved.
Step
1
Questions / actions
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Check the cable in connector J49 for proper connection to the system board.
Yes
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
No
Reseat the cable.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
Is the cable seated correctly?
Diagnostic information
2-119
5026
5 V interlock switch service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
Is the +5 V interlock switch damaged?
Yes
Replace the 5 V interlock
“5 V interlock switch cable removal” on page 4-61
.
Go to step 2.
No
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
2
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Check the cable in connector JINT1 for proper connection to the system board, for pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
3
1. Disconnect the cable in connector JINT1.
2. Connect the new 5 V interlock switch to
JINT1.
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
4. Activate the 5 V interlock switch.
Replace the 5 V interlock
“5 V interlock switch cable removal” on page 4-61
.
Go to step 3.
Replace the 5 V interlock
“5 V interlock switch cable removal” on page 4-61
.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Does the display change from
Close Front
Door to the Diagnostic Menu?
2-120
Service Manual
24 V interlock switch service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
Is the 24 V interlock switch damaged?
Yes
Replace the 24 V interlock
“24 V interlock switch removal” on page 4-63
.
Go to step 2.
No
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
2
Turn the printer off, and remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
Check the cable in connector JCVR1 for proper connection to the system board, for pinch points, and for any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
3
1. Disconnect the cable in connector JCVR1.
2. Connect the new 24 V interlock switch to the connector JCVR1.
3. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
4. Activate the new 24 V interlock switch.
Replace the 24 V interlock
“24 V interlock switch removal” on page 4-63
.
Go to step 3.
Replace the 24 V interlock
“24 V interlock switch removal” on page 4-63
.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Does the display change from
Close Front
Door to the Diagnostic Menu.
Diagnostic information
2-121
5026
Bubble sensor service check
Step
1
Questions / actions
Is the bubble sensor flag damaged?
Yes
Replace the fuser. See
Go to step 2.
No
Previous
Next
Go Back
2
Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
Check the fuser DC cable in connector
JFUSER1 for proper connection to the system board, pinch points, and any other damage to the cable or connector.
Is the cable damaged?
3
Place a voltmeter between the fuser DC autoconnect, pin 3 and ground (pin 6).
Replace the fuser DC
“Fuser DC cable removal” on page 4-113
Note:
Make sure to verify if the new cable is working properly first. Route the cables properly only when you have verified that the cables are working properly.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Does the voltage meter read +5 V dc?
4
Place a voltmeter between FUSER1 pin 3 and ground (pin 6).
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Go to step 5.
Pin 3 Pin 6 (ground)
Does the meter read +5 V dc?
2-122
Service Manual
Step
5
Questions / actions
1. Replace the fuser.
2. Bring the printer up in Diagnostics Menu
(turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
3. Navigate to SENSOR TESTS > Dynamic
Sensors
> Bubble.
4. Open the front door.
5. Activate the bubble sensor.
Yes
Problem resolved.
5026
No
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Previous
Next
Go Back
Did the bubble sensor change from Open to
Closed?
Diagnostic information
2-123
5026
Dead printer service check
A dead printer is a condition where the display is blank, the LED on the operator panel is off, no fans turn, no motors turn, and the fuser lamp does not come on.
If a 550-sheet option assembly is installed, remove the option and check the base printer for correct operation. If the base printer operates correctly, replace the 550-sheet option assembly.
Warning:
Observe all necessary ESD precautions when removing and handling the system board or any installed option cards or assemblies. See
“Handling ESD-sensitive parts” on page 4-2
.
CAUTION
When you see this symbol, there is a danger from hazardous voltage in the area of the product where you are working. Unplug the product before you begin, or use caution if the product must receive power in order to perform the task.
Remove any input and output paper handling options from the printer.
Step Questions / actions
1
Check the AC line voltage.
Is the line voltage correct?
2
Is the AC line cord damaged?
3
Check the system board for +5 V dc between
JLVPS2 pin 1 and ground.
Is the voltage correct?
4
Is the JLVPS2 cable correctly installed at
JLVPS2 on the system board?
5
Turn the printer off. Disconnect the JLVPS2 cable from the system board. Turn the printer on, and then measure the voltage between the JLVPS2 cable pin 1 and the JLVPS2 pin 14 (black wire).
Does this measure approximately +5 V dc?
6
7
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Disconnect the cables in J5, JCARTS1,
JCARTS2, JDVR1, JFDPCK1, JFUSER1,
JINT1, JOPT1, and JTLBT1.
3. Connect the JLVPS2 cable to the system board.
4. POR the printer.
Does the printer still appear dead?
1. Connect one cable at a time, and POR the printer.
2. Is the printer dead?
Yes
Go to step 2.
Replace the line cord.
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Reseat the JLVPS2 cable.
Go to step 6.
Contact your next level of support.
No
Inform the customer.
Replace the LVPS. See
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
.
Go to step 7.
The part connected to that cable is faulty. Replace the failing part.
Connect another cable and continue with this step.
Networking service check
Note:
Before starting this service check, print out the network setup page. This page is found under Menu—
Reports
—Network Settings. Consult the network administrator to verify that the physical and wireless network settings displayed on the network settings page for the device are properly configured. If a wireless network is used, verify that the printer is in range of the host computer or wireless access point, and there is no electronic
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-124
Service Manual
5026
interference. Have the network administrator verify that the device is using the correct SSID, and wireless security protocols. For more network troubleshooting information, consult the Lexmark Network Setup Guide.
Step Questions / actions
1
If the device is physically connected to the network, verify that the ethernet cable is properly connected on both ends.
Is the cable properly connected?
2
Connect the ethernet cable.
Did this fix the problem?
3
Check the printer’s online status under Printers and Faxes on the host computer. Delete all print jobs in the print queue.
Is the printer online and in a Ready state.
4
Change the printer status to online.
Did this fix the issue?
5
Does the IP address displayed on the network settings page match the IP address in the port of the drivers using the printer?
6
Does the LAN use DHCP?
Note:
A printer should use a static IP address on a network.
7
Are the first two segments if the IP address
169.254?
8
POR the printer.
Is the problem resolved
9
Reset the address on the printer to match the
IP address on the driver.
Did this resolve the issue?
10
Have the network admin verify that the printer and PC’s IP address have identical subnet addresses.
Are the subnet addresses the same?
11
Using the subnet address supplied by the network admin, assign a unique IP address to the printer. Do not assign an address that is already in use on the network.
Note:
The printer IP address should match the IP address on the printer driver.
Did this fix the problem?
12
Is the device physically connected (ethernet cable) to the network?
13
Try using a different ethernet cable.
Did this remedy the situation?
14
Have the network administrator check the network drop for activity.
Is the drop functioning properly?
Yes
Go to step 3.
If the network is wireless, got to step 3.
Problem resolved
Go to step 5.
Problem resolved.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 7.
Go to step 8.
Problem resolved
Problem fixed.
Go to step 12.
Problem resolved.
Go to step 13.
Problem resolved.
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Go to step 9.
Go to step 9
Go to step 10.
Go to step 10.
Go to step 11.
Go to step 12.
Go to step15.
Go to step 14.
Contact the network administrator.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-125
5026
Step Questions / actions
15
Is the printer on the same wireless network as the other devices?
16
Assign the correct wireless network to the printer.
Did this fix the problem?
17
Are the other devices on the wireless network communicating properly?
18
Verify that the ISP wireless card cable is properly seated in their connectors.
Is the wireless card seated correctly?
19
Properly reseat the ISP cables.
Did this fix the problem?
20
Replace the ISP wireless card. See Installing an Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
Did this fix the problem?
Yes
Go to step 17.
Problem resolved.
Go to step 18.
Go to step 20.
Problem resolved.
Problem resolved.
No
Go to step 16.
Go to step 17.
Contact the network administrator.
Go to step 19.
Go to step 20.
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-126
Service Manual
5026
Operator panel service check
One or more operator panel buttons fail
Previous
Step
1
Questions / actions
in Diagnostics mode.
Did any of the buttons fail the test?
2
Disconnect the operator panel assembly cable from JOPP1 on the system board, and then measure the voltage on pin 6 and ground.
Does the voltage measure approximately
+3.3 V dc?
Yes
Replace the operator panel assembly. See
“Operator panel assembly removal
.
Replace the operator panel assembly. See
“Operator panel assembly removal
. If this does not fix the problem, replace the top cover access assembly.
See
“Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-54
.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Operator panel display blank, five beeps, and LED is off
Service tip: The printer has detected a problem with the system board, the operator panel assembly cable (part of the top cover access assembly), or the operator panel assembly if POST does not complete. The printer emits five beeps, and then sticks in a continuous pattern until the printer is turned off.
Step Questions / actions
1
Is the operator panel assembly cable properly installed at system board JOPP1 and at the operator panel assembly?
2
Measure the voltage between JOPP1 pin 2 and ground on the system board.
Is the voltage approximately +5 V dc?
3
Check continuity of the operator panel assembly cable.
Is there continuity?
Yes
Go to step 2.
No
Reinstall the cable.
Go to step 3.
Replace the operator panel assembly. See
“Operator panel assembly removal
.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Replace the top cover access assembly. See
“Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-54
Next
Go Back
Operator panel display blank, five beeps, LED on
Service tip: The printer has detected a problem with the system board, the operator panel assembly cable (part of the top cover access assembly), or the operator panel assembly if POST does not complete. The printer emits five beeps, and then sticks in a continuous pattern until the printer is turned off.
Step
1
Questions / actions
Check for ground between JOPP1 pin 4 and ground.
Is the voltage approximately 0 V dc?
Yes
Replace the operator panel assembly. See
“Operator panel assembly removal
.
Go to step 2.
No
Diagnostic information
2-127
5026
Step Questions / actions
2
Check the operator panel assembly cable.
Is the cable damaged?
Yes
Replace the top cover access assembly. See
“Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-54
.
Stripes display, distorted display, and other display issues
No
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Step Questions / actions
1
2
3
4
1. Turn off the printer.
2. Open the rear cover.
3. Reseat the operator panel cable (J2) on the system board.
4. Check the J2 connector on the system board for any damage.
Is the connector damaged?
1. Turn off the printer.
2. Disconnect the J2 operator panel cable.
3. Connect a new top access cover assembly from outside of the machine for verification.
Does the problem persist?
1. Open the top access cover assembly,
Refer to
“Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-54
.
2. Reseat the operator panel cable on both ends.
3. Check for any damage on the cable.
Is the cable damaged?
• For C746x:
Replace the 2.3 inch operator panel assembly with card. See
“Operator panel assembly removal (C746)” on page 4-34
• For C748x:
“Operator panel assembly removal (C748)” on page 4-37
Does the problem persist?
5
Replace the LCD panel.
Does the problem persist?
6
Replace the Operator panel cable.
Does the problem persist?
Yes
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Go to step 2.
No
Return to the Old Top access cover assembly, then go to step 6.
Replace operator panel
“Operator panel cable removal” on page 4-132
• For C746x:
Return the old 2.3 inch operator panel assembly with card, then go to step 6.
• For C748x:
Return the old UICC card, then go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Return to the Old Top access cover assembly, then go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Problem resolved.
Problem resolved.
For dead display. Go to
Dead printer service check.
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
Problem resolved.
Print quality service check
Note:
This symptom may require replacement of one or more CRUs (Customer Replaceable Units) designated as supplies or maintenance items, which are the responsibility of the customer. With the customer's permission, you may need to install a developer (toner) cartridge or photoconductor unit.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-128
Service Manual
5026
Service tip: Before troubleshooting any print quality problems, do the following:
1.
Print a menu settings page, and then check the life status of all supplies. Any supplies that are low should be replaced.
Note:
Be sure and keep the original menu page to restore the customer's custom settings if needed.
2.
On the menu page, make sure the following is set to the default level:
–
Color Correction: Set to Auto.
–
Print Resolution: Set to 1200 dpi (print quality problems should be checked at different resolution settings).
–
Toner Darkness: Set to 4 (default).
–
Color Saver: Set to OFF.
–
RGB Brightness, RGB Contrast, RGB Saturation: Set to 0.
–
Color Balance: Select Reset Defaults to zero out all colors.
–
Check the paper type, texture and weight settings against what is loaded in the printer.
Once the printer has been restored to its default levels, do the following:
3.
Inspect the transfer module for damage. Replace if damaged.
4.
Inspect the photoconductor units and toner cartridges for damage. Replace if damaged.
5.
If paper other than 20 lb plain letter/A4 paper is being used, load 20 lb plain letter/A4 and print the Print
Quality pages to see if the problem remains.
6.
Use Tray 1 to test print quality problems.
7.
Print the Print Quality Pages, and then look for variations in the print from what is expected.
An incorrect printer driver for the installed software can cause problems. Incorrect characters could print, and the copy may not fit the page correctly.
Measure all voltages from the connector to the printer ground.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Print quality—background
Service tip: Some background problems can be caused by rough papers, non-Lexmark toner cartridges or if the media texture is set to the rough setting.
Some slick or coated papers may also cause background problems. Some problems occur with printers that run a large amount of graphics in a humid environment.
Step Questions / actions
1
Read the current status of the photoconductor unit from the customer menus.
To view the status of the photoconductor units:
1. In Ready mode, select Admin Menu.
2. Select Reports.
3. Select Device Statistics.
Ask the customer if the photoconductor unit has been recently replaced. It is possible the photoconductor value was not reset and the photoconductor unit is past end of life. If the
PC unit was recently replaced, reset the value. If the PC unit was not replaced, replace the PC unit.
Has the photoconductor unit been recently replaced?
2
Replace the PC unit. See
“Photoconductor unit removal” on page 4-142
.
Does this fix the problem?
Yes
Reset the value. To reset this value:
1. In Ready mode, select
Admin Menu.
2. Select Supplies Menu.
3. Select Replace
Supply
.
4. Select the PC color unit you want to change
5. Select Yes.
If this does not fix the problem, go to step 2.
Go to step 2.
No
Problem solved.
Go to step 3.
Diagnostic information
2-129
5026
Step Questions / actions
3
Check the high voltage contact from the
HVPS to the transfer module.
Transfer belt high voltage path (typical 4X)
Yes
Replace the spring or the transfer contact assembly.
Go to step 4.
No
Previous
Next
Go Back
Is a problem found?
4
Reseat the JHVPS connector.
Does this fix the problem?
5
Replace the HVPS. See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal” on page 4-115
Does this fix the problem?
6
Clean the printhead.
Does this fix the problem?
Problem solved.
Problem solved.
Problem solved.
Print quality—blank page
Step Questions / actions
1
3
Is all the packing material for the photoconductor unit in question removed?
2
Replace the photoconductor unit for the color in question.
Does this fix the problem?
1. Enter the Diagnostics mode (turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, then turn on the printer).
2. Perform the appropriate cartridge drive motor test for the missing color. See
“General motor tests procedures” on page 3-10
Did the motor run?
Yes
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 5.
Go to step 6.
Replace the printhead. See
“Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-145
.
No
Remove the packing material.
Go to step 3.
Replace the EP drive assembly. See
(EP) drive assembly removal” on page 4-90
.
2-130
Service Manual
Step Questions / actions
4
Check the high voltage contact from the
HVPS to the photoconductor charge roll.
Ensure the contact springs are properly mounted and that the charge roll contact spring is making good contact with the HVPS spring that runs through the left printer frame to view the proper mounting and for removal procedures.
Yes
Replace the transfer contact assembly.
Go to step 5.
No
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
High voltage power supply
High voltage contact path
Are the spring(s) defective?
5
Turn off the printer and check the continuity of the HVPS cable.
Go to step 6.
Pin 23
Pin 1
Pin 24
Pin 23
Pin 2
Pin 24
Pin 2
Is there continuity?
Pin 1
6
Replace the HVPS. See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal” on page 4-115
Did this fix the problem?
7
Replace the printhead. See
“Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-145
Did this fix the problem?
Problem solved.
Problem solved.
Replace the cable assembly.
Go to step 7.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Diagnostic information
2-131
5026
Print quality—blurred or fuzzy print
Blurred or fuzzy print is usually caused by a problem in the EP drive assembly or in the transfer module. Check the EP drive assembly and transfer module for correct operation.
Blurred print can also be caused by incorrect feeding from one of the input paper sources, paper trays, or duplex paper path.
Check the high voltage spring contacts to ensure they are not bent, corroded, or damaged. Replace as necessary.
Print quality—half-color page
A photoconductor unit is not properly seated. Reset the specific photoconductor unit.
Print quality—horizontal banding
Step
1
Questions / actions
Measure the distance between repeating bands.
Is the distance between bands either 27 or
36mm?
Yes
Replace the print cartridge.
No
Replace the photoconductor unit. See
“Photoconductor unit removal” on page 4-142
Print quality—horizontal line
The photoconductor unit is defective. Replace the photoconductor unit.
Print quality—insufficient fusing
Step Questions / actions
1
Is the fuser properly installed?
2
Replace the fuser. See
Does this fix the problem?
Yes
Go to step 2.
Problem solved.
No
Install the fuser properly.
Replace the LVPS. see
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
.
Print quality—missing image at edge
Reseat the developer cartridge.
Print quality—mottle (2–5mm speckles)
Keep running prints through, and the problem normally clears up. If the problem persists, replace the developer cartridge.
Print quality—narrow vertical line
Step
1
Questions / actions
Replace the photoconductor unit. See
“Photoconductor unit removal” on page 4-142
Yes
Problem solved.
No
Replace the print cartridge.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-132
Service Manual
5026
Print quality—random marks
Service tip: The primary cause of random marks is due to loose material moving around inside the printer and attaching to the photoconductor unit, developer roll, or transfer module.
Previous
Next
Step
1
Questions / actions
Is there any loose or foreign material on the photoconductor unit?
2
Is there any loose or foreign material on the cartridge roll?
3
Is there any loose or foreign material on the transfer module?
Yes
Replace the photoconductor unit. See
“Photoconductor unit removal” on page 4-142
.
Replace the print cartridge.
Go to step 2.
No
Go to step 3.
Replace the transfer
“Transfer module removal” on page 4-171
Contact your next level of support.
Go Back
Print quality—residual image
Service tip: Install a new print cartridge if available before doing this service check. Residual image can be caused by the photoconductor, cleaning blade, and other parts inside the print cartridge.
Step
1
Questions / actions
Is there any toner contamination on the fuser assembly?
Yes
Replace the fuser. See
No
Contact your next level of support.
Print quality—solid color page
Service tip: A solid color page is generally caused by a problem in the high voltage system or an incorrect high voltage in the printing process resulting in toner development on the entire photoconductor drum.
Step
1
Questions / actions
Replace the photoconductor unit for the color in question.
Does this fix the problem?
Yes
Problem solved.
Go to step 2.
No
Diagnostic information
2-133
5026
Step Questions / actions
2
Check the high voltage contact from the
HVPS to the photoconductor charge roll.
Ensure the contact springs are properly mounted and that the charge roll contact spring is making good contact with the HPVS spring that runs through the left printer frame to view the proper mounting and for removal procedures.
Yes
Replace the transfer contact assembly.
High volt power supply
Go to step 3.
No
High volt contact path
Previous
Next
Go Back
Note: Printer is shown with components removed for clarity
Are the spring(s) defective?
3
Turn the printer off, and then check the continuity of the HVPS cable.
Pin 24
Pin 1
Pin 23
Pin 2
Pin 2
Is there continuity?
Pin 1
4
Replace the HVPS. See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal” on page 4-115
Did this solve the problem?
Print quality—vertical banding
Replace the developer cartridge.
2-134
Service Manual
Go to step 4.
Pin 23
Pin 24
Problem solved.
Replace the cable assembly.
Replace the system board.
“System board removal” on page 4-155
5026
Tray 1 missing service check
Previous
Step Questions / actions
1
1. Check if the tray assembly can close properly.
2. Make sure the paper path is cleared of jams.
3. Check for any damage.
Does the tray assembly close properly?
2
1. Clear the tray path of any obstruction.
2. Check for damage on the tray.
Is the tray free of damage?
3
1. Remove the tray and inspect the narrow media flag on the paper pick assembly for any damage.
2. Reseat the connector Jtray1 and JFDPCK on the system board, then check for any damage on the connectors.
Are the flag and cable connectors free of damage?
4
1. Disconnect the cable in JTRAY1, and connect the cable from the new paper pick mechanism.
2. Bring the printer up in the Diagnostics menu (turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, turn on the printer).
3. Navigate to Sensor Tests > Dynamic
Sensors
> Narrow Media.
4. Activate the narrow media sensor
Did the narrow media sensor status change on the touchscreen?
Go to step 3.
Yes
Go to step 3.
Go to step 4.
Go to step 2.
No
Replace the tray.
Replace the paper pick
“Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-137
Replace the paper pick
“Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-137
.
Replace the system board.
See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic information
2-135
5026
Tray linking service check
Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds from the next linked tray. When the Paper size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are automatically linked.
Go to step 2.
No Step Questions / actions
1
Load the same size and type of paper in each tray. Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.
Does tray linking work properly?
2
Print a menu settings page from the Admin
Menu, and compare the settings for each tray.
Are the settings for each tray to be linked the same for paper type and paper size?
Yes
Problem resolved.
Problem resolved.
In the Admin menus, set the same settings for paper size and paper type in each tray.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2-136
Service Manual
5026
3. Diagnostic aids
Previous
This chapter explains the tests and procedures to identify printer failures and verify repairs have corrected the problem.
Next
Accessing test and diagnostic procedure menus
There are different test menus that can be accessed during POR to identify problems with the printer.
Diagnostics menu 1. Turn off the printer.
2. Press and hold buttons 3 and
6
.
3. Turn on the printer.
4. Release the buttons when the clock graphic displays.
Configuration menu 1. Turn off the printer.
2. Press and hold buttons 2 and
6.
3. Turn on the printer.
4. Release the buttons when the progress bar displays.
Network SE Menu
SE Menu
1. While in Network/Ports Menu
(Menus—Network/Ports—
Standard Network
NET SETUP
buttons 6, 7, and 9.
—STD
), press and hold
From browser, add “/se” to device’s IP address (e.g. http://
158.183.3.2/se)
The Diagnostics menu group contains the settings and operations used while manufacturing and servicing the printer.
See
“Diagnostics menu” on page 3-2
information.
The Configuration menu group contains a set of menus, settings, and operations which are infrequently required by a user. Generally, the options made available in this menu group are used to configure a printer for operation.
“Configuration menu (CONFIG MENU)” on page 3-27
The Network SE menu contains advanced network menu tools. This key press only accesses the
Network SE Menu when the panel displays the top-most settings inside the Standard Network menu.
To run the printer diagnostic tests described in this chapter, you must put the printer in Diagnostics mode.
Go Back
Diagnostic aids
3-1
5026
Diagnostics menu
Note:
Tray 2 refers to the 550-sheet tray located in the 550-sheet option assembly.
Diagnostics menu structure
When the Diagnostics mode is entered, each Diagnostics main menu item displays on the operator panel. When a diagnostic test is selected from the main menu, a sub menu displays and each individual test displays in the order shown. Any options that are referred to in the menus are displayed when the option is installed.
Available tests
The tests display on the operator panel in the order shown:
REGISTRATION
Top Margin
Bottom Margin
Left Margin
Right Margin
Skew
Quick Test
ALIGNMENT MENU
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Factory Scanner
Factory Manual
See
See
See
.
.
A summary page for all the color alignment settings. Can be used in place of alignment pages for each individual color.
MOTOR TESTS (order differs depending upon model)
Align Motor Test
Cart 1
Cart 2
Note:
Many of these tests require special conditions in order to successfully test the motors. See
“General motor tests procedures” on page 3-10
Cart 3
CAM
COD
DUPLEX
Fuser
MPF
Transfer Belt
Option Motors
Tray 1
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-2
Service Manual
5026
PRINT TESTS
Tray 1
Tray 2 (if installed)
Tray 3 (if installed)
Tray 4 (if installed)
Tray 5 (if installed)
Multi-Purpose Feeder
Print Quality Pages
HARDWARE TESTS
Panel Test
Button Test
DRAM Test
Serial 1 Wrap (if a serial port is available in the PCI slot 1)
USB HS Test Mode
DUPLEX TESTS
(if installed)
Quick Test
Print Test
Top Margin
Left Margin
Skew
SENSOR TESTS
Static Sensors
Waste Toner
Belt Waste
Fuser Temp
Fuser BUR Temp
Power
Dynamic Sensors
Fuser Exit
Input
Front Door
Narrow Media
K Toner
M Toner
C Toner
Y Toner
TPS
Bubble
Dynamic MPF
Other Sensors
Bin Full Test
PRINTHEAD TESTS
Mirror Motor Test
“Input source tests” on page 3-12
.
“Print quality test pages (Print Quality Pages)” on page 3-13
See
See
.
See
.
“USB HS Test Mode” on page 3-16
“Quick Test (duplex)” on page 3-16
.
“Print Test (duplex)” on page 3-17
See
“Top Margin (duplex)” on page 3-18
.
See
“Left Margin (duplex)” on page 3-18
.
See
“Mirror Motor Test” on page 3-20
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic aids
3-3
5026
Servo Laser Test
“Servo Laser Test” on page 3-20
DEVICE TESTS (if hard disk or flash is installed)
Quick Disk Test
Disk Test/Clean
Flash Test
See
“Quick Disk Test” on page 3-21
“Disk Test/Clean” on page 3-22
.
.
PRINTER SETUP
Defaults
Prt Color Pg Count
Prt Mono Pg Count
Perm Page Count
Serial Number
Model Name
Engine Setting 1 through 4
Configuration ID
Reset Color Cal
Par 1 Strobe Adj
Motor Calibration
See
See
.
“Engine Setting 1 through 4” on page 3-23
“Configuration ID” on page 3-23
.
“Reset color calibration (Reset Color Cal)” on page 3-24
See
“Parallel 1 strobe adjustment (Par 1 Strobe Adj)” on page 3-24
.
“Motor Calibration” on page 3-24
EP SETUP
EP Defaults
Fuser Temp
DC Charge Adjust
Dev Bias Adj
Transfer Adjust
.
“Fuser temperature (Fuser Temp)” on page 3-24
See
“DC Charge Adjust, Dev Bias Adj, Transfer Adjust” on page 3-25
.
REPORTS
Menu Settings Page
EVENT LOG
Display Log
Print Log
Clear Log
EXIT DIAGNOSTICS
“Menu Settings Page” on page 3-25
See
.
.
This selection exits Diagnostics mode, and
Resetting the Printer displays. The printer performs a POR, and returns to normal mode.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-4
Service Manual
5026
Registration
Note:
If you need to perform alignment or registration, see
“Printhead alignment” on page 4-8
The following information is meant to explain the uses for the menu items.
Print registration makes sure the black printing is properly aligned on the page. This is one of the steps in aligning a new printhead. It is also the first step in aligning the duplex registration. See
“Quick Test (duplex)” on page 3-16
.
The settings available are Top Margin, Bottom Margin, Left Margin, Right Margin, Skew, and Quick Test.
Skew
One printhead houses the four color planes. The black plane is aligned to the printer, and the color planes are internally aligned to black. Adjust the skew mechanically by moving the printhead with a printhead adjustment screw. See
“Printhead mechanical alignment (C746)” on page 4-8
for instructions on setting printhead alignment. Electronic alignment fine tunes the alignment of the color planes to the black plane once the printhead is installed. Skew adjustment must be performed before color alignment is attempted. The following illustration shows proper alignment versus skewed alignment.
Proper alignment Skewed alignment
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic aids
3-5
5026
Print registration
Print registration (C746x)
To set print registration:
1.
Select REGISTRATION from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Quick Test.
The message
Quick Test Printing… appears on the display.
Note:
Retain this page to determine the changes you need to make to the margin settings.
3.
Use or to select the margin setting you need to change, and press .
4.
Use to decrease or to increase the offset values, and press to confirm the value.
5.
The message
Submitting selection displays and the original REGISTRATION screen appears.
The print registration range is:
Description
Skew
Top margin
Bottom margin
Left margin
Right margin
Value
-50 to +50 Each increment corresponds to 1/1200 of an inch.
-25 to +25 Each increment corresponds to 8 scans at a 600 dpi scan rate (0.0133 inches or
0.339 mm)
.
-25 to +25 Each increment causes approximately 0.55 mm shift in the bottom margin.
-50 to +50 Each increment corresponds to 4 pels at 600 dpi
(0.00666 in. or 0.1693 mm).
-50 to +50 Each increment corresponds to an approximate shift of 4 pels at 600 dpi.
Direction of change
Skew settings should be between -5 and +5. If not, readjust the skew with the printhead mechanical
“Printhead alignment” on page 4-8
A positive change moves the image down the page and increases the top margin. A negative change moves the image up and decreases the top margin.
Note:
Make sure media selection size matches the media size in tray
1.
A positive offset moves text up the page and widens the bottom margin. A negative offset moves text down the page and narrows the bottom margin.
A positive change moves the image to the right. A negative change moves the image to the left.
A positive change moves the image to the left. A negative change moves the image to the right.
6.
Continue changing the settings by repeating steps 2 through 4.
7.
Print another copy of the Quick Test to verify your changes.
To exit without changing the value, press .
Print registration (C748x)
To set print registration:
1.
Select REGISTRATION from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Quick Test.
The message Quick Test Printing… appears on the display.
Note:
Retain this page to determine the changes you need to make to the margin settings.
3.
Select the margin setting you need to change.
4.
Touch to decrease or to increase the offset values,.
5.
The message
Submitting changes displays and the original REGISTRATION screen appears.
3-6
Service Manual
Previous
Next
Go Back
The print registration range is:
Description
Skew
Top margin
Bottom margin
Left margin
Right margin
Value
-50 to +50 Each increment corresponds to 1/1200 of an inch.
-25 to +25 Each increment corresponds to 8 scans at a 600 dpi scan rate (0.0133 inches or
0.339 mm)
.
-25 to +25 Each increment causes approximately 0.55 mm shift in the bottom margin.
-50 to +50 Each increment corresponds to 4 pels at 600 dpi
(0.00666 in. or 0.1693 mm).
-50 to +50 Each increment corresponds to an approximate shift of 4 pels at 600 dpi.
Direction of change
Skew settings should be between -5 and +5. If not, readjust the skew with the printhead mechanical
“Printhead alignment” on page 4-8
A positive change moves the image down the page and increases the top margin. A negative change moves the image up and decreases the top margin.
Note:
Make sure media selection size matches the media size in tray
1.
A positive offset moves text up the page and widens the bottom margin. A negative offset moves text down the page and narrows the bottom margin.
A positive change moves the image to the right. A negative change moves the image to the left.
A positive change moves the image to the left. A negative change moves the image to the right.
6.
Continue changing the settings by repeating steps 2 through 4.
7.
Print another copy of the Quick Test to verify your changes.
To exit without changing the value, touch Back.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic aids
3-7
5026
Quick Test
The Quick Test contains the following information:
•
Print registration settings
•
Alignment diamonds at the left, right, top and bottom
•
Horizontal lines to check for skew
•
General printer information, including current page count, installed memory, serial number, and code level.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Note:
Print the Quick Test Page on letter or A4 paper.
1.
Select REGISTRATION from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Quick Test.
The message
Quick Test Printing… appears on the display.
Once the Quick Test Page completes printing, the Registration screen displays again.
Alignment
Note:
If you need to perform alignment or registration, see
“Printhead alignment” on page 4-8
The following information is meant to explain the uses for the menu items.
Alignment is part of the process of adjusting the printhead and the color planes to the black plane and to each other. Before you start, perform the black alignment (Registration). See
“Printhead alignment” on page 4-8
you are replacing a new printhead, see
“Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-145
.
Alignment (C746x)
To perform alignment:
1.
Select ALIGNMENT MENU from the Diagnostics Menu. Scroll until you reach the color that you desire to align. Go to each submenu, press and use the right and left arrow keys to zero out all settings. Press
after you zero out each setting.
Note:
It is important to zero out all settings to make the adjustment easier.
2.
Scroll to Quick Test in the same color menu. Press ; two pages print.
3.
On the pages, make sure all the Current Values are set to zero. If not, go back two steps and repeat.
3-8
Service Manual
5026
4.
Look at the coarse and fine adjustments on the top left of the page, and enter the best number for the top adjustment in the T space. Transfer this number over to the computation area for Z.
5.
On the operator panel, use and to locate Top Margin. Press , and then use or to enter the setting computed for T. Press to save.
6.
Repeat this process for skew (Z). Add the T value and the current Z value to obtain the new skew (Z) value.
7.
Reprint the Quick Test page, and observe the results. Make additional adjustments if necessary before proceeding on to Quick Test step two page.
8.
Obtain left (L), right (R), and Bow (P) value using the same method as obtaining T from Quick Test Step 1.
Reprint the Quick Test to ensure the settings are correct. Make additional adjustments as required.
9.
Press to return to ALIGNMENT MENU.
Alignment (C748x)
To perform alignment:
1.
Touch ALIGNMENT MENU from the Diagnostics Menu. Scroll until you reach the color that you desire to align. Go to each submenu, and use and to zero out all settings.
Note:
It is important to zero out all settings to make the adjustment easier.
2.
Scroll and touch Quick Test in the same color menu. Two pages print.
3.
On the pages, make sure all the Current Values are set to zero. If not, go back two steps and repeat.
4.
Look at the coarse and fine adjustments on the top left of the page, and enter the best number for the top adjustment in the T space. Transfer this number over to the computation area for Z.
5.
On the operator panel, touch Top Margin, and then use or to enter the setting computed for T.
6.
Repeat this process for skew (Z). Add the T value and the current Z value to obtain the new skew (Z) value.
7.
Reprint the Quick Test page, and observe the results. Make additional adjustments if necessary before proceeding on to Quick Test step two page.
8.
Obtain left (L), right (R), and Bow (P) value using the same method as obtaining T from Quick Test Step 1.
Reprint the Quick Test to ensure the settings are correct. Make additional adjustments as required.
9.
Touch Back to return to ALIGNMENT MENU.
See
“Printhead mechanical alignment (C746)” on page 4-8
for printout samples and additional information.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic aids
3-9
5026
Motor tests
The motor tests are run to locate noises in the printer and isolate failures between the motors, cables, and system board.
General motor tests procedures
In some instances, when you enter a particular test, you will be given the choice to run the motor in forward or reverse. Other times, there will only be the option to run the motor in forward direction.
In general, the test should work as follows:
1.
Select MOTOR TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select the motor that you need to test.
3.
Check the table below for setup requirements, if any.
4.
Select the direction if a choice is offered (Forward or Reverse) or other setting for that test.
Press or to stop the motor and end the test.
The following tests have special setup before running the test:
Motor diagnostic setup
Setup requirements
Motor
Tray 1
Align
Duplex
Belt stepper
Cartridge K – 3 N/A
Cart MCY – 2
Top cover position
N/A
Front door position
Closed
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Notes
Open
Closed
Open defeat +25 V switch
Closed
Closed split front door
Open defeat +25 V switch
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Ok
Ok
• Ok
• Picks paper – use empty or remove tray
• Ok
• View align mechanism
Ok
• Ok
• View duplex mechanism (pull tray to isolate gears)
• Ok
• Duplex mechanism disconnected from motor
• No motion
• No error reported
• Ok
• Belt disconnected from motor
• No motion
• No error reported
• Ok
• Cartridge disconnected from motor
• No motion
• No error reported
• Ok
• Cartridge disconnected from motor
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-10
Service Manual
5026
Motor
PCU CY – 1
Fuser
Cam
Setup requirements
Top cover position
N/A
Front door position
Closed
Closed
Open
N/A
Open
Closed
Open
N/A
Closed
Open
COD N/A Closed
Open
Notes
• No motion
• No error reported
• Ok
• Cartridge disconnected from motor
Ok
Possible under-temp 120.04 error
Not recommended, fuser errors possible
• Ok
• Front door locks & unlocks
• Ok
• Door disconnected from motor
• View gearbox
• Ok
• Engages and disengages cartridges
• No motion
• No error reported (open while test is running)
Motor diagnostics
Motor
Tray 1
Align
Direction
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Duplex
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Belt stepper Forward only
Reverse
Cartridge K – 3 Forward only
Reverse
Cart MCY – 2 Forward only
PCU CY – 1
Reverse
Forward only
Fuser
Reverse
Forward
Reverse
Action Notes
Pick from Main Tray
N/A
Push media toward belt
• Will pick continuously
• View with tray removed or empty
Function not supported
• Nip is closed
• Fails with waste box missing
Align leading edge
Push media down toward input
Function not supported
• Will run continuously
• View with front cover split
Pick from MPF (MPF test) • Will pick continuously
• View empty or pull tray
Gear turns counter clockwise View with front cover open (No forward menu)
N/A Only used to clear cleaner nip
Gear turns counter clockwise View with front cover open (runs PCU KM also)
N/A Only used to clear blade nip
Gear turns counter clockwise View with front cover open
N/A Not used
Gear turns counter clockwise View with front cover open
N/A
Push media toward output bin
Only used to clear blade nip
Backup roll turns
Top cover should be closed
Push media toward output bin
Backup roll is disengaged
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic aids
3-11
5026
Motor
Cam
COD
Direction
Forward
Action
Engage motor couplings
Reverse NOP Disengage motor couplings
Forward
Reverse NOP
Engage color cartridges
Disengage color cartridges
Notes
• Runs to stall position
• Locks door
• Enables print operations
• Runs to stall position
• Unlocks door
• Disables printing
• Runs to stall position
• Disables color print operations
• Runs to stall position
• Enables color printing
Print Tests
Input source tests
The purpose of the diagnostic Print Tests is to verify that the printer can print on media from each of the installed input options. The contents of the Print Test Page varies depending on the media installed in the selected input source.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Check each Test Page from each source to assist in print quality and paper feed problems.
To run the Print Test Page:
1.
Select PRINT TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select the media source.
Tray 1
Tray 2 (if installed)
Tray 3 (if installed)
Tray 4 (if installed)
Tray 5 (if installed)
Multi-Purpose Feeder (if installed)
3.
Select Single or Continuous.
•
If Single is selected, a single page is printed.
•
If Continuous is selected, printing continues until is pressed to cancel the test.
3-12
Service Manual
5026
If a source is selected that contains envelopes, an envelope test pattern is printed. If Continuous is selected, the test pattern is printed only on the first envelope.
Note:
The Print Test Page always prints on one side of the paper, regardless of the duplex setting.
4.
Press touch to return to PRINT TESTS.
Print quality test pages (Print Quality Pages)
The print quality test consists of five pages. Pages one and two contain a mixture of graphics and text. The remainder of the pages only contain graphics. The test prints on the media in the default tray.
Previous
Next
Go Back
This test may be printed from either Configuration Menu or the Diagnostics mode. To run the print quality pages from the Diagnostics mode, select PRINT TESTS and Print Quality Pages from the menu. Once the test is started, it cannot be canceled. When the test pages print, the printer returns to the original screen.
To run the Print Quality Test Pages, select Print Quality Pages from PRINT TESTS. The message
Printing
Quality Test Pages is displayed, and the test prints.
Diagnostic aids
3-13
5026
Hardware Tests
Panel Test
This test verifies the operator panel LCD function.
To run the Panel Test:
1.
Select HARDWARE TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Panel Test.
Note:
For C748x, the panel test continually executes. Each pixel is activated at the darkest level to the lightest level, and then the backlight illuminates and turns off. This is repeated continuously.
Note:
For C746x, the operator panel display cycles through red, green, blue, white, and black.
3.
Press to cancel the test at any point.
Button Test
This test verifies the operator panel button function.
To run the Button Test:
1.
Navigate to Diagnostics Menu > HARDWARE TESTS > Button Test.
2.
C746x and C748x models have different button tests.
•
For C746x, follow the instruction on the operator panel display on which button to press.
•
For C748x, a keypad displays on the operator panel. Press each physical button one at a time and observe if its corresponding button on the display lights up.
3.
Press or touch Back to end the test.
DRAM Test
This test checks the validity of DRAM, both standard and optional. The test writes patterns of data to DRAM to verify that each bit in memory can be set and read correctly.
To run the DRAM Test, navigate to Diagnostics Menu> HATDWARE TEST > DRAM Test. The power indicator
blinks
indicating the test is in progress.
Note:
If you need to exit the test before it is complete, turn off the printer.
DRAM Test 128M P:###### F:#####
P:###### represents the number of times the memory test has passed and finished successfully. Initially,
000000 displays with the maximum pass count being 99,999.
F:##### represents the number of times the memory test has failed and finished with errors. Initially, 00000 displays with the maximum fail count being 99,999.
Once the maximum pass count or fail count is reached, the test is stopped, the power indicator turns on solid, and the final results appear. If the test fails, SDRAM Error appears for approximately three seconds and the failure count increases by 1.
Serial 1 Wrap
The Serial 1 Wrap Test is used to check the operation of the serial port hardware using a wrap plug. Each serial signal is tested.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-14
Service Manual
To perform the Serial 1 Wrap Test:
1.
Disconnect the serial interface cable, and install the serial wrap plug.
2.
Select HARDWARE TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.
3.
Select Serial 1 Wrap.
The power indicator blinks indicating the test is in progress. The following screens appear
Serial Wrap [x] Testing…
Resetting the
Printer
Upon completion of the POR, the following screen is displayed:
Serial Wrap
P:###### F:####
P:###### represents the number of times the serial port hardware has passed.
Initially, 000000 is displayed. The maximum pass count is 999,999.
F:###### represents the number of times the serial port hardware has failed.
Initially, 0000 is displayed. The maximum fall count is 999,999.
Any of the following explanations for failure may display:
•
Receive Status Interrupt Error
•
Status Error
•
Receive Data Interrupt Error
•
Transmit Data Interrupt Error
•
Transmit Empty Error
•
Threshold Error
•
Receive Data Ready Error
•
Break Interrupt Error
•
Framing Error
•
Parity Error
•
Overrun Error
•
Data Error
•
Data 232 Error
•
Data 422 Error
•
FIFO Error
•
DSR Error
•
DSR PIO Error
•
DSR Interrupt Error
•
CTS Error
•
CTS PIO Error
•
CTS Interrupt Error
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic aids
3-15
5026
USB HS Test Mode
1.
Select HARDWARE TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select USB HS Test Mode.
3.
Select the port (Port 0, Port 1, Port 2, Port 3).
4.
Select the test for that port from the following list:
Test J
Test K
Test SE0 NAK
Test Packet
Test Force Enable
5.
While the test executes,
USB High Speed Testing… displays.
To exit the test, restart the printer.
Duplex Tests
Quick Test (duplex)
Note:
Before you set the duplex top margin, be sure to set the skew and alignment. See
“Printhead alignment” on page 4-8
This test prints a duplex version of the Quick Test that can be used to verify the correct placement of the top margin on the back side of a duplex page.
You can run one duplexed page (Single), or continue printing duplexed pages (Continuous) until is pressed. For information about changing the margin, see
“Top Margin (duplex)” on page 3-18
Previous
Next
Go Back
The paper you choose to print the page on should be either Letter or A4.
3-16
Service Manual
5026
To run the Quick Test (duplex):
1.
Select Quick Test from DUPLEX TESTS.
2.
Select Single or Continuous.
•
The single Duplex Quick test cannot be canceled.
•
The printer attempts to print the Quick Test Page from the default paper source.
•
Check the Quick Test Page for the correct offset between the placement of the first scan line on the front and back side of a duplexed sheet.
The single test stops automatically when a single duplex sheet is printed, and the continuous test continues until you press .
Previous
Next
Go Back
Print Test (duplex)
This test provides service personnel with a way to verify the function of the printer’s duplex hardware. After the user selects this test, the device automatically executes a continuous print test that generates a duplexed, color output page. To stop the test, the user must press . While this test executes, the power indicator light blinks green and the panel displays “DUPLEX TESTS Printing...”.
The paper you choose to print the page on should be either Letter or A4.
To run the Print Test (duplex):
1.
Select DUPLEX TEST in the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Print Test.
The printer executes a continuous print test that generates a duplexed, color output page.
3.
To stop the test, press .
Diagnostic aids
3-17
5026
Skew (duplex)
This setting adjusts the duplex motor speed when it feeds through the aligning roll. It controls the skew between the first scan line and the top of the page. Adjustments are made to the image that is facedown in the output tray.
To set the Skew (duplex):
1.
Select DUPLEX TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Quick Test.
3.
Select Single.
The test page prints.
4.
Look at the dotted arrows at the top of the page. If the page is skewed on the page, select Skew.
5.
For C746x, use or to select the skew setting you need to change, and press . For C748x, use or to select the skew setting you need to change, and touch .
•
Each increment shifts the skew by about 6 pixels at 600 dpi.
•
The Skew (duplex) range is -50 to +50, and the default value is 0.
•
An increase moves the image at the top right down the page. A decrease moves the image at the top right up the page.
6.
Perform Quick Test again to verify the adjustment. Check the page to see if the image on the page is still skewed. If it is, repeat the adjustment.
Top Margin (duplex)
This setting controls the offset between the first scan line on the front of the duplex page and the first scan line on the back of the page. The duplex adjustments are made to the image that is face down in the output tray.
Therefore, be sure to set the top margin in REGISTRATION before setting the duplex top margin. See
.
To set the Top Margin (duplex):
1.
Select DUPLEX TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Quick Test.
3.
Select Single.
The test page prints.
4.
Hold the page to the light to see whether the top margin of the back aligns with the top margin of the front.
5.
If they do not match, select Top Margin.
6.
For C746x use or to select the margin setting you need to change, and press . For C748x, use or to select the margin setting you need to change, and touch .
•
Each increment shifts the duplex top margin by 1/100 of an inch.
•
The Top Margin (duplex) range is -25 to +25, and the default value is 0.
•
An increase moves the top margin down and widens the top margin. A decrease moves the top margin upward and narrows the top margin.
7.
Print the Quick Test again to verify the adjustment. Repeat until the front and back top scan lines match.
Left Margin (duplex)
By modifying this setting you can shift the image on the back side of a duplex page to the right or to the left.
To set the Left Margin (duplex):
1.
Select DUPLEX TESTS in the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Quick Test.
3.
Select Single.
The test page prints.
4.
Hold the page to the light to see whether the left margin of the back aligns with the left margin of the front.
5.
If they do not match, select Left Margin.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-18
Service Manual
5026
6.
Use or to select the margin setting you need to change, and press . For C748x, use or to select the margin setting you need to change, and touch .
•
Each increment shifts the duplex left margin by 4 pixels at 600 dpi (0.00666 inches or 0.1693 mm).
•
The Left Margin range is -50 to +50, and the default value is 0.
•
An increase moves the margin to the right, and a decrease moves the margin to the left.
Sensor Test
There are two groups of sensors tests, static sensors and dynamic sensors.
To run the Sensor Test:
1.
Select Sensor Tests from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Static Sensors or Dynamic Sensors.
•
For static sensors—view the current status. Exit menus and re-enter to change state.
•
For dynamic sensors—view the current status and toggle the state to test the sensor.
3.
Select the particular sensor you need to test.
Touch Back or press to exit the test.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Sensor type Sensor name
Waste Toner
Belt Waste
Static sensors
Fuser Temp
Fuser BUR Temp
Power
Possible values
Empty, Full, or
Missing
Empty or percentage full
Degrees (C)
Degrees (C)
Voltage
Sensor activation
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Open and close the front access door.
Diagnostic aids
3-19
5026
Sensor type
Dynamic sensors
Sensor name
Fuser Exit
Input
Door
Narrow Media
K Toner
M Toner
C Toner
Y Toner
TPS (toner patch sensor)
Bubble
Dynamic MPF
Other Sensors
Bin Full Test
Possible values
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
Open/Closed
Sensor activation
Open the top access cover. Activate the fuser exit flag. The sensor should change state.
Remove the paper tray 1. Activate the input sensor flag. The sensor should change state.
Open the front door. The sensor should change state.
Test the MP feeder tray by inserting a sheet of paper, and pushing up to sensor. The sensor should change state.
Remove the black toner cartridge. Shine a flashlight on the toner level sensor. The sensor should change state.
Remove the magenta toner cartridge. Shine a flashlight on the toner level sensor. The sensor should change state.
Remove the cyan toner cartridge. Shine a flashlight on the toner level sensor. The sensor should change state.
Remove the yellow toner cartridge. Shine a flashlight on the toner level sensor. The sensor should change state.
Open the front access door. Slip a piece of paper between the TPS and the transfer module. The sensor should change state.
Open the front door. Activate the fuser entry flag. The sensor should change state.
Test by removing the MPF pick arm and activating the paper present sensor or remove the tray and shine a flashlight on the paper present sensor.
Move the bin full sensor flag (located on the fuser) up and down to toggle the sensor state.
Printhead Tests
Mirror Motor Test
1.
Select PRINTHEAD TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Mirror Motor Test.
The panel displays
Motor Running.
After the test completes, the panel displays either
Pass or Fail.
To stop the test, Touch Back or press .
Servo Laser Test
1.
Select PRINTHEAD TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Servo Laser Test.
The panel displays
Motor Running. After the test completes, the panel displays either Pass or Fail.
To stop the test, Touch Back or press .
Device Tests
Note:
These tests only appear if the flash or disk option is installed.
3-20
Service Manual
Previous
Next
Go Back
5026
Quick Disk Test
This test performs a non-destructive read/write on one block per track on the disk. The test reads one block on each track, saves the data, and proceeds to write and read four test patterns to the bytes in the block. If the block is good, the saved data is written back to the disk.
To run the Quick Disk Test:
1.
Select DEVICE TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Quick Disk Test.
•
The power indicator blinks while the test is in progress.
•
Quick Disk Test/Test Passed is displayed if the test passes and the power indicator turns on solid.
•
Quick Disk Test/Test Failed is displayed if the test failed and the power indicator turns on solid.
You cannot stop the test while it is running, but when it is complete, press to return to DEVICE TESTS.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic aids
3-21
5026
Disk Test/Clean
Warning:
This test destroys all data on the disk and should not be attempted on a good disk. This test may run approximately 1½ hours depending on the disk size.
To run the Disk Test/Clean Test:
1.
Select DEVICE TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Disk Test/Clean.
Files will be lost/Go or Stop? is displayed to warn the user.
3.
To exit the test immediately and return to DEVICE TESTS, touch Back or press . To continue with the test, press or touch .
Disk Test/Clean/BAD:000000 00% is displayed. The screen updates periodically, indicating the percentage of test completed and the number of bad blocks found.
4.
The power indicator blinks during the test. Touch Back or press to cancel the test.
•
Once the test is complete, the power indicator turns on solid and a message displays.
•
xxxx Bad Blocks/yyyyyy Usable is displayed if fewer than 2000 bad blocks are detected. xxxx indicates the number of bad blocks, and yyyyyy indicates the number of usable blocks.
•
xxxx Bad Blocks/Replace Disk is displayed if more than 2000 bad blocks are detected. The disk cannot be recovered because too many bad blocks exist on the disk.
5.
Touch Back or press to return to DEVICE TESTS.
Flash Test
This test causes the file system to write and read data on the flash to test the flash.
Warning:
This test destroys all data on the flash because the flash is reformatted at the end of the test.
To run the Flash Test:
1.
Select DEVICE TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Flash Test,.
•
The power indicator blinks while the test is running.
•
Flash Test/Test Passed is displayed if the test passes and the power indicator turns on solid.
•
Flash Test/Test Failed is displayed if the test fails and the power indicator turns on solid.
3.
Touch Back or press to return to DEVICE TESTS.
Printer Setup
Defaults
U.S./Non-U.S. defaults changes whether the printer uses the U.S. factory defaults or the non-U.S. factory defaults. The settings affected include paper size, envelope size, PCL symbol set, code pages, and units of measure.
Warning:
Changing this setting resets the printer to factory defaults, and data may be lost. It cannot be undone.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-22
Service Manual
5026
Page Counts
You can view, but not change any of the three counts displayed under PAGE COUNTS.
To view the Prt Color Pg Count, the Prt Mono Pg Count, or the Perm Page Count:
1.
Select PRINTER SETUP from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select the page count you wish to view:
•
Prt Color Pg Count
•
Prt Mono Pg Count
•
Perm Page Count
Touch Back or press to return to PRINTER SETUP.
Serial Number
The serial number can only be viewed and cannot be changed.
To view the serial number:
1.
Select PRINTER SETUP from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Serial number.
Touch Back or press to return to PRINTER SETUP.
Engine Setting 1 through 4
Warning:
Do not change these settings unless requested to do so by your next level of support.
Model Name
The model name can only be viewed and cannot be changed.
Configuration ID
The two configuration IDs are used to communicate information about certain areas of the printer that cannot be determined using hardware sensors. The configuration IDs are originally set at the factory when the printer is manufactured. However, the servicer may need to reset Configuration ID 1 or Configuration ID 2 whenever the system board is replaced. The IDs consist of eight digits. The first seven digits in each ID are hexadecimal numbers, while the last digit is a checksum of the preceding seven digits. Each ID can contain a combination of the digits 0 through 9, and A through F.
Note:
When the printer detects a Configuration ID that is not defined or invalid, the following occurs:
•
The default standard model Configuration ID is used instead.
•
Configuration ID is the only function available in DIAGNOSTICS.
•
Unless the menu is in DIAGNOSTICS,
Check Config ID displays.
To set the configuration ID:
1.
Select Printer Setup from the Diagnostic mode.
2.
Select Configuration ID from the Printer Setup menu.
3.
The value for Configuration ID 1 displays.
4.
Enter the Configuration ID 1.
•
Use the keypads on the operator panel to enter the configuration ID.
•
Press or touch Clear to delete the default configuration ID displayed.
•
After the last digit is changed, press or touch to validate the Configuration ID 1.
If
Invalid ID appears, the entry is discarded.
If the process is successful,
Submitting Changes appears on the display.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic aids
3-23
5026
5.
Repeat the steps for entering the Configuration ID 2, and press
.
Note:
The printer will NOT perform an automatic POR after the Configuration IDs are accepted.
Reset color calibration (Reset Color Cal)
The Reset Color Cal enables the alignment of the color planes using pre-programmed values. Automatic Color
Adjust Calibration may be more effective.
1.
Select PRINTER SETUP from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Reset Color Cal.
Resetting displays on the screen.
3.
The printer returns to the previous screen when calibration is complete.
Parallel 1 strobe adjustment (Par 1 Strobe Adj)
Note:
This setting appears only if the printer has a parallel port available in the PCI slot 1.
This setting enables the servicer to adjust the amount of time the strobe is sampled in order to determine if valid data is available on the parallel port. The range of values is -4 to 6. Each time this value is incremented by 1, the strobe is sampled 50 ns (nanoseconds) longer. Each time this value is decreased by 1, the strobe is sampled 50 ns less often. When the value of this setting is 0, the factory default is used to determine the length of time the strobe is sampled. If the servicer, for example, decreased the value from 0 to 3, the strobe will be sampled for
150 ns longer than the factory setting.
Motor Calibration
This test is run to calibrate the leading edge of the paper to each transfer station.
1.
Select MOTOR TESTS from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Motor Calibration.
The printer generates eight pages as part of this test.
To stop the test, press .
EP Setup
EP Defaults
This setting is used to restore each printer setting listed in EP SETUP to its factory default value. Sometimes this is used to help correct print quality problems.
To restore EP Defaults:
1.
Select EP SETUP from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select EP Defaults.
3.
Select Restore to reset the values to the factory settings, and select Do Not Restore to exit without changing the settings.
Fuser temperature (Fuser Temp)
This adjustment can be used to help solve some customer problems with paper curl on low grade papers and problems with letterheads on some types of media.
The fuser temperature can be adjusted to: Low, Normal, High. The default is Normal.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-24
Service Manual
5026
Reports
DC Charge Adjust, Dev Bias Adj, Transfer Adjust
Each of these three settings enables you to adjust the high voltage levels controlling the electrophotographic process. You will use these settings to compensate for unusual operating circumstances such as high humidity.
The printer uses the value of these settings together with other settings to calculate printing speed and media selection.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Menu Settings Page
The Menu Settings Page is a list of DIAGNOSTICS settings with the current value.
Event Log
Display Log
The event log provides a history of printer errors. It contains the 12 most recent errors that have occurred on the printer. The most recent error displays in position 1, and the oldest error displays in position 12 (if 12 errors have occurred). If an error occurs after the log is full, the oldest error is discarded. Identical errors in consecutive positions in the log are entered, so there may be repetitions. All 2xx and 9xx error messages are stored in the event log.
To view the event log:
1.
Select EVENT LOG from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Display Log.
Touch Back ore press to return to the EVENT LOG menu.
Diagnostic aids
3-25
5026
Print Log
Additional diagnostic information is available when you print the event log from DIAGNOSTICS rather than
CONFIG MENU.
The Event Log printed from DIAGNOSTICS includes:
•
Detailed printer information, including code versions
•
Time and date stamps
•
Page counts for most errors
•
Additional debug information in some cases
Previous
Next
Go Back
The printed event log can be faxed to Lexmark or your next level of support for verification or diagnosis.
To print the event log:
1.
Select EVENT LOG from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Print Log.
Touch Back or press to return to EVENT LOG.
Clear Log
Use Clear Log to remove the current information in the Event Log. This affects both the viewed log and the printed log information.
1.
Select EVENT LOG from the Diagnostics Menu.
2.
Select Clear Log.
3.
Select YES to clear the Event Log or NO to exit the Clear Log menu.
If YES is selected,
Deleting EVENT LOG displays on the screen.
Touch Back or press to return to EVENT LOG.
EXIT DIAGNOSTICS
The printer performs a power-on reset and returns to normal mode.
3-26
Service Manual
Configuration menu (CONFIG MENU)
Available tests
The tests display on the operator panel in the order shown.
Reset Fuser Cnt
Color Lock Out
Print Quality Pages
Reports
Menu Settings Page
Event Log
Color Trapping
Tray Insert Msg
Panel Menus
PPDS Emulation
Download Emuls (if available)
Demo Mode
Factory Defaults
Energy Conserve
Automatic Color Adjust
Auto Align Adj
Color Adj State
Enforce Color Order
Color Alignment
Motor Calibration
Paper Prompts
Envelope Prompts
Action for Prompts
“Reset Fuser Cnt” on page 3-28
.
.
“Print Quality Pages” on page 3-28
.
“Menu Settings Page” on page 3-29
.
.
“Tray Insert Msg” on page 3-29
.
.
.
.
.
“Factory Defaults” on page 3-30
.
“Energy Conserve” on page 3-30
.
“Automatic Color Adjust” on page 3-31
.
“Color Adj State” on page 3-31
.
“Enforce Color Order” on page 3-31
“Color Alignment” on page 3-31
“Motor Calibration” on page 3-32
“Envelope Prompts” on page 3-32
“Action for Prompts” on page 3-32
Jobs on Disk (if hard disk is installed)
Disk Encryption (if hard disk is installed)
“Disk Encryption” on page 3-33
Wipe Disk (if hard disk is installed)
.
.
.
.
Wipe All Settings
Duplex Gloss
Font Sharpening
Require Standby
UI Automation
Key Repeat Initial Delay
Key Repeat Rate
Clear Custom Status
“Wipe All Settings” on page 3-33
“Font Sharpening” on page 3-34
“Require Standby” on page 3-34
“Key Repeat Initial Delay” on page 3-34
“Key Repeat Rate” on page 3-34
.
“Clear Custom Status” on page 3-34
.
USB Speed
.
Automatically Display Error Screens
“Automatically Display Error Screens” on page 3-35
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic aids
3-27
5026
Exit Config This selection exits Configuration Menu, and
Resetting the Printer displays. The printer performs a POR and returns to normal mode.
Reset Fuser Cnt
Resets the fuser count value to zero. The Event Log records each time that a user executes the Reset Fuser
Count operation. See
for more information. This setting only appears if the
Maintenance Warning and Intervention function is enabled in the printer Configuration ID.
To reset the fuser count:
1.
Select Reset Fuser Cnt from the Configuration Menu.
To cancel a reset, touch Back or press .
2.
Select Reset Fuser Cnt. Once you select Reset Fuser Cnt, you cannot cancel.
Resetting Fuser Counter appears.
Color Lock Out
Select On when printing for extended periods with only black toner. This saves the color toner cartridges (cyan, magenta, and yellow) and photoconductor units from excessive wear. In addition to setting the values, the cyan, magenta, and, yellow toner cartridges and their matching photoconductor units must be removed from the printer. The default value is Off.
1.
Select Color Lock Out from the Configuration Menu.
2.
Select On.
3.
Remove all color supplies. Remove the color cartridges and the color photoconductor units. Leave only the black supplies.
4.
Select Exit Config menu, or power off and on again.
Note:
•
If On is selected, and the color supplies are left installed when the printer is returned to normal mode, the printer displays
Remove All Color Supplies. Remove all the color supplies, and press
or touch .
•
If Off is selected, then at step 3, install all color supplies. If the supplies are not installed when the printer returns to normal mode, the printer displays 31 Missing or Defective {color} Cartridge. Replace the color cartridges and color photoconductors, and press or touch .
Print Quality Pages
To help isolate print quality problems, print the Print Quality Test Pages. The pages are formatted. The Printing
Quality Test Pages message appears, then the pages print. The message remains on the operator panel until all the pages print.
Press or touch to print the pages. The Print Quality Test Pages contain several pages. The first page which is printed in English text only contains a mixture of text and graphics. The information includes values of the Quality Menu settings in Settings and printer and toner cartridge configuration information. The remaining pages contain only graphics. For samples of the pages, see
“Print quality test pages (Print Quality Pages)” on page 3-13
.
Reports
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-28
Service Manual
5026
Reports
Previous
Menu Settings Page
The Menu Settings Page generates a list of Configuration Menu settings and the current values.
Next
Event Log
This menu item lets the system support person print a limited set of the information contained in the Diagnostics mode version of the printed Event Log. For a sample of a Diagnostics Menu Event Log printout, see
. The limited Configuration log and the full Diagnostics log printed versions show the same
operator panel messages when they print and follow the same layout guidelines.
To print the Event Log:
1.
Select EVENT LOG from the Configuration Menu
2.
Select Print Log to begin printing the log.
Note:
If an optional parallel card is supported and installed, then after the Event Log prints, a separate report prints that details the parallel card’s history.
Go Back
Color Trapping
Uses an algorithm to compensate for mechanical misregistration in the printer. When small black text or fine black lines are being printed, the printer checks to see if they are being printed on top of a colored background.
If so, rather than remove the color from beneath the black content, the printer leaves the color around the edge of the text or line. The hole in the colored region is reduced in size which prevents the characteristic white gap that is caused by mis-registration.
This menu item applies to PCL 5e emulation, PCL XL, PDF, and PostScript.
Selections are Off and the values 1 through 5, with 2 as the default. Values 1 through 5 indicate the amount of color remaining beneath the black content. Each setting increments by 1/600 of an inch. The less accurate the registration setting, the higher the setting needs to be adjusted. Selecting Off disables color trapping. The default value is 2.
Tray Insert Msg
This setting determines how many seconds the panel will display the
Tray Insert message after inserting a tray into the printer.
Selections are Disabled and the values between 1 and 90. The default value is 5.
Panel Menus
Lets the system support person turn enable or disable the operator panel Administration Menu. Selecting On
(the default) prevents users from changing values for the printer. Off allows users to changes the values. The default value is set to On.
This menu item only appears when the PJL PASSWORD Environment variable is set to 0.
Diagnostic aids
3-29
5026
PPDS Emulation
Activates or deactivates (default) the Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) emulation language. This menu item only appears if the PPDS interpreter is available.
Download Emuls
This menu item allows the system support person turn the download emulator off temporarily. This menu item only appears if at least one download emulator is installed.
The only selection is Disable. The printer automatically re-enables all download emulators after two instances of a power-on reset for the printer. To re-enable these emulators, a user would perform another power-on reset after exiting the Config Menu.
Demo Mode
This menu item allows marketing personnel or merchandisers demonstrate the printer to potential customers by printing the demo page.
Selections include Deactivate (default) and Activate. Select Deactivate to turn Demo Mode off; or select
Activate
to turn Demo Mode on.
Factory Defaults
This menu item resets the majority of printer values back to their factory default settings.
Warning:
This selection cannot be reversed, so this operation should only be used as a last resort to fix any printer problem.
When factory default settings are restored:
•
All downloaded resources (fonts, macros, symbol sets) in the printer memory (RAM) are deleted.
•
All menu settings return to the factory default setting except:
–
The Display Language setting in the “Setup” Menu.
–
All settings in the Parallel Menu, Serial Menu, Network Menu, Infrared Menu, LocalTalk Menu, and
USB Menu.
Selections are Restore Base and Restore STD NET. The Restore Network value only appears on printer models that have integrated network support.
Restoring Factory Defaults appears on the operator panel while factory defaults are restored.
Energy Conserve
This menu item affects the values that appear in the Power Saver menu on the operator panel. Energy
Conserve only appears when the Power Saver feature is disabled.
Select Off in Energy Conserve to add a menu item to the Power Saver called
Disabled. Energy Conserve does not disable Power Saver, it only allows the users to select Disable. When On (default) is selected in the Energy
Conserve menu
Disabled does not appear on as a choice in the Power Saver menu. Power Saver cannot be disabled from the user‘s operator menu.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-30
Service Manual
5026
Automatic Color Adjust
Sets the suggested number of pages which the printer should print between consecutive calibrations.
Selections are Off and the values between 100 and 1000 in increments of 50. The default is 500 pages.
If the printer exceeds the set value while printing a job, it completes the current job and any other jobs received while printing the current job before it initiates a calibration. The printer does not cancel or suspend an active job in order to perform a calibration. If a user is in any of the menus, including the Configuration Menu and the
Diagnostics mode, an automatic color adjust calibration does not occur.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Auto Align Adj
Controls whether the printer executes the automatic alignment calibration after an initiating event occurs. When an event initiates a TPS operation, the printer performs a toner density calibration, (TPS) an alignment calibration, or both of the calibrations.
Toner Patch Sensing (TPS) is a diagnostic mechanism that automatically adjusts the printer toner density and alignment settings. When TPS executes, the printer generates toner patches on the transfer module. It then uses these to calculate the appropriate adjustment, to density, if necessary.
Selections are On (default) and Off. Turning this setting to Off is not recommended for normal operation because it prevents the printer from using the results of automatic color calibration and automatic alignment to make minor adjustments. Eventually, the user will have to manually correct alignment and color on the printer.
Color Adj State
These settings allow you to select when color calibrations occur. Selecting Busy indicates the color calibrations will complete queued jobs, but refuse to add new jobs to the queue. When calibration is complete jobs are again accepted. Selecting Idle allows calibrations only when the printer is idle.
Enforce Color Order
This setting gives the system support person the ability to enforce where the color cartridges may be placed, and if messages appear when cartridges are in the wrong location.
When On (default) is selected, the printer lets users place each toner cartridge in only its specified slot. For instance, the Magenta toner cartridge must be in the Magenta slot. If the user tries to place a cartridge in an incorrect slot, the printer message
31 Defective or Missing <color> Cartridge or 32 Unsupported <color>
Cartridge appears where <color> stands for Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, or Black.
When Off is selected, the printer does not issue any message to let the user know that the cartridge is placed in the wrong slot inside the printer.
Color Alignment
Color alignment should be performed when the printhead may become misaligned because it was removed or replaced. Perform Color Alignment when a new transfer belt assembly is installed.
To perform color alignment:
1.
Select Color Alignment from the Configuration Menu.
2.
Select Print Alignment Page.
3.
Select Set A.
Consulting the printed page, follow the instructions on the operator panel to choose the best appearing line numbered 0 through 20 for line A.
Continue selecting the best lines for the sets through Set L.
Diagnostic aids
3-31
5026
Motor Calibration
This test is run to calibrate the leading edge of the paper to each transfer station.
1.
Select Motor Calibration from the Configuration Menu.
2.
Calibrating displays, and the printer prints eight blank pages and then returns to the Configuration Menu.
Note:
This test should be run at 600 dpi resolution and with duplex disabled.
Paper Prompts
Controls the source the printer selects for a change paper source message. The printer displays the change paper source message based on the size of the paper requested and not by the paper type.
Selections include Auto, Multi-Purpose Feeder, and Manual Paper.
Note:
Multi-Purpose Feeder is only available on some printer models.
Note:
If the Configure MP setting is changed to Manual, a power-on reset is performed, and the value of the
Paper Prompts menu item before the power-on reset was Multi-Purpose Feeder, then when the printer restarts, the printer automatically changes the Paper Prompts setting to Manual Paper.
Load Manual overrides that would result in a change paper message are disabled for Paper or Envelope prompts that are set to Manual, Manual Paper, or Manual Envelope.
Envelope Prompts
Controls the source the printer selects for a change envelope source message. The printer displays the change envelope message based on the size of the envelope requested and not by the envelope type.
Selections include Auto, Multi-Purpose Feeder, and Manual Envelope.
Note:
Multi-Purpose Feeder is only available on some printer models.
Note:
If the Configure MP setting is changed to Manual, and a power-on reset is performed, and the value of the Envelope Prompts menu item before the power-on reset was Multi-Purpose Feeder, then when the printer restarts, the printer automatically changes the Envelope Prompt setting to Manual Envelope.
Load Manual overrides that would result in a change paper message are disabled for Paper or Envelope prompts that are set to Manual, Manual Paper, or Manual Envelope.
Action for Prompts
This setting gives the user the option of having the printer resolve change prompt situations without requiring any user assistance. If the Prompt user value is selected, the printer displays change prompts if the job does not match the media in the selected source. The user must select another source or change the paper. If
Continue
or Use current is selected, the printer acts as if the user made the selection Continue or
Use current
and continues without user intervention, in most cases.
Jobs on Disk
Lets the user select whether or not the printer deletes all buffered jobs on the hard disk. This menu item only appears if a hard disk is installed. It appears even if no buffered jobs exist on the hard disk.
Selections include Do Not Delete and Delete.
Note: Delete
does not remove Print and Hold jobs. Use Remove Held Jobs in the Utilities Menu (user menu) to delete these jobs.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-32
Service Manual
5026
Disk Encryption
Controls whether the printer encrypts the information that it writes to the hard disk.
Warning:
When the value for Disk Encryption, the printer completely formats the hard disk which means that all information on the disk is deleted.
Note:
If an encrypted disk is removed from the printer and another disk is installed, the
Disk Corrupted.
Reformat? message appears. The newly installed disk must either be formatted or removed from the printer.
Selections include Disable (default) and Enable. When Disk Encryption is selected, Yes or No appears for you to confirm. Select either Yes or No to continue. To cancel, select No.
The Disk Encryption menu item only appears when:
•
A non-defective disk is installed in the printer.
•
The values of bits 3-2 of digit 4 in the Configuration ID 2 are either 01 for Supported, or 10 for Supported with an internal network adapter (INA).
A graphic appears, showing:
•
The message
Encrypting Disk or Formatting Disk
•
A percentage scale
•
The message
DO NOT POWER OFF
The process is complete when the percentage scale displays 100.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Wipe Disk
Note:
Due to the lengthy amount of time required to wipe an entire hard disk using either method, a wipe should not be initiated unless it is absolutely unavoidable (for example, disk corruption), or unless the printer can remain offline for several hours without inconveniencing users.
Warning:
A user should not initiate either type of wipe from the Configuration Menu if the hard disk contains downloaded fonts, macros, held jobs, and so forth that should not be erased.
This setting initiates either a single pass wipe or a multiple pass wipe of the entire hard disk. Select Disk Wipe
(fast)
to complete a single pass wipe and replacement of the file system. Select Disk Wipe (secure) to complete a multiple pass wipe at a more basic level.
Wipe All Settings
The purpose of this setting is to make any sensitive information that may exist on the device’s volatile or nonvolatile storage completely indecipherable.
After selecting this setting, the operator panel displays the following message:
This operation will clear all settings, solutions, and jobs on this device. The device will reboot during this process. Continue?
To cancel the NAND wipe operation and return to the main Configuration Menu, select No. To execute the
NAND wipe operation, select Yes.
After selecting Yes, the device initiates a non-critical NVRAM reset, and the operator panel displays the message Resetting the device, and then the device reboots.
The progress bar area of the Lexmark logo screen that appears during boot up displays the following message until the wiping process is finished:
Wiping disk...Pass [x] of [y]. [Z]% done.
Diagnostic aids
3-33
5026
Duplex Gloss
Generates higher quality duplex copies than when using the normal duplex mode. The major difference between normal duplex and duplex gloss mode is the number of sheets in the duplex print media path. Normal duplex mode feeds two sheets simultaneously, while duplex gloss feeds only one sheet.
Selections include Off (default) and On.
Font Sharpening
Lets a user set a text point-size value below the setting of the high frequency screens used when printing font data. This menu item only affects the PostScript, PCL, XL, and PDF emulators.
Settings are in the range of 0–150 (24 is the default). For example, if the value is set to 24, then all fonts sized 24 points or less use the high frequency screens.
Require Standby
When set to Off, the Standby Mode setting in the General Settings Menu displays a Disabled value.
UI Automation
This setting allows external developers to measure the stability of their applications by performing their own automated testing against the device.
Selections include Enable and Disable (default).
When Enable is selected, the machine creates a file called ENABLE_UI_AUTOMATION in the /var/fs/shared/ directory. As long as this file exists, the device permits automated testing by external users.
When Disable is selected, the machine removes the ENABLE_UI_AUTOMATION file from the /var/fs/shared/ directory and prohibits automated testing.
Key Repeat Initial Delay
This determines the initial length of delay before a repeating key starts repeating.
The selection values are from 0.25 to 5.00 with 0.25 second increments. The default value is 1.00.
Key Repeat Rate
This determines the value for the number of presses per second for a repeating key.
The selection values are from 0.5 to 100.0 with 0.5 second increments. The default value is 15.0.
Clear Custom Status
This operation erases any strings that have been defined by the user for the Default or Alternate custom messages.
USB Speed
Full or Auto (default).
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-34
Service Manual
5026
Automatically Display Error Screens
Selections include On (default) and Off (default).
When On is selected, the operator panel automatically displays any existing printer-related IR after the device remains inactive on the Home screen for a length of time equal to the Screen Timeout setting. Any IR that appears on the operator panel will display the option to return to the Home screen without clearing it. Once the device returns to the Home screen, though, any existing IR again will appear after the device remains inactive on the Home screen for a length of time equal to the Screen Timeout setting.
Note:
SFPs and MFPs use a different default value for this setting in order to preserve their legacy behavior with respect to IRs.
Exit Config
Exits the Configuration Menu. The printer performs a power-on reset and returns to normal mode.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic aids
3-35
5026
Front cover locked in place
The front door locks during certain Busy events, and unlocks when those events are complete. This is a normal function. You can hear the door lock into place when one of these events take place. However, if the printer is turned off, or has an error while the front door is locked (for example, while printing or calibrating), the front door may not unlock. If this happens, turn the printer off, and restart it. Once it goes through POR, it may unlock itself.
If this does not work, use the following procedure to unlock the front door:
1.
Remove the two screws (A) from the rear upper cover, and remove the cover.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2.
Remove the two screws (B) from the rear left cover.
3-36
Service Manual
5026
3.
Press the waste toner release latch (C), swing the front of the waste toner assembly away from the printer, and remove.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4.
Remove the two screws (D) on the bottom and one screw higher up (E).
5.
Press the locking tab (F).
E D
F
Diagnostic aids
3-37
5026
6.
Lift the rear of the left cover out, and rotate it out of position.
Note:
It will not come completely off with the front cover locked.
Previous
Next
Go Back
7.
With a flatblade screwdriver, turn the camshaft counterclockwise until the door unlocks.
8.
Open the front cover.
3-38
Service Manual
5026
Printhead verification
You can verify that the printhead is the failing FRU by following this procedure:
1.
Turn the printer off, and remove the power cord from the outlet. Remove all cords and cables from the printer before beginning.
2.
Locate the printer on a corner of a work area so the front and back can be accessed.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic aids
3-39
5026
3.
Remove the rear frame cover.
a.
Loosen
the eight screws on the rear frame cover (A).
Note:
Do not remove the screws.
b.
Lift up on the rear frame cover to remove it from the back of the printer.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-40
Service Manual
5026
4.
Carefully unplug the printhead ribbon (B) and the mirror motor cables (C) from the system board, and carefully connect the printhead ribbon and mirror motor cables from the new printhead into the system board. It is important to position the laser in the printhead down into the packaging as shown.
Note:
Use the packaging that came with the printhead FRU to prop the printhead up.
Previous
Next
Go Back
5.
Connect the power cord to the outlet and to the printer. Reconnect any cords.
6.
Enter the Diagnostics menu (press and hold buttons 3 and 6, turn on the printer, and release the buttons when the progress bar displays.)
7.
Perform the Mirror Motor Test:
a.
Select PRINTHEAD TESTS.
b.
Select Mirror Motor Test.
The panel displays Motor Running.
At the end of the test, the panel displays either Pass or Fail.
•
If the test fails, replace the system board.
•
If the test passes, perform the Servo Laser Test in step 8.
8.
Perform the Servo Laser Test:
a.
Press or to go back to the PRINTHEAD TESTS menu.
b.
Select Servo Laser Test.
The panel displays Servo Laser Test—Motor Running….
At the end of the test, the panel displays either Pass or Fail.
•
If the test fails, replace the system board.
•
If the test passes, install the printhead FRU.
Diagnostic aids
3-41
5026
Paper Jams
Error jam locations
The following illustration shows the location and error codes generated for specific paper jams and the corresponding locations of these jams.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-42
Service Manual
5026
Clearing jams
Previous
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE
The fuser and the inside of the printer near the fuser may be hot. Wait for the fuser to cool before clearing jams from this area.
Next
By carefully selecting papers and specialty media (see
“Paper guidelines” on page 1-13
) and loading it properly, you should be able to avoid most jams. If jams do occur, follow the steps outlined below.
To resolve the jam messages, you must clear the entire paper path, and press or touch to clear the message and resume printing. The printer prints a new copy of the page that jammed if Jam Recovery is set to
On or Auto; however, the Auto setting does not guarantee the page will print.
Note:
Jam recovery is set to Auto by default. When jam recovery is set to Auto, the memory that holds the image of a page may be re-used after the page is printed but before it has successfully exited the printer if that memory is needed for another use. Therefore, a jammed page may or may not be reprinted, depending on the overall memory usage in the printer.
Avoiding jams
The following hints can help you avoid jams:
•
Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
For more information, refer to the Card Stock & Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site at
www.lexmark.com/publications
.
•
Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.
•
Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled paper.
•
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.
•
Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•
Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.
•
Store the paper in an appropriate environment.
•
Do not remove trays while the printer is printing. Wait for
Load tray <x> or Ready to appear before removing a tray.
•
Do not load the multipurpose tray while the printer is printing. Load the tray prior to printing, or wait for
Load
Multipurpose tray with <x> to appear.
•
Push all trays in firmly after loading paper.
•
Make sure the guides in the trays are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly against the paper.
•
Make sure all paper sizes and paper types are set correctly in the printer control panel menu.
•
Make sure all printer cables are attached correctly. For more information, refer to the setup documentation.
Go Back
Diagnostic aids
3-43
5026
200 paper jams
If paper jams behind the inner door, but not under the photoconductor units,
200.xx Paper jam appears.
Note:
To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door open longer than 10 minutes.
1.
Open the front door.
2.
Pull the jammed paper up and out to remove it from behind the toner cartridge area.
Note:
Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
Close the front door.
4.
Press or touch .
200 or 201 paper jam
If paper jams under the photoconductor units,
200.xx Paper jam or 201.xx Paper jam may appear.
1.
Open the front door.
Note:
To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door open longer than 10 minutes.
2.
Pull the paper forward if it is lodged under the photoconductor units.
Note:
You may need to remove the photoconductor units if the paper is lodged too tightly under them.
3-44
Service Manual
3.
Remove each photoconductor unit, and place it on a flat surface.
4.
Remove the jammed paper, and then replace each photoconductor unit.
5.
Close the front door.
6.
Press or touch .
201 paper jam
If paper is jammed under the fuser or the top cover,
201.xx Paper jam appears.
1.
Open the front door, and then open the top cover.
Warning: Potential Damage
: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door open longer than 10 minutes.
2.
Determine where the jam is located:
a.
If paper is visible under the fuser, grasp it on each side and pull it forward.
b.
If paper is not visible, turn the screws on the fuser unit to the left.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic aids
3-45
5026 c.
Lift the unit and pull to remove it.
d.
Remove the jammed paper.
e.
Replace the fuser unit, and then turn the screws to the right to fasten it securely.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
Close the top cover, and then close the front door.
4.
Press or touch .
202 paper jam
If paper is jammed both under the fuser unit and in the slot behind the fuser unit, 202.xx Paper jam appears.
1.
If the paper is visible in the standard exit bin, grasp the paper and pull it away from the bin.
2.
Open the front door, and then open the top cover.
3.
Grasp the paper on each side, and pull it forward.
3-46
Service Manual
If the paper is jammed behind the fuser, you will need to remove the fuser unit.
a.
Turn the screws on the fuser unit to the left.
b.
Lift the unit and pull to remove it.
c.
Pull the paper gently out of the printer or up toward the standard exit bin to remove it.
d.
Place the fuser unit back into the printer, and turn the screws to the right to fasten the fuser unit securely.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
4.
Close the top cover, and then close the front door.
5.
Press or touch .
Diagnostic aids
3-47
5026
203 paper jam
If paper is jammed under the rollers near the fuser, or in the standard exit bin
203.xx Paper jam appears.
1.
Grasp the paper that is visible in the standard exit bin, and pull it away from the bin.
Previous
Next
Go Back
2.
Open the front door, and then open the top cover.
3.
Grasp the paper on each side, and pull it out gently.
4.
Close the top cover, and then close the front door.
5.
Press or touch .
230 paper jam
If paper is jammed between the front door and tray 1,
230.xx Paper jam appears.
1.
Remove tray 1.
2.
Open the front door.
3.
Pull straight up to remove the jammed paper.
4.
Close the front door.
5.
Reinsert tray 1.
6.
Press or touch .
3-48
Service Manual
5026
240 paper jam
If paper is jammed in Tray 1,
241.xx Paper jam appears. If paper is jammed in any of the optional trays, 24x.xx
Paper jam appears.
•
If the jammed paper is located in tray 1, follow these steps to remove the paper from tray 1.
1.
Open tray 1, and pull the jammed pages straight up and out.
2.
If the jam is located in front of the tray, pull the jammed pages up and out.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
After removing the tray, the front door may need to be opened to access the jam.
4.
Close tray 1.
5.
Press or touch .
•
If the jammed pages are located in one of the optional trays, follow the appropriate steps below to remove the pages from an optional tray.
1.
Open the specified optional tray, and pull the jammed pages out as illustrated.
2.
After removing the tray, the tray above may need to be opened to access the jam.
3.
Close the specified optional tray.
4.
Press or touch .
Diagnostic aids
3-49
5026
250 paper jam
If paper is jammed in the multipurpose tray,
250.xx Paper jam appears.
1.
Press the paper release lever, and then remove the jammed pages from the multipurpose tray.
Previous
Next
Go Back
1
2
2.
Load new paper into the multipurpose tray.
3.
Press or touch .
3-50
Service Manual
Theory of operation
Paper path
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic aids
3-51
5026
Main Components
System board
The system board provides the intelligence of the printer. Command and control signals originate in the system card that make print media travel possible. The system card controls the timing of the print media during the printing so the media arrives at certain positions in the print process at certain times.
Paper tray
Houses the print media.
Paper pick mechanism
Picks the print media from the paper tray. The paper pick mechanism contains the paper pick (input) sensor and the multifunction transparency sensor.
Bump aligner roll
The bump aligner roll advances the print media onto the transfer belt and corrects any media skew as it comes out of the paper trays or MPF.
Transfer belt
The transfer rolls (located inside the transfer belt unit) are an integral part of the electrophotographic process, and the transfer belt advances the print media through the printer.
Fuser
The fuser bonds toner to the print media and advances the print media through the last portion of the paper path.
The paper exit sensor is also located in the fuser, and a flag is present on all fusers that activates the bin full sensors on network model printers.
Duplex
The duplex function is built into the front access door and uses a two-pass method for rerouting the paper down and back through the paper path for a second time. To accomplish the two-pass method, the paper is fed partially out of the printer and is then reversed back into the printer.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-52
Service Manual
5026
Print media transport
The print media is picked from the input source and fed to the bump aligner roll. The media movement is detected by a sensor located in the paper pick mechanism. It does not matter where the media comes from
(Tray 1, Tray 2, or, the MPF); it will enter the electrophotographic process at the bump aligner drive. The bump aligner motor drives the bump aligner roll which feeds the paper to the transfer belt.
500-sheet assembly pick tire
Bump aligner roll
Pick tire
Backup aligner roll
Previous
Next
Go Back
MPF pick tire
Diagnostic aids
3-53
5026
Once the paper is fed onto the transfer belt, the photoconductor drums in conjunction with the transfer belt pull the print media through the paper path.
Previous
Photoconductor drums
Next
Go Back
3-54
Service Manual
Transfer belt
5026
Once the print media exits the transfer belt, it enters the fuser where heat and pressure are applied to bond the toner permanently to the media. The fuser rollers continue to turn and pull the print media through the paper path until it reaches the exit drive roll. The exit drive roll pulls the print media from the fuser rollers and delivers it to the fuser output drive roll. Once the print media reaches the fuser output drive roll, the roller pushes the print media into the output bin.
Fuser output drive roll
Fuser exit drive roll
Paper exit flag
Fuser backup roll
Previous
Next
Go Back
Fuser exit idler roll
Fuser hot roll
Diagnostic aids
3-55
5026
If the page is to be duplexed, the fuser output drive roll continues to pull the media until it clears the paper exit flag and then reverses the rotation of the roller in order to pull the media back into the printer duplex assembly.
The media is then routed down through the duplex path until it reaches the bump aligner roll. Once in this position, it enters the EP path for the second time.
Fuser output drive roll
Previous
Next
Go Back
Paper exit flag
The paper exit flag serves two purposes. When it triggers the paper exit sensor, it serves as a one-way gate for the media when it is exiting the printer to the output bin and also serves as a one-way gate when the media is entering back into the printer for a duplex print. In other words, it diverts the print media's path, directing it to either the output bin or the duplex paper path.
3-56
Service Manual
5026
Mechanical drive
In order for the print media to move through the paper path, there are several drive motors that supply the mechanical power to the rollers discussed previously. The drives for these components are illustrated and discussed in the following paragraphs.
Paper pick mechanism drive
When printing from Tray 1 or Tray 2, the paper pick motor drives the paper pick gears which causes the pick roller to turn. During an MPF print, the paper pick motor drives the swing arm assembly for the MPF and causes the MPF paper pick roller to turn.
Previous
Next
Go Back
MPF paper pick
Swing arm bracket
(C52x)
MPF swing arm assembly
Paper pick mechanism gears
Paper pick motor
Paper pick mechanism
Paper tray and paper pick mechanism shown from rear with components removed for clarity
Diagnostic aids
3-57
5026
Bump aligner drive
The power to turn the bump aligner roll is supplied from the bump aligner motor. The motor drives a set of bump aligner gears which causes the bump aligner roll to turn.
Bump aligner roll Bump aligner gears
Bump aligner gears
Previous
Next
Go Back
Bump aligner motor
Note:
If this motor is stalling or causing waste toner box full messages, the vertical auger mechanism might be causing the problem.
3-58
Service Manual
5026
Photoconductor unit/toner cartridge drive
The photoconductor units (four) and toner cartridges (four) receive drive power from the EP drive assembly motors. The top cartridge motor 1 on the EP drive assembly provides drive to the top two photoconductor units and toner cartridges (yellow and cyan). Likewise, the bottom cartridge motor 2 drives the two bottom photoconductor units and toner cartridges. When the printer's top access door is open, the couplers for the toner cartridges and photoconductor units disengage.
Outside
Previous
Next
Go Back
Fuser motor
Cartridge motor 1
Cartridge motor 2 (upper)
Cartridge motor 2 (lower)
Photoconductor couplers
Inside
Toner cartridge couplers
Diagnostic aids
3-59
5026
Transfer belt drive
The transfer belt unit receives drive from a motor located on the EP drive assembly. When the top access door is open, the coupler for the transfer belt disengages.
Outside
Inside
Previous
Next
Go Back
Transfer belt motor
Coupler
Fuser drive
The fuser drive (motor) is built into the fuser assembly and drives the fuser rollers to turn.
3-60
Service Manual
5026
Duplex drive
The duplex drive is driven by the MPF/duplex motor through the MPF/duplex gear. Drive is provided to three drive shafts in the duplex unit by a belt that is driven by the MPF/duplex motor. The drive shafts move the print media through the duplex unit during printing.
Paper sensing
Sensors are strategically placed in the printer to ensure that the print media is making it to specific points within a given time in the electrophotographic process. There are two paper flags: one at the bottom of the machine
(paper pick) to detect input paper, including duplex second side, from all sources and one at the top (paper exit) to detect paper movement beyond the fuser. The flags are similar in design, in that a mechanical arm is moved by the media to interrupt an optical sensor; both are normally blocked when no media is present. There is also a multifunction transparency sensor that detects if: 1) tray 1 is present, 2) narrow media is being used, and 3) the media is a transparency. The sensor works for tray 1, tray 2 (500-sheet option), and the MPF.
Paper pick sensor
Paper pick mechanism
Previous
Next
Go Back
Narrow media sensor
Input sensor
Diagnostic aids
3-61
5026
Paper exit/duplex entry sensor and bin full flag
The paper exit/duplex sensor flag detects movement in two directions: as the paper exits the fuser and as it is retracted from the exit tray back into the duplex path. Each sheet must be driven past the fuser exit flag and allowed to fall before being turned around and starting the duplex path. If the print media activates the paper exit flag for too long, or the print media doesn't reach the paper exit flag within a given time, a paper jam error will be posted.
Paper exit/duplex entry flag
Paper exit/duplex entry sensor
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-62
Service Manual
Electrophotographic (EP) process
Main components
High voltage power supply
Developer (toner) cartridge
Transfer belt
Fuser
Printhead
System board
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Photoconductor belt
System board
The system board is the brain of the printer. During the print process, an image is sent from a computer to the system board. The raster image processor (RIP) portion of the system card converts the data into a raster image and feeds this data along with control information to the printhead.
Diagnostic aids
3-63
5026
High voltage power supply (HVPS)
Provides a high voltage charge to:
•
The charge roll located in the photoconductor unit
•
The photoconductor drum located in the photoconductor unit
•
The toner adder roller (TAR) located in the toner cartridge
•
The developer roll located in the toner cartridge
•
The doctor blade located in the toner cartridge
•
The four transfer rolls located in the transfer belt
Printhead assembly
The printhead receives control and image data from the system card (RIP). Through the use of a laser unit, the printhead irradiates the photoconductor drum with light and creates an invisible image called a latent or electrostatic image.
Photoconductor unit
The photoconductor unit consists primarily of a charge roll and the photoconductor drum. The charge roll charges the surface of the photoconductor drum to prepare it for the latent image “drawn” by the laser. Once the photoconductor drum has been written to by the laser, it is responsible for picking up toner from the cartridge developer roller and then transferring the image to the print media.
Toner cartridge
This unit consists primarily of the developer roll and the toner adder roll. The primary function of this unit is to supply charge toner to the photoconductor unit for transfer onto the print media. The toner adheres to the electrostatic image on the surface of the photoconductor drum which is then transferred to the print media.
Fuser
The fuser assembly uses heat and pressure to fuse the toner image onto the print media.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-64
Service Manual
5026
Charging
The primary component of the charging process is the high voltage power supply. The following provides information that covers the mechanical transfer of the high voltage through a set of springs to each subcomponent of the charging process.
Photoconductor unit (charge roll)
The following illustration shows the circuit path that allows high voltage current to flow from the HVPS to the charge roll contact on the photoconductor unit. It is essential that the contact springs are properly touching to provide a good flow. If not, print quality problems will occur.
Previous
Next
Go Back
High voltage power supply
High voltage contact path
Photoconductor unit (photoconductor drum)
The following illustration shows the circuit path that allows high voltage current to flow from the HVPS to the photoconductor drum contact on the photoconductor unit. It is essential that the contact springs are properly touching to provide a good flow. If not, print quality problems will occur.
High voltage power supply
High voltage contact path
Diagnostic aids
3-65
5026
Toner cartridge
The following illustration shows the circuit path that allows high voltage current to flow from the HVPS to the toner cartridge. The toner cartridge contains three parts that are provided high voltage from the HVPS. These three parts are: the doctor blade, the developer roll, and the toner adder roll (TAR). It is essential that the contact springs are properly touching to provide a good flow. If not, print quality problems will occur.
High voltage power supply
Cleaner blade high voltage contact path
Previous
Next
Go Back
Toner add roll high voltage contact path
Developer roll high voltage contact path
3-66
Service Manual
5026
Transfer belt
The transfer belt houses four transfer rollers that provide image transfer from the photoconductor drum to the print media. The transfer belt receives its high voltage charge through spring contacts located on the transfer contact assembly as shown in the following illustration. For the sake of simplicity, only one of the roller's high voltage paths is shown. This path is typical for the other three rollers as well.
Transfer belt high voltage path
Previous
Next
Go Back
Diagnostic aids
3-67
5026
Exposing
The main components in the exposure process are the system card, the printhead and the photoconductor unit.
The following illustration depicts a typical data path for a single color exposure.
Data is received from a computer into a port on the system card. The system card's RIP function converts this data into raster information which is fed to the printhead along with other control data. The data is converted by the printhead laser into light energy data that is directed to the light sensitive photoconductor unit.
Printhead
System card
Previous
Next
Go Back
Photoconductor unit
3-68
Service Manual
5026
Developing
The two primary components of the developing process are the photoconductor unit and the toner cartridge. The toner cartridge contains a toner adder roll, developer roll and toner. Toner is advanced toward the toner adder roll by three paddle assemblies. The advanced toner clings to the electrically charged toner adder roll. The toner on the toner adder roll is then electrically attracted to the developer roll because of the difference in electrical charge between the toner adder roll and the developer roll. The toner uniformly coats the developer roll with help from the doctor blade and is introduced to the electrostatic image on the photoconductor drum. The toner then transfers to the photoconductor drum.
Photoconductor unit
Developer cartridge
Previous
Next
Go Back
Photoconductor drum
Developer roll
Toner add roll
(TAR)
Paddles
Diagnostic aids
3-69
5026
Transferring
After the toner is attracted to the photoconductor drum, the image is ready for transfer onto the print media. The print media is advanced in the paper path onto the transfer belt and is carried along the belt underneath each photoconductor unit. The charged transfer roll(s) located inside the transfer belt pulls the image from the photoconductor drum to the print media. This is a direct transfer method.
The main function of the transfer belt is to provide transport for the print media. Toner is not transferred directly to the belt during the print process.
Photoconductor unit
Previous
Next
Go Back
Photoconductor drum
Transfer roll
3-70
Service Manual
5026
Fusing
After the image has been transferred onto the print media, it is ready for fusing. The print media is transported into the fuser where the hot roll and backup roll use a combination of high heat and pressure to melt and press the toner to the media.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Backup roll
Hot roll
Diagnostic aids
3-71
5026
Cleaning
The transfer belt and photoconductor drum are cleaned at the end of the electrophotographic process cycle. The transfer belt surface is cleaned as it rotates past a cleaning blade and shaft located inside the transfer belt assembly. Any waste toner that is scraped off of the belt is collected in the waste toner container located next to the belt inside the transfer belt unit.
The photoconductor drum is cleaned by the cleaning blade.
Photoconductor drum cleaning blade
Previous
Next
Go Back
Transfer belt cleaning blade
Transfer belt waste toner container
Transfer belt cleaning shaft
3-72
Service Manual
5026
Electrical interlock
5 V interlock switch
An interlock switch (A) triggered by the front access door disables the +5 V output to the printhead which turns off the laser.
Previous
Next
Go Back
24 V interlock switch
The 24 V interlock switch is located at the front-right side of the machine when you open the front door. Opening the front door disengages the 24 V interlock switch and cuts the 24 V supply to the system board, HVPS, motors, and fuser. Closing the front door triggers a switch that initializes the motor.
Gearbox shield removed
24V interlock switch
When the 24 V switch opens, the normally open side of the switch is activated which signals the system board to disable a +24 V power supply output, turning off all high voltage supplies, the bump/align motor, the duplex motor and the fuser motor for safety considerations.
Warning:
Never poke or force cover the switch while fixing the machine. This can harm the person and machine.
Diagnostic aids
3-73
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
3-74
Service Manual
5026
4. Repair information
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY:
The printer weight is greater than 54 lbs (24.5kg), and requires two or more trained personnel to lift safety.
Previous
Next
Safety information
•
The safety of this product is based on testing and approvals of the original design and specific components. The manufacturer is not responsible for safety in the event of use of unauthorized replacement parts.
•
The maintenance information for this product has been prepared for use by a professional service person and is not intended to be used by others.
•
CAUTION:
When you see this symbol, there is a danger from hazardous voltage in the area of the product where you are working. Unplug the product before you begin, or use caution if the product must receive power in order to perform the task.
Go Back
Data Security Notice
This printer contains various types of memory that are capable of storing device and network settings, information from embedded solutions, and user data. The types of memory-along with the types of data stored by each-are described below.
•
Volatile memory
—This device utilizes standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy jobs.
•
Non-volatile memory
—This device may utilize two forms of non-volatile memory: EEPROM and NAND
(flash memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information, scanner and bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
•
Hard disk memory
—Some devices have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality and cannot be used for long term storage for data that is not print-related. The hard disk does not provide the capability for users to extract information, create folders, create disk or network file shares, or FTP information directly from a client device. The hard disk can retain buffered user data from complex scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
To erase volatile memory, turn off the printer.
To erase non volatile memory see
“Configuration menu (CONFIG MENU)” on page 3-27
item pertaining to this.
To erase the printer hard disk see
“Configuration menu (CONFIG MENU)” on page 3-27
item pertaining to this.
The printer operator panel and RIP/controller board contain NVRAM. After removing the old part the part must be returned to your second level support.
Repair information
4-1
5026
Handling ESD-sensitive parts
Warning:
Read the following before handling electronic parts.
Many electronic products use parts that are known to be sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). To prevent damage to ESD-sensitive parts, follow the instructions below in addition to all the usual precautions, such as turning off power before removing electronic cards:
•
Keep the ESD-sensitive part in its original shipping container (a special “ESD bag”) until you are ready to install the part in the printer.
•
Make the fewest possible movements with your body to prevent an increase of static electricity from clothing fibers, carpets, and furniture.
•
Put the ESD wrist strap on your wrist. Connect the wrist band to the system ground point. This discharges any static electricity in your body to the printer.
•
Hold the ESD-sensitive part by its edge connector shroud (cover); do not touch its pins.
•
If you need to put down the ESD-sensitive part for any reason, first put it into its special bag.
•
Printer covers and metal tables are electrical grounds. They increase the risk of damage, because they make a discharge path from your body through the ESD-sensitive part. (Large metal objects can be discharge paths without being grounded.)
•
Prevent ESD-sensitive parts from being accidentally touched by other personnel. Install printer covers when you are not working on the printer, and do not put unprotected ESD-sensitive parts on a table.
•
If possible, keep all ESD-sensitive parts in a grounded metal cabinet (case).
•
Be extra careful in working with ESD-sensitive parts when cold-weather heating is used, because low humidity increases static electricity.
Handing the photoconductor unit
The following precautions must be observed when handling the photoconductor unit. The photoconductor unit is a supply item you will have to remove during some of the repair procedures:
Transportation/storage
Use the specified carton whenever moving or storing the photoconductor unit.
Handling
•
The optical photoconductor roller in the photoconductor unit exhibits the greatest light fatigue after being exposed to strong light over an extended period of time. Never expose it to direct sunlight. Cover the photoconductor unit when you remove it from the printer.
•
Use care not to contaminate the surface of the optical photoconductor roller with an oil-based solvent, fingerprints, and other foreign matter.
•
Do not scratch the surface of the optical photoconductor roller.
Parts not to be touched
Any part where the mounting screws are used to meet a printer alignment set at the factory must not be removed, disassembled, or adjusted.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-2
Service Manual
5026
Screw and retainer identification table
The following table contains screw types and retainers, locations, and quantities necessary to service the printer. Pay careful attention to each screw type location when doing removals. You must install the correct screw type in each location during reassembly.
Sizes are as close to actual as possible, as long as the printout is not scaled or resized.
Screw identification table
P/N Screw type
10B1580 #6 panhead
Location
Cartridge cooling fan to top cover
Cooling fan to top cover
Qty
2
2
Previous
Next
Go Back
1126828 E-clip M3
1126829 E-ring M4
LR overcenter bell crank to side frame
MP feeder gears to right side frame studs
1
2
18B0832 Taptite M3 L6 panhead
5 V interlock switch to right frame
Card support plate to upper plate
Card support plate to lower plate
Card support plate (and printhead ground) to left frame
Card support plate to right frame
Cartridge left guide assembly to left plate (interior side of plate assembly)
COD (color-on-demand) drive assembly to upper plate
COD shaft assembly to upper plate
Contacts assembly to left frame next to auger worm gear
Contacts assembly to left frame near duct
EP drive to right plate (exterior side)
Front door ground wire to right frame bracket
HVPS to left frame plate
3
2
4
4
3
5
1
2
8
1
2
2
1
Repair information
4-3
5026
Screw identification table (continued)
P/N
18B0832
(Cont.)
18B0939
Screw type
Taptite M3 L6 panhead
Plastite M3x6 flathead
Location
Laser support plate to lower plate
Left camshaft lock assembly to printer frame
Left frame assembly to laser support plate
Left frame assembly to lower plate
Lower plate to left frame assembly
LVPS support plate to right plate
LVPS to right frame plate and support bracket
Motor driver card to EP drive assembly
MPF driver cover to right frame
Right camshaft lock assembly to printer frame
Right frame assembly to laser support plate
Right frame assembly to lower plate
System board to RIP plate
Top cover assembly to printer frame
Upper plate to right frame assembly
Upper plate to left frame assembly
Upper plate to laser support plate
Gearbox plate assembly to frame
18B2302 Machine M2.6
L3-3.5
MP feeder/duplex drive motor to rightside plate
18B2315 Machine M3 panhead L35
Printhead
2
1
Previous
Qty
3
3
9
5
3
4
2
3
3
2
5
2
2
4
2
4
2
2
Next
Go Back
27S2836 Taptite M3 L6 panhead, black
Left cover to printer frame (next to system board)
Rear cover frame to frame
Rear left cover to printer frame
Rear right cover to printer frame
Right cover to printer frame
4-4
Service Manual
1
8
1
1
4
Screw identification table (continued)
P/N Screw type
27S2837 M3.5X1.34 panhead
8L, black
Location
Left cover to lower frame
Rear left cover through lower swingout frame into left cover
Rear right cover to rear upper cover
Rear upper cover to top cover
Top cover to right cover
27S2838 Machine M3X0.5–
6GL
27S2839 Taptite M3 L6
Taptite slotted hex black
Contacts assembly to left/front edge of printer frame
Fax modem blank plate to left plate
ISP blank plate to left plate
Second USB connector to left frame
System board USB connector to frame
USB-A Blank plate to left plate
Rear cover frame to frame
88A0003 Machine M3X0.5-
6G 8L
Printhead
88A0095 M2.5x10 Machine 5 V interlock switch actuator assembly
24 V interlock switch and shield to right frame
88A0212 Taptite M3.5x0.6
PAN
Fuser AC cable's ground wire to left plate
3
88A0232 Taptite M3 L6
PANHD
88A0233 Taptite M3 L8
PANHD
Cartridge right guide assembly to rightside plate
Lower plate to lower swingout frame assembly
Lower swingout frame assembly to left frame assembly
Lower frame support to right frame assembly
Lower swingout frame assembly to leftside frame assembly (rearmost position)
10
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
5026
Previous
Qty
1
1
2
1
1
1
8
1
1
2
1
2
Next
Go Back
Repair information
4-5
5026
Screw identification table (continued)
P/N Screw type
88A0293 Plastite M2.2 L5
Location
Contact spring cap to left guide assembly
88A0312
88A0313
88A0323 M3.5X1.34 Panhead
8L
88A0324
Plastite M2.9 L6
PAN
Plastite M2.9 L8
PAN
M3.5X1.34 PANHD
10L
Backup springs to reference edge plate assembly
Cartridge cooling fan duct to top cover
Cartridge left guide assembly to leftside plate assembly (exterior side of plate assembly)
Cover mount to rightside plate
Display detent spring to display back bezel
Door straps to front access door cover
Door bracket to front access door cover
Duplex entry guide to front access door cover
Exterior screws attaching cover bracket to front access door cover
Front cover bracket to front access door cover
Ground terminal/operator panel card to top access door cover CBM
Lower frame support to lower left frame assembly
Operator panel card to top access door cover CBM
Option locator to rightside plate
Contacts assembly to leftside cartridge guide
Cover bracket to front access door cover
Cover pivot to swingout frame
HVPS to transfer contact assembly
HVPS to leftside cartridge guide assembly
Interior screws attaching cover bracket to front access door cover
Duplex upper guide to top access door cover CBM
Ground strap/contact to front door frame
Lower right frame to right side plate
Pick assembly to lower plate
Secures reference edge assembly to door assembly
Static brush bracket to top access door cover CBM
Torque tube cover to front door frame
EP drive to rightside plate
Secures door cap to door assembly
2
2
4
2
1
3
4
9
1
2
2
6
2
1
3
3
1
2
3
1
1
2
2
4
2
4
3
1
2
Qty
4
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-6
Service Manual
Screw identification table (continued)
P/N Screw type
88A0412 M2.9x5.2 Plastite
Location
GS COD bell cranks to guide
NGS COD bell cranks to guide
Top access door assembly to fuser retract link
Top cover left link to cover
5026
Previous
Qty
1
1
3
3
Next
Go Back
Repair information
4-7
5026
Adjustments
Printhead alignment
Overview
When aligning the printhead, it is important to keep in mind that the printhead mounting screws should be initially loose enough to just hold the printhead in the printer. This allows the pages to be printed that will be used to align the black plane to the printer frame and also allows skew adjustment with the printhead alignment screw.
Once the black skew is adjusted, the mounting screws are fully tightened.
There is one printhead that houses the four color planes. The black plane is aligned to the printer, and the color planes are internally aligned to black. Electrical alignment is done to fine tune the alignment of the color planes to the black plane once the printhead is installed and skew is adjusted.
The first step in aligning the printhead is to loosen the printhead mounting screws, and to set the skew for black.
Note:
If you need to replace the printhead, see
“Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-145
Printhead mechanical alignment (C746)
Skew (black)
1.
Turn off the printer.
2.
Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3.
Remove the transfer module and photoconductor units:
a.
Disconnect the transfer module cable (A).
b.
Press the two tabs (B) to release the front access cover assembly.
c.
Press the two tabs (C) on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module.
Note:
Leave the photoconductor units on the transport belt when removing.
To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum, place the transfer module with the photoconductor units on a clean surface. Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a prolonged period of time. You can place a clean, dry cloth over the transfer module and photoconductor units until they are required.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
4-8
Service Manual
B C
4.
Loosen the printhead mounting screws in the following order: D1, D2, and D3.
D1
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
D2
D3
5.
Remove the printhead alignment screw cover (E).
E
6.
Reinstall the transfer module with the photoconductor units still attached.
7.
Reconnect the transfer module cable.
8.
Replace the toner cartridges.
9.
Close the top access door.
10.
Close the front access door.
11.
Plug the electrical cord into the printer.
12.
Plug the electrical cord into the outlet.
Repair information
4-9
5026
13.
Align the printhead skew for black.
a.
Enter the Diagnostic menu (turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, turn on the printer, and release the buttons when the clock graphic displays).
b.
Select REGISTRATION from the DIAGNOSTICS menu, and select Settings.
c.
Select Skew, and press .
d.
Use or to set the Skew to zero, and press .
e.
Scroll down to Quick Test, and press . A page similar to this one prints:
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-10
Service Manual
f.
Adjust the printhead alignment screw (G) to change the skew and straighten the image on the printout.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
G
If the top right alignment marks are lower than the top left alignment marks, rotate the alignment screw counterclockwise a full revolution, and print the Quick Test page. Repeat adjusting the screw and printing the Quick Test until the top alignment marks are the same distance from the top of the media.
Note:
One rotation of the printhead alignment screw equals approximately 0.5 millimeter movement of the top edge print alignment marks.
g.
When the top right and top left alignment marks are both showing and are even on the page, the skew is aligned.
Straight Skewed
Repair information
4-11
5026
14.
Tighten the printhead mounting screws.
a.
Turn off the printer.
b.
Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet.
c.
Disconnect the transfer module cable.
d.
Press the two tabs on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module with the photoconductor units in place.
e.
Remove all of the toner cartridges.
f.
Tighten the printhead mounting screws in the following order: H1, H2, and H3.
H1
Previous
Next
Go Back
H2
H3
15.
Replace the printhead alignment screw cover.
16.
Replace the toner cartridges.
17.
Reinstall the transfer module and the photoconductor units.
18.
Connect the transfer module cable.
4-12
Service Manual
5026
Registration (black)
Top Margin
1.
Reconnect the power cord to the electrical outlet, but do not turn on the printer yet.
2.
Enter Diagnostic mode (press and hold buttons 3 and 6, turn on the printer, and release the buttons when the clock graphic displays).
3.
Select REGISTRATION, and press .
4.
Select Quick Test, and press or use the last Quick Test you used to adjust skew.
Previous
Next
Go Back
5.
Select Top Margin, and press
.
6.
Adjust the values until both top alignment marks are on the top edge of the print.
•
Increasing the value ( ) moves the top alignment marks down on the page.
•
Decreasing the value ( ) moves the top alignment marks up on the page.
7.
Press to save the value.
8.
Print the Quick Test page, and check the top alignment marks. Repeat adjustment of the top margin and printing of the Quick Test page until top margin is set.
Bottom Margin
1.
Select Bottom Margin, and press .
2.
Adjust the bottom margin until the points of the bottom margin alignment marks are visible and touching the edge of the paper.
•
Increasing the value ( ) moves the bottom alignment marks up on the page.
•
Decreasing the value ( ) moves the bottom alignment marks down on the page.
3.
Press to save the value.
4.
Print the Quick Test page, and repeat this process until the bottom margin is adjusted.
Repair information
4-13
5026
Left Margin
1.
Select Left Margin, and press .
2.
Adjust the left margin until the points of the left alignment marks touch the edge of the page.
•
Increasing the value ( ) moves the left alignment marks away from the edge of the page.
•
Decreasing the value ( ) moves the left alignment marks toward the edge of the page.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
Press to save the value.
4.
Print the Quick Test page, and check the left alignment marks each time until you are satisfied.
Right Margin
1.
Select Right Margin, and press .
2.
Adjust the right margin until the points of the left alignment marks touch the edge of the page.
•
Increasing the value ( ) moves the right alignment marks away from the edge of the page.
•
Decreasing the value ( ) moves the right alignment marks toward the edge of the page.
3.
Press to save the value.
4.
Print the Quick Test page, and check the results. Repeat if necessary.
5.
When the registration is complete, proceed to the color alignment.
Alignment (cyan, yellow, and magenta)
1.
Press until you reach the top menu.
2.
Select ALIGNMENT MENU, and press .
3.
Select Cyan, and press .
4.
Select Top Margin, and press .
5.
Use
Top Margin
to zero, and press to save the value.
6.
Do the same for Left Margin, Right Margin, Bottom Margin, Skew, and Bow.
It is important to set all the values to zero before starting.
4-14
Service Manual
5026
7.
Select Quick Test in the Cyan menu, and press .
Two pages print. You may have to print these pages several times until you get T (Top Margin) and
Z (Skew) aligned. Do not go to step 2 until T and Z are aligned. The first page is similar to the following:
Previous
Next
Go Back
R e p a ir in fo rm a tio n
4-15
5026
8.
Determine the line under Fine Adjustment that is closest. If the value is beyond the Fine Adjustment scale, use either of the Coarse Adjustment scales.
Previous
Next
Go Back
9.
Enter the number determined from the Fine Adjustment scale or the Coarse Adjustment scales on the part of the page for the “T” value. The current value is automatically entered on the sheet. At this point, it should be zero.
-18 -18
10.
Enter the “New Cyan T value” on the operator panel using the left and right arrows, and press to save the value.
11.
Reprint the Quick Test, and evaluate whether you are at zero changes.
4-16
Service Manual
5026
12.
Repeat this process for skew (Z). Don't forget to subtract the T value and add the current cyan Z value to obtain the new skew (Z) value.
An example is shown below:
Previous
-18 -18 -18 -14 +4
Next
Go Back
13.
Continue to follow the directions on the bottom of the first page to find the Cyan Top Margin (T), the
Skew (Z), and on the second page of the Quick Test page, the Left Margin (L), Right Margin (R), and
Bow (P).
14.
Repeat steps 1 through 13 for yellow and magenta.
Note:
Start each color group by setting the Top Margin, Left Margin, Right Margin, Bottom Margin, Skew, and Bow to zero.
Repair information
4-17
5026
Printhead mechanical alignment (C748)
Skew (black)
1.
Turn off the printer.
2.
Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3.
Remove the transfer module and photoconductor units:
a.
Disconnect the transfer module cable (A).
b.
Press the two tabs (B) to release the front access cover assembly.
c.
Press the two tabs (C) on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module.
Note:
Leave the photoconductor units on the transport belt when removing.
To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum, place the transfer module with the photoconductor units on a clean surface. Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a prolonged period of time. You can place a clean, dry cloth over the transfer module and photoconductor units until they are required.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
B C
4.
Loosen the printhead mounting screws in the following order: D1, D2, and D3.
D1
4-18
Service Manual
D2
D3
5.
Remove the printhead alignment screw cover (E).
E
6.
Reinstall the transfer module with the photoconductor units still attached.
7.
Reconnect the transfer module cable.
8.
Replace the toner cartridges.
9.
Close the top access door.
10.
Close the front access door.
11.
Plug the electrical cord into the printer.
12.
Plug the electrical cord into the outlet.
13.
Align the printhead skew for black.
a.
Enter the Diagnostic menu (turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, turn on the printer, and release the buttons when the clock graphic displays).
b.
Touch REGISTRATION from the DIAGNOSTICS menu, and then touch Settings.
c.
Touch Skew.
d.
Set the Skew to zero.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Repair information
4-19
5026 e.
Scroll down and touch Quick Test. A page similar to this one prints:
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-20
Service Manual
f.
Adjust the printhead alignment screw (G) to change the skew and straighten the image on the printout.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
G
If the top right alignment marks are lower than the top left alignment marks, rotate the alignment screw counterclockwise a full revolution, and print the Quick Test page. Repeat adjusting the screw and printing the Quick Test until the top alignment marks are the same distance from the top of the media.
Note:
One rotation of the printhead alignment screw equals approximately 0.5 millimeter movement of the top edge print alignment marks.
g.
When the top right and top left alignment marks are both showing and are even on the page, the skew is aligned.
Straight Skewed
Repair information
4-21
5026
14.
Tighten the printhead mounting screws.
a.
Turn off the printer.
b.
Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet.
c.
Disconnect the transfer module cable.
d.
Press the two tabs on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module with the photoconductor units in place.
e.
Remove all of the toner cartridges.
f.
Tighten the printhead mounting screws in the following order: H1, H2, and H3.
H1
Previous
Next
Go Back
H2
H3
15.
Replace the printhead alignment screw cover.
16.
Replace the toner cartridges.
17.
Reinstall the transfer module and the photoconductor units.
18.
Connect the transfer module cable.
4-22
Service Manual
5026
Registration (black)
Top Margin
1.
Reconnect the power cord to the electrical outlet, but do not turn on the printer yet.
2.
Enter Diagnostic mode (press and hold buttons 3 and 6, turn on the printer, and release the buttons when the clock graphic displays).
3.
Touch REGISTRATION.
4.
Touch Quick Test or use the last Quick Test you used to adjust skew.
Previous
Next
Go Back
5.
Touch Top Margin.
6.
Adjust the values until both top alignment marks are on the top edge of the print.
•
Increasing the value (+) moves the top alignment marks down on the page.
•
Decreasing the value (-) moves the top alignment marks up on the page.
7.
Touch to save the value.
8.
Print the Quick Test page, and check the top alignment marks. Repeat adjustment of the top margin and printing of the Quick Test page until top margin is set.
Bottom Margin
1.
Touch Bottom Margin.
2.
Adjust the bottom margin until the points of the bottom margin alignment marks are visible and touching the edge of the paper.
•
Increasing the value (+) moves the bottom alignment marks up on the page.
•
Decreasing the value (-) moves the bottom alignment marks down on the page.
3.
Touch to save the value.
4.
Print the Quick Test page, and repeat this process until the bottom margin is adjusted.
Repair information
4-23
5026
Left Margin
1.
Touch Left Margin.
2.
Adjust the left margin until the points of the left alignment marks touch the edge of the page.
•
Increasing the value (+) moves the left alignment marks away from the edge of the page.
•
Decreasing the value (-) moves the left alignment marks toward the edge of the page.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
Touch to save the value.
4.
Print the Quick Test page, and check the left alignment marks each time until you are satisfied.
Right Margin
1.
Touch Right Margin.
1.
Adjust the right margin until the points of the left alignment marks touch the edge of the page.
•
Increasing the value (+) moves the right alignment marks away from the edge of the page.
•
Decreasing the value (-) moves the right alignment marks toward the edge of the page.
2.
Touch
to save the value.
3.
Print the Quick Test page, and check the results. Repeat if necessary.
4.
When the registration is complete, proceed to the color alignment.
Alignment (cyan, yellow, and magenta)
1.
Touch Back until you reach the top menu.
2.
Touch ALIGNMENT MENU.
3.
Touch Cyan.
4.
Touch Top Margin.
5.
Use + and - to set the Top Margin to zero, and then touch to save the value.
6.
Do the same for Left Margin, Right Margin, Bottom Margin, Skew, and Bow.
It is important to set all the values to zero before starting.
4-24
Service Manual
5026
7.
Touch Quick Test in the Cyan menu.
Two pages print. You may have to print these pages several times until you get T (Top Margin) and
Z (Skew) aligned. Do not go to step 2 until T and Z are aligned. The first page is similar to the following:
Previous
Next
Go Back
Repair information
4-25
5026
8.
Determine the line under Fine Adjustment that is closest. If the value is beyond the Fine Adjustment scale, use either of the Coarse Adjustment scales.
Previous
Next
Go Back
9.
Enter the number determined from the Fine Adjustment scale or the Coarse Adjustment scales on the part of the page for the “T” value. The current value is automatically entered on the sheet. At this point, it should be zero.
-18 -18
10.
Enter the “New Cyan T value” on the operator panel and touch to save the value.
11.
Reprint the Quick Test, and evaluate whether you are at zero changes.
4-26
Service Manual
5026
12.
Repeat this process for skew (Z). Don't forget to subtract the T value and add the current cyan Z value to obtain the new skew (Z) value.
An example is shown below:
Previous
-18 -18 -18 -14 +4
Next
Go Back
13.
Continue to follow the directions on the bottom of the first page to find the Cyan Top Margin (T), the
Skew (Z), and on the second page of the Quick Test page, the Left Margin (L), Right Margin (R), and
Bow (P).
14.
Repeat steps 1 through 13 for yellow and magenta.
Note:
Start each color group by setting the Top Margin, Left Margin, Right Margin, Bottom Margin, Skew, and
Bow to zero.
Repair information
4-27
5026
Printer removal procedures
Precautions to take before maintenance work
Do not implement any operation, removal, or modification and so on, which is not presented in this manual.
1.
Turn the printer power off and unplug the power cable from the outlet prior to starting removals or checks.
2.
Prior to starting any repairs, read and understand the warnings in this manual.
•
High temperature
•
High voltage
•
Laser radiation
3.
Confirm the direction of all parts and screw lengths during removal/replacement.
4.
Utilize the proper cleaning procedures/solvents during maintenance.
5.
Confirm that all parts and covers are properly installed and assembled prior to starting the print test.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-28
Service Manual
5026
Previous
Cover removals
Front access cover assembly removal
See Front access door cover assembly for the part number for the models you need on
1.
Remove the paper tray.
2.
Disconnect the transfer module cable (A).
3.
Press the two tabs (B) to release the front access door cover assembly.
4.
Press the two tabs (C) on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module.
Note:
Leave the photoconductor units on the transport belt when removing.
Warning:
To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum, hold the photoconductor units by their handle and place the photoconductor units on a clean surface. Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a prolonged period of time. See
“Handing the photoconductor unit” on page 4-2
information.
Next
Go Back
A
B C
Repair information
4-29
5026
5.
Looking down at the keyed end of the restraint (D), twist the end clockwise, slide the restraint upward through the slit (E), and slip the end of the restraint through the keyed hole (F). Repeat for the other side.
Previous
Next
Go Back
D F E
4-30
Service Manual
6.
Close the front access door assembly.
7.
Remove the two screws (G) that attach the pivot pin to the front access door cover assembly.
8.
Remove the bracket (H).
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
G H
9.
Remove the front access cover assembly.
Left cover removal
See
for the part number.
1.
Remove the paper tray.
2.
Remove the waste toner assembly. See
“Waste toner assembly removal” on page 4-176
.
3.
Open the front access door.
4.
Open the top access door.
5.
Remove the two screws (A) on the bottom and one screw higher up (B).
6.
Press the locking tab (C).
B A
C
Repair information
4-31
5026
7.
Remove the screws (D) from the rear left cover.
8.
Unsnap the right cover from the top cover, then lift and remove the left cover and rear left cover together.
Note:
Because the paper tray dust cover is loose at this point, set it aside.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Note:
If you are removing the left cover to access another part, leave the left cover and the rear left cover attached, and you are done. If you need to replace the left cover FRU, continue with the next step to remove the separate rear left cover FRU.
4-32
Service Manual
5026
9.
Separate the left cover and rear left cover by sliding the left rear cover as shown to disengage the latch (E).
Previous
Next
Go Back
Repair information
4-33
5026
Operator panel assembly removal (C746)
See operator panel assembly with card on
for the part number.
Warning:
This part might contain customer confidential information. See
“Data Security Notice” on page 4-1
for more details. After removing this part, return it to your next level of support so any data can be removed. If the customer requests to keep the part, they must sign a confirmation of memory device retention form.
Warning:
When replacing any one of the following components:
•
Operator panel assembly
•
System board
•
Top access cover assembly
Only replace one component at a time. Replace the required component, and perform a POR before replacing a second component listed above. If this procedure is not followed, the printer will be rendered inoperable.
1.
Remove the top access cover assembly. See
“Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-54
.
2.
Turn the top access cover assembly over.
3.
Remove the eight screws (A) securing the position guide cover.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
4-34
Service Manual
4.
Pull open the UICC connector and disconnect the UICC cable.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Installation note:
Make sure the contact pins on the cable are facing up when reconnecting the operator panel cable to the connector.
5.
Flip open the LCD connector and disconnect the LCD cable.
Repair information
4-35
5026
6.
Remove the six screws (B) securing the operator panel card, then remove the operator panel card.
Previous
Next
Go Back
B
7.
Remove the three screws (C) securing the LCD bracket, then remove the LCD bracket.
C
8.
Remove the operator panel LCD together with the LCD protector.
4-36
Service Manual
9.
Remove the operator panel LCD from the LCD protector.
Note:
The operator panel assembly consist of the operator panel LCD and the operator panel card.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Operator panel assembly removal (C748)
See operator panel assembly with card on
for the part number.
Warning:
This part might contain customer confidential information. See
“Data Security Notice” on page 4-1
for more details. After removing this part, return it to your next level of support so any data can be removed. If the customer requests to keep the part, they must sign a confirmation of memory device retention form.
Warning:
When replacing any one of the following components:
•
Operator panel assembly
•
System board
•
Top access cover assembly
Only replace one component at a time. Replace the required component, and perform a POR before replacing a second component listed above. If this procedure is not followed, the printer will be rendered inoperable.
1.
Remove the top access cover assembly. See
“Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-54
.
2.
Turn the top access cover assembly over.
Repair information
4-37
5026
3.
Remove the eight screws (A) securing the position guide cover.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
4.
Pull open the operator panel connector and disconnect the operator panel cable.
Installation note:
Make sure the contact pins on the cable are facing up when reconnecting the operator panel cable to the connector.
4-38
Service Manual
5.
Flip open the LCD connector and disconnect the LCD cable.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
6.
Remove the five screws (B) securing the operator panel card, then remove the operator panel card.
B
Repair information
4-39
5026
7.
Remove the four screws (C) securing the LCD bracket.
Previous
Next
Go Back
C
8.
Remove the LCD bracket and ground connector.
9.
Remove the operator panel LCD.
4-40
Service Manual
Operator panel bezel removal
See operator panel bezel on
for the part number.
1.
Open the front cover.
2.
Pry the bezel using a flat-head screw driver to remove.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Operator panel buttons removal (C746)
1.
Remove the top access door cover assembly. See
“Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-54
.
2.
Turn the top access cover assembly over.
3.
Remove the eight screws (A) securing the position guide cover.
A
Repair information
4-41
5026
4.
Remove the six screws (B) securing the operator panel card, then remove the operator panel card.
Previous
Next
Go Back
B
5.
Unsnap the small latches securing the buttons, then remove them.
4-42
Service Manual
Operator panel buttons removal (C748)
1.
Remove the top access door cover assembly. See
“Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-54
.
2.
Turn the top access cover assembly over.
3.
Remove the eight screws (A) securing the position guide cover.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
4.
Remove the five screws (B) securing the operator panel card, then remove the operator panel card.
B
Repair information
4-43
5026
5.
Unsnap the small latches securing the buttons, then remove them.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-44
Service Manual
Output bin extension cover removal
See
“Output bin extension cover” on page 7-3
for the part number.
1.
Turn the printer around, so the back is toward you.
2.
Rotate the output bin extension cover toward the front of the printer.
3.
Use a flathead screwdriver to ease the posts from the holes on one side.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Repair information
4-45
5026
Paper tray dust cover removal
See
“Dust cover assembly” on page 7-3
for the part number.
1.
Remove the paper tray.
2.
Remove the left cover. See
“Left cover removal” on page 4-31
.
3.
Remove the paper tray dust cover assembly.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Installation notes:
1.
Place the paper tray dust cover into position.
2.
Slide the left cover down until it locks into place.
Note:
Be sure the post in the left cover engages the hole in the left cover, and that the post in the paper tray dust cover engages the hole in the left cover properly.
3.
Replace the three screws on the left cover.
Note:
Verify that the paper tray dust cover swings properly.
4-46
Service Manual
Rear frame cover removal
See
“Rear frame cover” on page 7-3
for the part number.
1.
Remove paper tray
2.
Loosen
the eight screws (A) on the rear frame cover.
Note:
Do not remove the screws.
3.
Lift up on the rear frame cover to remove it from the back of the printer.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
Repair information
4-47
5026
Rear left cover removal
1.
Remove the left cover. See
“Left cover removal” on page 4-31
.
2.
Separate the left cover and rear left cover by sliding the left rear cover as shown to disengage the latch (A).
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-48
Service Manual
Rear right cover removal
See
“Rear right cover” on page 7-3
for the part number.
1.
Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
.
2.
Press the two tabs (A) to separate the right cover from the rear right cover.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
Repair information
4-49
5026
Rear upper cover removal
1.
Remove the two screws (A).
2.
Slide the cover up and remove the rear upper cover.
Note:
If you are removing the rear upper cover to access another part, leave the cooling fan filter attached, and you are done. If you need to replace the rear upper cover FRU, continue with the next step to remove the cooling fan filter FRU.
3.
Remove the cooling fan filter. See
“Cooling fan filter removal” on page 4-86
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-50
Service Manual
Right cover removal
See
for the part number.
1.
Remove the power cord from the printer.
2.
Remove the paper tray.
3.
Remove the rear upper cover. See
“Rear upper cover removal” on page 4-50
4.
Open the front cover.
5.
Open the top access cover.
6.
Remove the two screws (A) on the inside front.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
7.
Remove the plastic screw (B) on the inside front.
B
Repair information
4-51
5026
8.
Remove the three screws (C).
9.
Lift the bottom of the cover out, pull up at the points shown, and remove the cover.
Note:
There are posts on the top access cover and the paper tray dust cover (D). When you reinstall, be sure to verify that the top access cover opens correctly and that the paper tray dust cover swings properly.
10.
Remove the paper tray dust cover (E).
Previous
Next
Go Back
D E
Note:
If you are removing the right cover to access another part, leave the right cover and the rear right cover attached, and you are done. If you need to replace the right cover FRU, continue with the next step to remove the separate rear right cover FRU.
4-52
Service Manual
11.
Press the two tabs (F) to separate the right cover from the rear right cover.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
F
Repair information
4-53
5026
Top access cover assembly removal
See
“Top access cover assembly, 2.3 inch” on page 7-3
for the part number.
Warning: When replacing any one of the following components:
•
Operator panel assembly
•
System board
•
Top access cover assembly
Only replace one component at a time. Replace the required component, and perform a POR before replacing a second component listed above. If this procedure is not followed, the printer will be rendered inoperable.
1.
Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
2.
Disconnect the cable connectors at operator panel connector (A), JFMUSB1 (B), and JBIN1 (C) on the system board.
Previous
Next
Go Back
C A B
3.
Remove the rear upper cover. See
“Rear upper cover removal” on page 4-50
4.
Open the front access cover and top access cover
5.
Remove the two screws (D), one on either side of the printer, that connects the links.
D
4-54
Service Manual
6.
Disconnect the JOPP1 and JFMUSB1 cables (E) from their connectors.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
E
7.
Take out the JOPP1, and JFMUSB1 cables (F).
F
Repair information
4-55
5026
8.
Raise the top access cover assembly.
9.
Push down on the rear-right side of the top cover (G) then pull out the right cover (H) lightly to release the top cover from the hinge (I).
Previous
Next
Go Back
H G I
4-56
Service Manual
5026
10.
Slide out the top access cover to remove.
Note:
If you are removing the top access cover assembly to access another FRU, then leave the operator panel bezel attached, and you are done. If you are replacing the top access cover assembly FRU, then
remove the separate operator panel bezel FRU. See
“Operator panel bezel removal” on page 4-41
Installation note:
When reinstalling the top access cover assembly, guide the speaker and bin full sensor cables through the two holes (J) on the rear of the top cover first.
Previous
Next
Go Back
J
Repair information
4-57
5026
Top cover assembly removal
1.
Remove the fuser. See
1.
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
.
2.
Remove the top access cover assembly. See
“Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-54
.
3.
Disconnect the connectors in JBLW1 (A), JFUSER1 (B), JFAN1 (C) on the system board.
Note:
If you are removing the top cover assembly of the C748x model, make sure to remove the speaker connector (D).
Previous
Next
Go Back
C
B A
4.
Pull the cables through the openings.
Note:
Be sure to observe the routing for the cables.
D
4-58
Service Manual
5.
Remove the fuser AC cable from the cable restraint (D).
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
6.
Remove the five screws (E).
E E
Repair information
4-59
5026
Note:
If you are removing the top cover assembly of the C748x model, remove the two screws (F) to detach the speaker mount. The speaker mount is not included as part of the top access cover assembly FRU.
Previous
Next
Go Back
F
7.
Lift and remove the top cover assembly.
Installation note:
Make sure to push down on the cam after reinstalling the top cover assembly.
4-60
Service Manual
Printer removals
5 V interlock switch cable removal
See
“5 V interlock switch” on page 7-9
1.
Remove the EP drive assembly. See
“Electrophotographic (EP) drive assembly removal” on page 4-90
.
2.
Disconnect the connector at JINT1 (A) on the system board.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Repair information
4-61
5026
3.
Open the front access door cover, and remove the screw (B).
Previous
Next
Go Back
B
4.
Remove the cable from the two cable retainers (C).
4-62
Service Manual
5.
Remove the 5 V interlock switch and bracket from the printer.
6.
Remove the screw (D), and remove the 5 V interlock switch cable from the bracket.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
24 V interlock switch removal
See
“24 V interlock switch” on page 7-9
1.
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
.
2.
Disconnect the connector at JCVR1 (A) at system board.
Repair information
4-63
5026
3.
Remove the screw (B), and the bracket separates from the 24 V interlock switch.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Installation notes:
Observe the routing of the 24 V interlock switch cable (C).
4-64
Service Manual
5026
Bin full sensor flag removal
1.
Remove the top access cover assembly. See
“Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-54
.
2.
Turn the top access cover over, and use a flatblade screwdriver to carefully remove the flag (A).
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
Bin full sensor removal
See
“Bin full sensor with cable” on page 7-3
for the part number.
1.
Remove the top access cover assembly. See
“Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-54
.
2.
Turn the top access cover over, and press the side of the bin full sensor (A) to snap it loose from the cover.
3.
Remove the bin full sensor and cable.
A
Repair information
4-65
5026
Cartridge cooling fan removal
1.
“Top cover assembly removal” on page 4-58
2.
Turn the top cover over, and remove the two screws (A).
3.
Remove the cartridge cooling fan.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-66
Service Manual
Cartridge motor 1/fuser cable removal
1.
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
.
2.
Disconnect the connectors in JCARTP1 (A) and JCARTS1 (B) on the system board.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
Disconnect the connectors from the cartridge motor 1 (C) and the fuser motor (D).
Repair information
4-67
5026
4.
Disconnect the camshaft cable connector (E) from the motor card, and unwind the two cables.
Previous
Next
Go Back
5.
Remove the cable from the six retainers (F).
Installation notes:
•
Make sure you wrap the camshaft cable around the cartridge motor 1/fuser cable, as shown, to prevent the cables from interfering with the motors and damaging the cables.
•
Note the routing of the cables and the cable retainers.
4-68
Service Manual
Cartridge motor 2/3 cable removal
1.
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
.
2.
Disconnect the connectors in JCARTP2 (A) and JCARTS2 (B) on the system board.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
Disconnect the connectors from the cartridge motor 2 (C) and cartridge motor 3 (D).
Repair information
4-69
5026
4.
Remove the cable from the six retainers (E).
Installation note:
Pay attention to the routing of the cables and the cable retainers.
Color on demand assembly removal
1.
Remove the fuser. See
.
2.
Remove the print cartridges.
3.
Remove the top cover assembly. See
“Top cover assembly removal” on page 4-58
4.
Disconnect the connector at JBOR1 (A) on the system board.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-70
Service Manual
5.
Remove the five screws (B).
6.
Remove the COD assembly.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Repair information
4-71
5026
Installation notes:
1.
Push the actuators (A) all the way down.
A
2.
Turn the printer around, and verify the actuators are in the correct location by looking inside the front of the printer. The actuators (B) should be visible in the triangular holes in the frame, as shown.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-72
Service Manual
3.
Rotate the large COD gear until the stop (C) on the gear is against the housing.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
4.
Engage the gears on the left side of the COD.
C
Repair information
4-73
5026
5.
6.
Engage the gears (D) on the right side of the COD.
Replace the five screws (E).
7.
Verify the actuators can be seen by looking inside the printer at the triangular holes, as in step 2.
8.
Check to make sure you can rotate the large COD gear from stop to stop.
Previous
Next
Go Back
9.
Reconnect the cable connector to JBOR1 connector on the system board.
10.
Reinstall the top cover assembly, the fuser, and the covers.
4-74
Service Manual
5026
Contact springs kit removal
See
Toner cartridge contacts removal
1.
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
.
2.
Remove the printhead. See
“Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment” on page 4-145
3.
Remove contact spring cables from the cable restraints (A).
Note:
Pay attention to the routing of the cartridge contact cables, and the appropriate slots where each cartridge contact is installed.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
Repair information
4-75
5026
4.
Remove the three screws (B) securing the top three bell crank links.
Previous
Next
Go Back
5.
Remove the bell crank link (C) together with its bell crank spring (D).
B
4-76
Service Manual
C D
5026
Installation notes: a.
When installing the bell crank link and spring back to the machine, guide the mounting hole on the bell crank link to the mounting pin on the cartridge guide (E), and guide one end of the spring onto the boss rest on the bell crank link and the other end onto the boss rest on the bell crank (F).
b.
Make sure the locator pin on the bell crank rests on the locator hole of the bell crank link (G).
Previous
Next
Go Back
F E F G
6.
Use a prying tool to remove the bell crank.
Note:
The bell crank must be replaced due to the damage that can occur to the retention features of this bell crank.
7.
Perform steps 5 and 6 to the other bell crank links and bell cranks, except for the one found at the lowermost portion of the cartridge guide.
Repair information
4-77
5026
8.
Remove the lower-most bell crank spring (H) and bell crank (I).
Previous
Next
Go Back
H I
9.
Using a spring compression tool (J), align its opening to the rib on the cartridge guide as shown, then push and hold the spring compression tool into the cartridge contact spring.
Note:
Make sure to properly align the opening on the spring compression tool to the rib on the cartridge guide.
4-78
Service Manual
J
5026
10.
Remove the cartridge contacts from the right side of the machine, then release the spring compression tool.
Note:
Pay attention to the color coding of the cartridge contact cables, and the appropriate slots where each cartridge contact is installed.
Previous
Next
Go Back
1
2
Installation notes: a.
Insert the cartridge contact spring into the slot on the cartridge guide.
Repair information
4-79
5026
Previous
b.
Position the spring compression tool (K) as shown below and align its opening to the rib on the cartridge guide, then push and hold the spring compression tool into the cartridge contact spring.
Note:
Make sure to properly align the opening on the spring compression tool to the rib on the cartridge guide.
Next
Go Back
K
c.
Insert the cartridge contact on the right side of the machine.
1
2
11.
Perform steps 9 and10 to remove all the cartridge contacts.
4-80
Service Manual
5026
Charge roll contact spring removal
1.
Remove the HVPS. See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal” on page 4-115
.
2.
Remove the charge roll contact springs (A). Be sure to push the springs under the retainers that hold them in place.
Installation note:
Make sure the springs are behind the retainers when installing the new springs.
Retainer
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
Repair information
4-81
5026
HVPS contact springs removal
1.
Remove the HVPS. See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal” on page 4-115
.
2.
Pull out the spring that will be replaced:
•
HVPS DB contact spring (A)
•
HVPS DR contact spring (B)
•
HVPS TAR contact spring (C)
B
A
Previous
Next
Go Back
C
Installation note:
Refer below for the location of the HVPS DR Contact spring and HVPS DB contact spring.
4-82
Service Manual
27S1997 HVPS DR Contact
27S1998 HVPS DB Contact
Torsion spring removal
1.
Open the front access door and remove all the toner cartridges.
2.
Remove the screw (A) and the spring cap (B) of the appropriate contact spring.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
A B
3.
Press the lower half (C, D) of the springs, and remove the springs.
C D
Repair information
4-83
5026
Installation notes:
When installing, make sure the top half (E) of the spring is under the straight spring (F). This is typical for both types of springs. Also make sure the bottom half (D,G) of both springs are compressed and locked by the appropriate locking tabs (H, I).
F E
H
Previous
Next
Go Back
G
I
D
4-84
Service Manual
Cooling fan removal
1.
Remove the rear upper cover. See
“Rear upper cover removal” on page 4-50
2.
Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3.
Disconnect JFAN1 (A).
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
4.
Remove the two screws (B).
5.
Remove the cooling fan.
B
Repair information
4-85
5026
Cooling fan filter removal
1.
Remove the rear upper cover. See
“Rear upper cover removal” on page 4-50
2.
Turn the cover over.
3.
Squeeze the right side of the filter, and remove it from the tabs (A).
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-86
Service Manual
5026
Duplex reference edge guide assembly removal
1.
Remove the paper tray.
2.
Disconnect the transfer module cable (A).
3.
Press the two tabs (B) to release the front access door cover assembly.
4.
Press the two tabs (C) on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module.
Note:
Leave the photoconductor units on the transport belt when removing.
Warning:
To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum, hold the photoconductor units by their handle and place the photoconductor units on a clean surface. Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a prolonged period of time. See
“Handing the photoconductor unit” on page 4-2
information.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
B C
Repair information
4-87
5026
5.
Looking down at the keyed end of the restraint (D), twist the end clockwise, slide the restraint upward through the slit (E), and slip the end of the restraint through the keyed hole (F). Repeat for the other side.
Previous
Next
Go Back
D F E
6.
Close the front access door assembly.
4-88
Service Manual
5026
7.
Remove the two screws on the duplex aligner (G), and then remove the screw (H) securing the duplex reference edge guide assembly.
Previous
Next
Go Back
H G
8.
Remove the duplex reference edge guide assembly.
Repair information
4-89
5026
Electrophotographic (EP) drive assembly removal
See
“EP drive assembly” on page 7-9
1.
Remove the paper tray.
2.
Remove the transport belt module and the developer units. See
“Transfer module removal” on page 4-171
.
3.
Remove the cartridges.
4.
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
.
5.
Disconnect the cartridge 1/fuser motor cable (two connectors) (A), and remove the cables from the cable retainers (B).
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-90
Service Manual
5026
6.
Disconnect the camshaft/transport cable connector (C), and remove the cable from the cable clamps (D).
Previous
Next
Go Back
7.
Unwind the camshaft/transport cable and the cartridge 1/fuser cables (E).
Note:
Be sure to rewind the camshaft/transport cable around the other cables with about four twists to keep them from interfering with or being damaged by the motors.
Repair information
4-91
5026
8.
Disconnect the cartridge 2/cartridge 3 motor cable (two connectors) (F), and remove the cable from the cable clamps (G).
Previous
Next
Go Back
9.
Disconnect the motor drive cable connector (H), and remove the cable from the cable clamps (J).
10.
Remove the two screws (K) to remove the motor driver card assembly.
K
H J
11.
Remove the two screws (L) on the inside
4-92
Service Manual
J
12.
Remove the three screws (M) on the front.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
L M
Repair information
4-93
5026
13.
Remove the seven screws (N) securing the EP drive.
Previous
Next
Go Back
N
N
4-94
Service Manual
N
N (First)
14.
Remove the 5 V interlock switch cable from the restraint (N) on the backside of the EP drive.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
15.
Remove the EP drive.
Installation notes:
1.
Push the actuator rack all the way to the right (A).
2.
Pull the link all the way up (B).
B
A
Repair information
4-95
5026
3.
Fasten the 5 V interlock cable into the cable retainer (C) on the bottom of the EP drive.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4.
Align the gear so the first gear tooth (D) of the top cover camshaft meshes with the first two gear teeth (E) after the flat area in the EP drive actuator rack, and then seat the right side of the top cover camshaft into the boss (F) on the EP drive.
F
D
Flat area
(gap)
E
4-96
Service Manual
5026
5.
Hold the drive in place while replacing the first of the seven screws, then continue replacing the rest of the screws (G).
Previous
Next
Go Back
Repair information
4-97
5026
6.
7.
Replace the two screws (H) from the inside.
Replace the three screws (J) on front.
8.
Wind the camshaft cable (K) around the cartridge 1/fuser cables about four times to make sure they do not interfere with or are damaged by the fuser motor.
9.
Connect the cartridge 1/fuser motor cable (two connectors) (L), and place the cables in the cable retainers (M).
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-98
Service Manual
5026
10.
Connect the cartridge 2/cartridge 3 motor cable (two connectors) (N), and make sure the cable is in the cable clamps (O).
Previous
Next
Go Back
O
O N
11.
Hold the motor driver card in place and reinstall the two screws (P) to secure the motor driver card.
12.
Connect the three connectors (Q), and secure the cables in the cable clamps (R).
Q
P R
13.
Reinstall the low-voltage power supply (LVPS).
14.
Replace the right and rear covers.
15.
Replace the transport belt module and developer units.
16.
Replace the cartridges and the fuser.
17.
Replace the paper tray.
R
Repair information
4-99
5026
Front door assembly removal
See the part number for the Front door assembly for the specific model you need on
1.
Remove the front access cover assembly. See
“Front access cover assembly removal” on page 4-29
.
2.
Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3.
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
.
4.
Disconnect the JTPS1 cable (A) from the system board.
Previous
Next
Go Back
5.
Release the left and right front door assembly cable springs (B) from the front door assembly.
B B
4-100
Service Manual
6.
Open the front door assembly.
7.
Unwrap and remove the cable from the left and right pulleys (C).
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
8.
Close the front door assembly, and remove the mounting screw (D) and the cap (E).
Repair information
4-101
5026
9.
Open the front door assembly, slide it to the right, and remove. You need to press firmly to slide the front door assembly to the right.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Installation note:
“Front door assembly front cable (left) removal” on page 4-103
“The longer cable installs on the left side of the printer.” on page 4-106
for proper installation of the cable restraints.
4-102
Service Manual
5026
Front door assembly front cable (left) removal
1.
Remove the paper tray.
2.
Disconnect the transfer module cable (A).
3.
Press the two tabs (B) to release the front access door cover assembly.
4.
Press the two tabs (C) on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module.
Note:
Leave the photoconductor units on the transport belt when removing.
Warning:
To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum, hold the photoconductor units by their handle and place the photoconductor units on a clean surface. Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a prolonged period of time. See
“Handing the photoconductor unit” on page 4-2
information.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
B C
Repair information
4-103
5026
5.
Looking down at the keyed end of the restraint (D), twist the end clockwise, slide the restraint upward through the slit (E), and slip the end of the restraint through the keyed hole (F). Repeat for the other side.
Previous
Next
Go Back
D F E
4-104
Service Manual
6.
Remove the fuser. See
.
7.
Push down on both of the front door locking mechanism simultaneously to close the camshaft.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
8.
Close the front access door assembly.
9.
Release the cable spring (H) from the front door assembly.
Note:
In order to access the springs, make sure the top access cover is closed.
H
Repair information
4-105
5026
10.
Remove the end of the cable (J) from the frame.
Installation notes:
•
The longer cable installs on the left side of the printer.
•
Push down on the lever to raise front door locking mechanism and open the camshaft.
4-106
Service Manual
Previous
Next
Go Back
5026
Front door assembly front cable (right) removal
1.
Remove the paper tray.
2.
Disconnect the transfer module cable (A).
3.
Press the two tabs (B) to release the front access door cover assembly.
4.
Press the two tabs (C) on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module.
Note:
Leave the photoconductor units on the transport belt when removing.
Warning:
To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum, hold the photoconductor units by their handle and place the photoconductor units on a clean surface. Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a prolonged period of time. See
“Handing the photoconductor unit” on page 4-2
information.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
B C
Repair information
4-107
5026
5.
Looking down at the keyed end of the restraint (D), twist the end clockwise, slide the restraint upward through the slit (E), and slip the end of the restraint through the keyed hole (F). Repeat for the other side.
Previous
Next
Go Back
D F E
4-108
Service Manual
6.
Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
.
7.
Close the front access door assembly.
8.
Release the spring (G) from the front door assembly.
Note:
In order to access the springs, make sure the top access cover is closed.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
G
9.
Remove the end of the cable (H) from the frame.
10.
Remove the right restraint cable.
Repair information
4-109
5026
Installation note:
The shorter restraint cable installs on the right side of the printer.
Note:
The frame end needs to be wrapped to inside of post for two full turns
Previous
Next
Go Back
Fuser removal
See
“Fuser assembly, 115 V” on page 7-7
,
“Fuser assembly, 230 V” on page 7-7
, or
for the part number.
CAUTION
The fuser can be extremely hot. Use care when handling to avoid burns.
1.
Turn off the printer.
2.
Open the front access door.
3.
Open the top access door.
4.
Rotate the fuser thumbscrews (A) counterclockwise until loosened.
4-110
Service Manual
5.
Grasp the handles (B), slide the fuser out from the printer.
B
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
Installation note:
If you install a new fuser, be sure to reset the fuser counter in the Configuration Menu, and run the Motor Calibration. To reset the counter and run the calibration:
1.
Enter the Configuration Menu. (Turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 2 and 6, turn on the printer, and release the buttons when the progress bar displays.)
2.
Press for the Reset value.
Resetting Fuser Count Value appears.
3.
Select Motor Calibration from the CONFIG MENU.
Calibrating displays, and the printer prints several blank pages and then returns to the CONFIG MENU.
4.
Select Exit Config Menu.
Repair information
4-111
5026
Fuser AC cable removal
Note:
The LVPS to fuser AC cable is black.
1.
Remove the top cover assembly. See
“Top cover assembly removal” on page 4-58
2.
Turn the top cover assembly over.
3.
Lift the locking latch (A) on the connector, slide the connector down, and remove the connector from the keyed hole.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4.
Remove the cable from the cable openings (B).
Note:
Observe the routing of the cable for reinstallation.
4-112
Service Manual
Fuser DC cable removal
Note:
The fuser to system board autoconnect cable is red.
1.
Remove the top cover assembly. See
“Top cover assembly removal” on page 4-58
2.
Turn the top cover assembly over.
3.
Remove the connector (A) from the top cover assembly.
Warning:
You will damage the old connector in the process. Be careful not to damage the top cover assembly.
4.
Pull the cable through the hole (B) in the top cover assembly, and the notch (C).
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Repair information
4-113
5026
Hard drive assembly removal
Warning:
This part might contain customer confidential information. See
“Data Security Notice” on page 4-1
for more details. After removing this part, return it to your next level of support so any data can be removed. If the customer requests to keep the part, they must sign a confirmation of memory device retention form.
1.
Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
2.
Remove the two screws (A), and squeeze the connector to disconnect the hard disk from the system board (B).
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
Pull the hard disk straight out to pop the hard drive standoffs free of the system board.
4-114
Service Manual
High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal
See
“High-voltage power supply” on page 7-13
for the part number.
1.
Remove the left cover. See
“Left cover removal” on page 4-31
.
2.
Remove the six mounting screws (A).
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
3.
Release the locking tab (B) from the front, lower corner of the HVPS.
B
Repair information
4-115
5026
4.
Disconnect the five connectors (C) from the HVPS.
C
Installation notes:
•
Make sure to replace the spring when replacing the HVPS.
•
There are two types of spring forces on the cartridge contacts. Make sure to put the springs in their appropriate slots and are oriented properly.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-116
Service Manual
High-voltage power supply (HVPS) cable removal
1.
Remove the rear upper cover. See
“Rear upper cover removal” on page 4-50
2.
Disconnect the cable connector at JHVPS1 on the system board.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
Disconnect the cable connector (B) from the HVPS.
4.
Remove the cable from the hole through the frame (C), and from the two cable restraints (D).
Repair information
4-117
5026
Left bell crank assembly removal
See
“Left bellcrank assembly, with spring” on page 7-7
1.
Remove the left cover. See
“Left cover removal” on page 4-31
.
2.
Remove the C-clip (A).
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
3.
Remove the left bell crank assembly.
4-118
Service Manual
Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal
See
“Low-voltage power supply” on page 7-9
1.
Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
2.
Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
3.
Disconnect the connector at JLVPS1 connector (A) on the system board.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
4.
Remove the five LVPS mounting screws (B).
5.
Disconnect the AC fuser cable (C) from the LVPS.
A
Repair information
4-119
5026
Installation note:
•
When installing the new LVPS, make sure the voltage switch (A) is set for the proper value (115 V or
230 V), depending on the country.
Note:
Not all LVPS FRUs have a switch. Others are switched automatically.
Previous
Next
Go Back
•
Install the LVPS, and make sure the AC fuser cable is in the cable guides, and not behind the LVPS.
•
Reconnect the AC fuser cable to the LVPS.
•
Replace the five LVPS mounting screws.
•
Reconnect the cable in connector JLVPS1 on the system board.
4-120
Service Manual
Motor driver card removal
1.
Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
.
2.
Disconnect the three cables (A).
3.
Remove the two screws (B), and remove the motor driver card.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Repair information
4-121
5026
Motor driver cable removal
1.
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
.
2.
Disconnect the connector in JDVR1 (A) on the system board.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
Disconnect the connector on the motor driver card (B).
4.
Remove the cable from the cable from the four cable retainers (C).
Installation note:
Pay attention to the routing of the cable and the cable retainers.
4-122
Service Manual
5026
Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex gear and housing removal
See the multipurpose feeder/duplex gear and housing kit for the part number.
1.
Remove the paper pick mechanism assembly. See
“Paper pick mechanism assembly removal” on page 4-137
.
2.
Remove the two E-clips (A) from the gears.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
Remove the three screws (B).
4.
Slide the front gear (C) off.
A
B C
Repair information
4-123
5026
5.
Slide a flathead screwdriver up and under the front cover.
6.
Slide the remaining two gears and housings off.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-124
Service Manual
5026
Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex motor assembly removal
See
“MP feeder/duplex drive parts packet” on page 7-7
for the part number.
1.
Remove the low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
.
2.
Remove the multipurpose feeder/duplex gear and housing. See
“Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex gear and housing removal” on page 4-123
.
3.
Remove the two multipurpose feeder/duplex motor mounting screws (A).
Previous
Next
Go Back
4.
Remove the multipurpose/duplex motor from the printer.
5.
Push in the prongs (B) of the housing to remove the cable tie (C).
A
6.
Slide the motor out of the housing.
7.
Disconnect the connector (D) from the motor.
Repair information
4-125
5026
Installation notes:
1.
Connect the cable (A) at the motor.
2.
Slide the cable tie (B) onto the motor.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
Insert the motor into the frame.
4-126
Service Manual
4.
Replace the screws (C).
5.
Slide the housing onto the motor, making sure the four tabs of the housing slide under the cable tie.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
6.
Replace the multipurpose feeder/duplex gear and housing assembly.
Repair information
4-127
5026
Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex motor cable removal
1.
Remove the multipurpose feeder/duplex motor. See
“Multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex motor assembly removal” on page 4-125
2.
Disconnect the connector from JDX1 (A) on the system board.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
Remove the cable from the cable retainers (B).
4-128
Service Manual
5026
Multipurpose feeder (MPF) paper present sensor
1.
Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
.
2.
Remove the standard 550-sheet input tray.
3.
Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
4.
Remove the Low-voltage power supply (LVPS). See
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
.
5.
Remove the three screws (A) securing the tray rail that contains the paper present sensor.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
6.
Remove the JMPFPP1 connector (B) from the system board, then remove the cable.
Installation note:
Pay attention to the routing of the cable.
B
Repair information
4-129
5026
7.
Remove the MPF paper sensor bracket from the machine.
Previous
Next
Go Back
8.
Pry the sensor off the bracket, then disconnect the sensor (C) from the cable (D).
C
D
9.
Remove the cable from the bracket.
Installation note:
Pay attention to the routing of the cable.
4-130
Service Manual
MPF pick removal
1.
Open the MPF door.
2.
Press the latch on the MPF pick then pull to the left to remove.
2
1
1
Repair information
4-131
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
5026
Operator panel cable removal
1.
Remove the top access cover assembly. See
“Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-54
.
2.
Turn the top access cover assembly over.
3.
Remove the eight screws (A), and remove the position guide cover.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
4.
Pull open the operator panel connector (B) and disconnect the operator panel cable from the operator panel card.
5.
Remove the operator panel cable from the toroid (C) and the two cable retainers (D).
D C B
Installation note:
Make sure the contact pins on the cable are facing up when reconnecting the operator panel cable to the connector.
4-132
Service Manual
5026
Operator panel ground cable removal
1.
Remove the top access cover assembly. See
“Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-54
.
2.
Turn the top access cover assembly over.
3.
Remove the eight screws (A) securing the position guide cover.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
4.
Disconnect the operator panel ground cable from the operator panel ground pin (B).
5.
Remove the screw (C) securing the operator panel ground cable to the operator panel card.
B C
6.
Remove the operator panel ground cable from its retainers.
Installation note:
Pay attention to the routing of the ground cable.
Repair information
4-133
5026
Operator panel USB connector cable removal
1.
Remove the top access cover assembly. See
“Top access cover assembly removal” on page 4-54
.
2.
Turn the top access cover assembly over.
3.
Remove the eight screws (A) securing the position guide cover.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
4.
Disconnect the USB ground cable (B) and detach the USB cable connector (C) from the USB slot.
B
C
5.
Remove the USB cable and ground cable from its retainers.
Installation note:
Make sure to observe the routing of the USB cable.
4-134
Service Manual
Option cable removal
1.
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
.
2.
Disconnect the cable connector at JOPT1 (A) on the system board.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
Replace the rear frame cover to protect the system board.
4.
Position the printer on its back.
5.
Remove the two screws (B).
Repair information
4-135
5026
6.
Press the tabs together to remove the option cable connector.
Note:
Be sure to note the cable routing for reinstallation.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-136
Service Manual
Paper pick mechanism assembly removal
See
“Paper pick assembly” on page 7-7
1.
Remove the paper tray.
2.
Remove the waste toner assembly. See
“Waste toner assembly removal” on page 4-176
.
3.
Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
4.
Disconnect the connector in JFDPCK1 (A) and JTRAY1 (B) on the system board.
5.
Push the cables through the hole in the frame (C).
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
6.
Open the front access cover.
Repair information
4-137
5026
7.
Remove the transfer module with the photoconductor units attached.
a.
Disconnect the transfer module cable (D).
b.
Press the two tabs (E) to release the front access cover assembly, and lower the front access door cover.
c.
Press the two tabs (F) on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module.
Note:
Leave the photoconductor units on the transport belt when removing.
Warning: To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum, place the transfer module with the photoconductor units on a clean surface. Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a prolonged period of time. Place a clean, dry cloth over the transfer module and photoconductor units until they are required.
Previous
Next
Go Back
E F
8.
Remove the toner cartridges.
Warning:
Do not touch the developer rolls.
9.
Remove the four screws (G) from the bottom pan.
D
4-138
Service Manual
10.
With one hand, disengage the gear (H), then grasp the paper pick assembly, and pull forward and downward to disengage the assembly until the front (J) and rear locking tabs release (not visible).
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
11.
Lower the paper pick mechanism, and remove through the front of the printer.
Note:
Make sure the JTRAY1 and JTRAY2 connectors do not bind when passing through the frame access hole.
Installation notes:
1.
Remove the waste toner assembly. See
“Waste toner assembly removal” on page 4-176
.
2.
Replace the rear frame cover to protect the system board.
3.
Turn the printer on its back.
4.
Slide the paper pick assembly toward the back of the printer, and down to engage the tabs (A).
Repair information
4-139
5026
5.
Engage the gear (B).
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-140
Service Manual
6.
Reach into the printer, and replace the front right screw (C) to secure the paper pick assembly.
7.
Set the printer upright.
8.
Secure the remaining three screws (D).
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
9.
Remove the rear frame cover.
10.
Route the cables through the hole in the frame, and connect them to JFDPCK1 (E) and JTRAY1 (F).
11.
Replace the rear frame cover.
12.
Replace the waste toner assembly.
13.
Replace the toner cartridges.
14.
Replace the transfer module with the photoconductor units.
15.
Close the front access cover.
16.
Replace the paper tray.
Repair information
4-141
5026
Photoconductor unit removal
Not a FRU
Warning:
To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum, hold the photoconductor units by their handle and place the photoconductor units on a clean surface. See
“Handing the photoconductor unit” on page 4-2
1.
Open the front access door.
2.
Lift the right end handle (A) of the photoconductor unit, releasing from the mount.
3.
Lift the unit up and away from the left side of printer, ensuring the left end of the photoconductor is released from the holding pin (B).
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
B
Installation note:
If a new photoconductor unit is installed, reset the life count value in the printer memory.
•
If a message appears on the operator panel:
1.
When
84 <color> PC Unit Life Warning or 84 Replace <color> PC Unit appears, select Supply
Replaced
, and then press .
Replace Supply displays.
2.
Select Cyan PC Unit, Magenta PC Unit, Yellow PC Unit, or Black PC Unit based on the photoconductor unit that was just replaced, and then press .
<color> PC Unit Replaced displays.
3.
Select Yes, and then press to clear the message.
•
If no message appears:
1.
Press Menu ( ).
2.
Select Supplies Menu, and press .
3.
Press select .
4.
Select Cyan PC Unit, Magenta PC Unit, Yellow PC Unit, or Black PC Unit based on the photoconductor unit that was just replaced, and then press .
<color> PC Unit Replaced displays.
Press
Yes
.
4-142
Service Manual
5026
Pick arm roll removal and replacement
See
The auto compensator pick roll tires are located in the base printer. There are also tires in all input options. If you have additional input options, and you are having problems with media picking, replace these tires also. Always replace the pick arm rolls in pairs. The rolls come in a package of two.
Warning:
Remove only the rubber tires and not the pick tire assembly to avoid losing small parts.
1.
Remove the paper tray.
2.
Pull the paper pick arm (A) down.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
3.
Remove the pick arm roll (B) from the pick arm roll assembly (C). Repeat for the other pick arm roll (D).
B C D
Repair information
4-143
5026
Installation notes:
Install the new rubber tires with the surface texture turning in the direction as shown.
Note:
Feel the rubber surface to verify it turns properly in the direction shown.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Printer pad removal
1.
Slide the corner of the printer containing the damaged pad over the corner of the table.
2.
Remove the side cover that corresponds to the damaged pad so you can see if the pad fully seats in the installation holes.
3.
Pull the pad tabs (A) from the bottom of the printer.
Installation note:
Verify that the pad fully seats in the installation holes.
4-144
Service Manual
5026
Printhead removal, installation, and adjustment
See
“Printhead assembly” on page 7-11
Service tip—Testing the new printhead
See
“Printhead verification” on page 3-39
for quick way to verify that the existing printhead is failing
before installing the new printhead. If the new printhead also fails, the existing printhead is probably working properly, so the system board is probably the failing component.
Printhead removal
1.
Turn the printer off.
2.
Disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet and from the printer.
3.
Remove the paper tray.
4.
Open the front access door.
5.
Open the top access door.
6.
Remove the fuser.
Previous
Next
Go Back
7.
Remove the transfer module and photoconductor units.
a.
Disconnect the transfer module cable (A).
b.
Press the two tabs (B) to release the front access cover assembly.
c.
Press the two tabs (C) on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module.
Note:
Leave the photoconductor units on the transport belt when removing.
Repair information
4-145
5026
Warning:
To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum, place the transfer module with the photoconductor units on a clean surface. Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a prolonged period of time. Place a clean, dry cloth over the transfer module and photoconductor units until they are required.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
B C
8.
Remove all of the toner cartridges.
9.
Remove the right cover and the right side cover (attached). See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
.
10.
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
.
11.
Remove the system board support shield. See
“System board support shield removal” on page 4-160
12.
Push the top access cover down until it clicks into place.
4-146
Service Manual
13.
Remove the three printhead mounting screws (D).
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Repair information
4-147
5026
14.
Remove the printhead alignment screw cover (E).
15.
While still holding the printhead in place, loosen the printhead alignment screw (F) until the printhead comes out.
Warning:
Secure the printhead when loosening the printhead alignment screw. Failure to do this allows the printhead to fall out of the printer, potentially damaging the printhead.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Install the printhead and replace parts
Warning:
•
When reinstalling the printhead, it is important to keep in mind that the printhead mounting screws should be initially tightened just enough to hold the printhead in the printer. The printer parts are installed with the printhead mounting screws loose so you can print the pages that will be used to align the black plane to the printer frame. This also allows the black skew adjustment to be adjusted with the printhead alignment screw.
•
Once the black skew is aligned, the mounting screws will be fully tightened, and the next steps of alignment can be completed.
1.
When installing the printhead, visually center the printhead and center the hole in the frame (A).
4-148
Service Manual
2.
Loosely attach the three printhead mounting screws (B).
Warning:
Do not fully tighten the printhead mounting screws until skew has been adjusted.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
Lightly tighten the alignment screw (C).
4.
Feed the ground cable through the hole in bottom leftside frame.
Repair information
4-149
5026
5.
Replace the system board support shield screws (E):
a.
Loosely attach the two mounting screws (E2)
b.
Set the system board support shield in place.
Check that the ribbon mirror motor cable (white) and the printhead cable (bottom) do not rub against the edges of the frame.
c.
Replace the remaining system board support shield screws in the following order:
•
Replace the four screws (E1) from the inner right side of the support shield.
•
Tighten the two mounting screws (E2) to the top of the support shield.
•
Replace the three screws (E3) from the bottom of the support shield, and two screws from the top.
•
Replace the five mounting screws (E4, E5) to the outer left side of the printer.
•
Reattach the printhead ground cable (E6) to the fourth screw from the top.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-150
Service Manual
5026
6.
Replace the system board.
a.
Place the system board in position.
Check that the mirror motor cable and the printhead cable do not rub against the edges of the frame.
b.
Replace the nine screws (F) in the system board in the following order:
•
Loosely attach the four corners (F1) in a clockwise order, beginning with the left top corner.
•
Replace the USB connector screw (F2).
•
Loosely attach the left center side, top center, and right center side (F3).
•
Tighten the top left corner and top right corner.
•
Replace the two screws on the center bottom (F4).
•
Tighten the bottom left and bottom right corners (F1).
Previous
Next
Go Back
F3 F1
F1
F3 F1 F3 F4 F1
c.
Route the cables through the access holes on the right side of the printer.
F2
Repair information
4-151
5026 d.
Replace all the screws (G) from the left side of the printer, including:
•
Ethernet port connector (1 screws)
•
Modem shield (1 screws)
•
Hard disk shield (2 screws)
•
Ground screw (1 screw)
Note:
Be sure to attach the ground wire (H) to the ground screw.
Previous
Next
Go Back
e.
Reconnect all the cables to the system board. Use the diagram below as a guideline.
Warning:
Be careful in reconnecting the printhead ribbon cable (J). It can be damaged and should be handled carefully. A flat ribbon cable can easily be damaged and should be connected gently by hand.
f.
Install the hard disk if appropriate.
7.
Replace the LVPS.
a.
Install the LVPS, and make sure the cable is in the cable guides, and not behind the LVPS.
b.
Reconnect the cable to the LVPS.
c.
Replace the five LVPS mounting screws.
4-152
Service Manual
5026 d.
Reconnect the cable in connector JLVPS1 on the system board.
8.
Replace the right cover.
a.
Slide the right cover up until it locks into position.
Be sure the tab in the top access cover engages the slot in the right cover.
b.
Replace the screw at the bottom of the rear frame cover.
c.
Replace the two screws securing the right cover at the bottom.
d.
Replace the metal screw at the bottom on the inside front cover
e.
Replace the plastic screw at the top on the inside of the front cover.
9.
Replace the left cover, the rear left cover, and the paper tray dust cover.
a.
Place the paper tray dust cover into position.
b.
Slide the cover down until it locks into place.
Be sure the post in the top access cover engages the hole in the left cover, and that the post in the paper tray dust cover engages the hole in the left cover properly.
c.
Replace the taptite screw on the rear frame cover.
d.
Replace the three screws on the left cover.
10.
Replace the rear frame cover.
a.
Replace the rear frame cover.
b.
Tighten the eight screws.
11.
Replace the rear upper cover (two screws).
12.
Reinstall the transfer module with the photoconductor units still attached.
13.
Reconnect the transfer module cable.
14.
Replace the toner cartridges.
15.
Reinstall the fuser.
16.
Close the top access door.
17.
Close the front access door.
18.
Replace the paper tray.
Align the printhead
Note:
The printhead mounting screws should be initially tightened just enough to hold the printhead in the
printer
.
There is one printhead that houses the four color planes. The black plane is aligned to the printer, and the color planes are internally aligned to black. Electrical alignment is done to fine tune the alignment of the color planes to the black plane after the printhead is installed, and black skew is adjusted using the alignment screw.
1.
Plug the electrical cord into the printer.
2.
Plug the electrical cord into the outlet.
3.
Align the printhead skew for black. Go through steps 13 to 18 on
for black on the C746 model, or go through steps 13 to 18 on
for printhead alignment skew for
black on the C748 model
4.
Perform top margin alignment for black. Go to
for top margin alignment for black on the C746
model, or go to
for top margin alignment for black on the C748 model.
5.
Perform bottom margin alignment for black. Go to
for bottom margin alignment for black on the
C746 model, or go to
for bottom margin alignment for black on the C748 model.
6.
Perform left margin alignment for black. Go to
for left margin alignment for black on the C746 model, or go to
for left margin alignment for black on the C748 model.
7.
Perform right margin alignment for black. Go to
for right margin alignment for black on the C746 model, or go to
for right margin alignment for black on the C748 model.
8.
Perform alignment for cyan, yellow, and magenta. Go to
page 4-14
for cyan, yellow, and magenta
alignment on the C746 model, or go to
for cyan, yellow, and magenta alignment on the C748 model.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Repair information
4-153
5026
Right bell crank assembly removal
See
“Right bellcrank assembly, with spring” on page 7-7
1.
Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
.
2.
Remove the C-clip (A).
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
Remove the right bell crank assembly.
A
4-154
Service Manual
Speaker removal
See
for the part number.
1.
Remove the rear upper cover. See
“Rear upper cover removal” on page 4-50
2.
Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
.
3.
Disconnect the speaker connector (A).
4.
Loosen the three screws (B), then remove the speaker.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
B A
System board removal
Warning:
See the system board part number for the model you need on
. This part might contain
CAUTION
This product contains a lithium battery. THERE IS A RISK OF EXPLOSION IF THE BATTERY
IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. Discard used batteries according to the battery manufacturer’s instructions and local regulations.
customer confidential information. See
“Data Security Notice” on page 4-1
for more details. After removing this part, return it to your next level of support so any data can be removed. If the customer requests to keep the part, they must sign a confirmation of memory device retention form.
Warning:
When replacing any one of the following components:
•
Operator panel assembly
•
System board
•
Top access cover assembly
Only replace one component at a time. Replace the required component, and perform a POR before replacing a second component listed above. If this procedure is not followed, the printer will be rendered inoperable.
Repair information
4-155
5026
Warning:
Be careful not to damage the printhead cable when removing the system board.
1.
Remove the left cover and the rear left cover. See
“Left cover removal” on page 4-31
.
2.
Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
3.
Remove the hard disk if one is installed. See
“Hard drive assembly removal” on page 4-114
.
4.
Remove all the screws (A) from the left side of the printer so you can remove the system board, including:
•
USB port connector (1 screw)
•
Ethernet port connector (1 screws)
•
Modem shield (1 screws)
•
Hard disk shield (2 screws)
•
Ground screw (1 screw)
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-156
Service Manual
5026
5.
Disconnect all the cables from the system board.
Warning:
Do not use tools to remove the printhead ribbon cable (B). A flat ribbon cable can be damaged and should be removed gently by hand.
Previous
Next
Go Back
6.
Remove the nine screws (C) from the system board.
7.
Remove the system board.
Repair information
4-157
5026
Installation notes:
1.
Place the system board in position.
Note:
Check that the mirror motor cable and the printhead cable do not rub against the edges of the frame.
2.
Replace the nine screws (A) in the system board in the following order:
•
Loosely attach the four corners (A1) in a clockwise order, beginning with the left top corner.
•
Replace the USB connector screw (A2).
•
Replace the top center, right center side, and left center side (A3).
•
Tighten the top left corner and top right corner.
•
Replace the two screws on the center bottom (A4).
•
Tighten the bottom right and bottom left corners (A1).
A3 A1
Previous
Next
Go Back
A1
A3 A1 A3 A4 A1
3.
Route the cables through the access holes on the right side of the printer.
A2
4-158
Service Manual
4.
Replace all the screws (B) from the left side of the printer, including:
•
Ethernet port connector (1 screws)
•
Modem shield (1 screws)
•
Hard disk shield (2 screws)
•
Ground screw (1 screw)
Note:
Be sure to attach the ground wire (C) to the ground screw.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
5.
Reconnect all the cables to the system board. Use the diagram below as a guideline.
Warning:
Be careful reconnecting the printhead ribbon cable (D). It can be damaged and should be handled carefully. A flat ribbon cable can easily be damaged and should be connected gently by hand.
D
6.
Install the hard disk if appropriate.
7.
Replace the rear frame cover and the left cover.
Repair information
4-159
5026
System board support shield removal
See
“System board support shield” on page 7-11
1.
Remove the system board. See
“System board removal” on page 4-155
.
2.
Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
.
3.
Pull the cables through the access holes on the right side of the printer.
4.
Remove the five mounting screws (A) from the outer left side of the printer.
Note:
Make a note of the attachment of the printhead ground cable (B) to the fourth screw from the top for later installation.
5.
Remove the four screws (C) from the inner right side of the support shield.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-160
Service Manual
6.
Remove the five mounting screws (D) from the top and bottom of the support shield.
Note:
Only the ribbon and mirror motor cables come through the access holes in the system board support shield.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
7.
Lower and remove the support shield. Be careful not to damage the ribbon cable that routes through the bottom frame of the printer.
Installation notes:
1.
Loosely attach the two mounting screws (A).
2.
Set the system board support shield in place.
Note:
Check that the ribbon mirror motor cable (white) and the printhead cable (bottom) do not rub against the edges of the frame.
Repair information
4-161
5026
3.
Replace the remaining system board support shield screws in the following order:
•
Replace the four screws (B) from the inner right side of the support shield.
•
Tighten the two mounting screws (A) to the top of the support shield.
•
Replace the three screws (C) from the bottom of the support shield, and two screws from the top.
•
Replace the five mounting screws (D) to the outer left side of the printer.
Note:
Be sure to connect the printhead ground cable (E) to the fourth screw from the top.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-162
Service Manual
Toner level sensor removal
See
“Toner level sensor” on page 7-13
for the part number.
Note the locations of the toner sensors.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
1.
Remove the HVPS. See
“High-voltage power supply (HVPS) removal” on page 4-115
.
2.
For the upper two sensors:
These sensors are more difficult to reach because the toner is difficult to reach:
Repair information
4-163
5026
It is difficult to press both locking tabs at the same time. Using a spring hook, press the locking tab (A), and disengage the sensor on that side. Press the other locking tab (B), and remove the sensor.
Note:
Use a slight pressure on the cable to keep the first locking tab from relatching, while you disconnect the second locking tab.
Previous
Next
Go Back
For the lower two sensors:
Using a spring hook, press the locking tab (C), and disengage the sensor on that side. Press the other locking tab (D), and remove the sensor.
4-164
Service Manual
Top cover camshaft assembly removal
See
“Top cover camshaft assembly” on page 7-14
1.
Open the front cover access door cover.
2.
Open the top access cover.
3.
Remove the two screws (A) from the links on either side, and disengage the links.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
4.
Rotate the top access cover back, and place a screwdriver in the cable hole in the frame to hold the cover in place.
Repair information
4-165
5026
5.
Remove the fuser. See
.
6.
Remove the top screw (B), and loosen the other screw (C). This will allow you to flex the EP drive.
Previous
Next
Go Back
7.
Remove the two screws (D).
4-166
Service Manual
8.
Rotate the camshaft up using the camshaft actuator handles (E) so you can access the other two screws (F), and remove them.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
9.
Flex the EP drive assembly to remove the right side of the camshaft from the boss (G), and lift to remove the camshaft.
Repair information
4-167
5026
Installation notes:
1.
On the left side, align the mark on the idler gear (A) with the mark on the camshaft gear (B), and slide the camshaft into place, meshing the gears on the left side.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A B
4-168
Service Manual
5026
2.
Rotate the camshaft up using the camshaft actuator handle (C), and make sure the gears on the right side mesh so the first gear tooth of the camshaft aligns with the first two gear teeth of the EP drive actuator rack (D).
Note:
Make sure the actuator rack on the EP drive is all the way back.
3.
Flex the EP drive on the right to seat the end of the shaft into the boss (E) on the EP drive.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4.
Make sure the left and right camshaft brackets are fully seated, and replace the two screws (F).
Repair information
4-169
5026
5.
Rotate the camshaft using the camshaft actuator handle, and replace the two screws (G).
Previous
Next
Go Back
6.
Replace the screw in the EP drive that allowed you to flex the EP drive, and tighten the other screw (see step 6 of the removal).
7.
Replace the top access cover assembly.
8.
Replace the fuser, the cartridges, and close the covers.
4-170
Service Manual
5026
Transfer module removal
See
for the part number.
1.
Disconnect the transfer module cable (A).
2.
Press the two tabs (B) to release the front access cover assembly.
3.
Press the two tabs (C) on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module.
Note:
Leave the photoconductor units on the transport belt when removing.
Warning: To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum, place the transfer module with the photoconductor units on a clean surface. Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a prolonged period of time. Place a clean, dry cloth over the transfer module and photoconductor units until they are required.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
B C
Repair information
4-171
5026
Note:
If you are removing the transfer module to access another part, leave the photoconductor units attached, and you are done. If you need to replace the transport belt, continue with the next step to remove the separate photoconductor units.
4.
Remove the photoconductor units. Lift the right end handle (D) of the photoconductor unit, releasing from the mount.
5.
Lift the unit up and away from the left side of printer, ensuring the left end of the photoconductor is released from the holding pin (E).
Previous
Next
Go Back
Installation note:
•
Place the photoconductor units on the new transport belt, and reinstall.
•
Perform the Color Alignment in the Configuration Menu:
1.
Enter Config Menu (turn off the printer, press and hold buttons 3 and 6, turn the printer on, and release the buttons when the clock graphic displays).
2.
Select Color Alignment from the Configuration Menu.
3.
Select Print Alignment Page.
4.
Select Set A.
5.
Consulting the printed page, follow the instructions on the operator panel to choose the best appearing line numbered 0 through 20 for line A.
6.
Continue selecting the best lines for the sets through Set L.
7.
Select Back ( ) to return to the Configuration main menu, and select Exit Config Menu.
4-172
Service Manual
5026
Transport cable removal
1.
“Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) removal” on page 4-119
.
2.
Remove the transport belt assembly. Leave the photoconductor units in place. See
“Transfer module removal” on page 4-171
.
3.
Disconnect the transport cable from the system board at JTPS1 connector (A).
Note:
The cable connector on the system board end of the cable is smaller than the connector on the front access door, and it may be easier to get that end through the openings.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Repair information
4-173
5026
4.
Extract the cable through the opening in the frame to the right side of the printer (B).
5.
Remove the cable from the five cable restraints (C).
6.
Remove the cable from the three openings in the cable channel (D) on the right side of the front access door.
Previous
Next
Go Back
7.
Remove the six screws (E) from the cable shield.
4-174
Service Manual
8.
Remove the cable through the cable channel (F).
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Transport motor cable removal
1.
Remove the right cover. See
“Right cover removal” on page 4-51
.
2.
Disconnect the cable from the transport motor drive (A).
3.
Disconnect the cable from the transport motor (B).
4.
Remove the cable.
Repair information
4-175
5026
Waste toner assembly removal
Not a FRU.
1.
Press the waste toner release latch (A).
2.
Swing the front of the waste toner assembly away from the printer, and remove.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-176
Service Manual
5026
Waste toner HV contact assembly removal
1.
Disconnect the transfer module cable (A).
2.
Press the two tabs (B) to release the front access cover assembly.
3.
Press the two tabs (C) on either side of the transfer module, and lift out the transfer module.
Note:
Leave the photoconductor units on the transport belt when removing.
Warning: To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum, place the transfer module with the photoconductor units on a clean surface. Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a prolonged period of time. Place a clean, dry cloth over the transfer module and photoconductor units until they are required.
Previous
Next
Go Back
B C
4.
Remove the left cover. See
“Left cover removal” on page 4-31
.
A
Repair information
4-177
5026
5.
Remove the six mounting screws (D) holding the HVPS in place.
Previous
Next
Go Back
D
6.
Release the locking tab (E) from the front, lower corner of the HVPS.
4-178
Service Manual
E
7.
Lay the board to the left.
8.
Disconnect the three top toner level sensor cables (F) from the HVPS.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
F
Repair information
4-179
5026
9.
Remove the two screws (G).
Previous
Next
Go Back
G (18B1236)
4-180
Service Manual
10.
Remove the cleaner shutter actuator (H) from the waste toner HV contact assembly.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
H
Repair information
4-181
5026
11.
Remove the four screws (J), the two screws (K), and the screw (L). Tilt the Waste toner HV contact assembly forward and up to remove it.
Previous
Next
Go Back
J (18B0832) K (88A0313)
L (27S2838)
4-182
Service Manual
5026
Installation note:
Do the following procedures when re-installing the waste tone HV contact assembly:
1.
Remove the fuser.
2.
Remove all four toner cartridges
3.
Remove the four sets of torsion springs. Remove the screw (A) and the spring cap (B) of the appropriate contact spring.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A B
4.
Press the lower half (C,D) of the springs, and remove the springs.
C D
Repair information
4-183
5026
5.
Install the waste toner HV contact assembly into place. Route the toner level sensor cables (E) through the holes in the waste toner HV contact assembly while positioning the assembly. Make sure the aligner shaft worm gear is aligned as shown.
Ribs aligned Rib
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-184
Service Manual
E
6.
Install the seven screws in the order shown below.
Install 3 rd
(
27S2838
)
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Install 4 th
(18B0832)
Install 1 st
(18B0832)
Install 2 nd
(88A0313)
Repair information
4-185
5026
7.
Use two screws (F) to attach the cleaner shutter actuator to the Waste toner HV contact assembly. Make sure the gear aligns as shown.
Ribs aligned Rib
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-186
Service Manual
F (27S2838)
5026
8.
Attach the eight springs (G) to the Waste toner HV contact assembly as shown. Make sure the springs are behind the retainers.
Retainer
Previous
Next
Go Back
G
Repair information
4-187
5026
9.
Install the contact springs. When installing each contact spring, make sure the top half (H) of the spring is under the straight spring (J). This is typical for both types of springs. Also make sure that the bottom half
(K,L) of both springs are compressed and locked by the appropriate locking tabs (M,N).
K J
M
Previous
Next
Go Back
L
N
H
4-188
Service Manual
5026
10.
Connect the three top toner level sensor cables to the HVPS, making sure the cables (O) are attached properly to the retainers (P).
Previous
Next
Go Back
O
11.
Reassemble the rest of the printer.
P
Repair information
4-189
5026
Wireless network antenna removal
1.
Remove the wireless network card. see
“Wireless network card removal” on page 4-191
2.
Disconnect the wireless network antenna cable (A) from the wireless network card.
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
With pliers, squeeze the inner tabs (B), and pull the antenna out.
4.
Pull the cable through, and remove the antenna with the cable.
4-190
Service Manual
Wireless network card removal
1.
Remove the rear frame cover. See
“Rear frame cover removal” on page 4-47
.
2.
Disconnect the wireless cable from the system board at J5 (A), by squeezing the tabs at either end together.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
3.
Remove the two screws (B) that secure the card into place.
Repair information
4-191
5026
4.
Pop
the posts (C) on the card from the sockets (holes) in the system board.
Previous
Next
Go Back
Note:
If you are removing the wireless network card to access another part, leave the antenna attached to the card, and you are done. If you need to replace the wireless network card FRU, continue with the next step to remove the separate wireless network antenna FRU.
5.
Remove the wireless network antenna. See
“Wireless network antenna removal” on page 4-190
4-192
Service Manual
5026
Previous
Option removals
HCIT media tray assembly removal
Note:
When removing the high-capacity input tray (HCIT) media tray assembly, it is not necessary to remove it from the base machine and the caster base.
1.
Open the HCIT media tray assembly (A) until it reaches a stop.
2.
Press the latches (B) on the left and right side of the HCIT tray slides.
Next
Go Back
B
B
3.
Slide the HCIT media tray assembly out of the drawer.
A
Repair information
4-193
5026
HCIT front tray cover removal
Note:
When removing the high-capacity input tray (HCIT) front tray cover, it is not necessary to remove the
HCIT media tray assembly from the base machine and the caster base.
1.
Remove the HCIT media tray assembly. See
“HCIT media tray assembly removal” on page 4-193
.
2.
Remove the six screws (A) securing the HCIT front tray cover to the media tray assembly.
3.
Remove the HCIT front tray cover.
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-194
Service Manual
HCIT rear cover removal
1.
Remove the four screws (A) securing the HCIT rear cover to the drawer.
2.
Remove the HCIT rear cover.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Repair information
4-195
5026
HCIT right cover removal
1.
Carefully remove the printer or multifunction printer from the high-capacity input tray (HCIT) and remove the HCIT from the caster base.
2.
Remove the HCIT media tray assembly. See
“HCIT media tray assembly removal” on page 4-193
.
3.
Remove the HCIT rear cover. See
“HCIT rear cover removal” on page 4-195
4.
Remove the six screws (A) securing the HCIT right cover to the drawer.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
5.
Remove the HCIT right cover.
A
4-196
Service Manual
5026
HCIT left cover removal
1.
Carefully remove the printer or multifunction printer from the high-capacity input tray (HCIT), and remove the HCIT from the caster base.
2.
Remove the HCIT media tray assembly. See
“HCIT media tray assembly removal” on page 4-193
.
3.
Remove the HCIT rear cover. See
“HCIT rear cover removal” on page 4-195
4.
Remove the six screws (A) securing the HCIT left cover to the drawer.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
A
5.
Remove the HCIT left cover.
Repair information
4-197
5026
Feed with bushing roller removal
1.
Remove the high-capacity input tray (HCIT) top plate assembly. See
“Top plate assembly removal” on page 4-206
.
2.
Remove the four screws (A) securing the pass thru sensor bracket to the top plate assembly.
Note:
The bushing may come off when removing the pass thru sensor bracket.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
3.
Remove the screw (B) securing the 46T gear (C) to the top plate assembly.
4.
Remove the 46T gear.
5.
Snap
loose the feed roller (D), and remove.
4-198
Service Manual
B
C
D
HCIT controller board assembly removal
1.
Remove the HCIT right cover. See
“HCIT right cover removal” on page 4-196
2.
Disconnect the seven connectors (A) from the HCIT controller board.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
3.
Remove the ground screw (B) from the HCIT controller board.
4.
Remove the two screws (C) securing the HCIT controller board to the card mount option.
B
5.
Remove the HCIT controller board.
C
Repair information
4-199
5026
HCIT drawer slide assembly removal
The left and right drawer slide assemblies are the same, and only one is in a package. The instructions below are for removing the left slide, but removing the right slide is similar.
1.
Remove the HCIT media tray assembly. See
“HCIT media tray assembly removal” on page 4-193
.
2.
Remove the three screws (A) securing the HCIT drawer slide to the side frame.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
3.
Remove the HCIT drawer slide.
HCIT elevator motor with sensor removal
1.
Remove the HCIT right cover. See
“HCIT right cover removal” on page 4-196
2.
Disconnect the connector (A) from the HCIT controller board.
A
4-200
Service Manual
3.
Release the hooks (B) securing the pass thru sensor to the top plate assembly.
4.
Remove the pass thru sensor from the top plate assembly.
5.
Release the harness from the clamps (C).
6.
Remove the eight screws (D) securing the elevator motor with sensor to the side frame.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
7.
Remove the elevator motor with sensor.
Repair information
4-201
5026
HCIT pick arm roll removal
1.
Remove the high-capacity input tray (HCIT) media tray assembly. See
“HCIT media tray assembly removal” on page 4-193
.
2.
Pull the auto compensator pick arm (A) down.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
3.
Remove the pick arm roll (B) from the pick roll assembly (C).
4.
Repeat for the other pick arm roll (D).
Note:
Always replace the pick arm rolls as pairs.
B C D
Installation notes:
See
“Pick arm roll removal and replacement” on page 4-143
to make sure the pick arm roll is oriented
correctly.
4-202
Service Manual
HCIT slide assembly with spring removal
1.
Remove the HCIT controller board assembly. See
“HCIT controller board assembly removal” on page 4-199
.
2.
Disconnect the two springs (A) from the frame.
Note:
Leave the springs attached to the cam size sensing plate (B) and the actuator switch.
3.
Slide the cam size sensing plate (B) through the access hole in the rear side frame.
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
4.
Remove the media size actuator from the card mount option (C).
5.
Snap
loose the actuator switch (D), and remove.
Repair information
4-203
5026
6.
Remove the four screws (E) securing the card mount option to the frame.
Previous
Next
Go Back
7.
Remove the card mount option.
Installation note:
1.
Place the card mount option into position, and secure it with the four screws.
2.
Reinstall the media size actuator to the card mount option.
3.
Reinstall the actuator switch with spring through the inside of the drawer.
4.
Reinstall the cam size sensing plate with spring through the access hole in the rear side.
5.
Reattach the two springs to the frame.
4-204
Service Manual
5026
Photointerrupter sensor with cable assembly removal
1.
Remove the high-capacity input tray (HCIT) right cover. See
“HCIT right cover removal” on page 4-196
.
2.
Disconnect the photo interrupter sensor cable connector (A) from the HCIT controller board.
Previous
Next
Go Back
A
3.
Turn the drawer rear side down, and use 4.0 mm wrench to remove the four Allen screws (B) securing the counterweight to the rear frame.
Warning:
Do not remove the screws without turning the drawer rear side down first. The counterweight is very heavy; it might fall and cause damage.
B
Repair information
4-205
5026
4.
Remove the screw (C) securing the sensor to the rear frame, and then release the hooks (D).
Note:
Remove the cable from the restraint, and observe the routing for reinstallation.
D
Previous
Next
Go Back
C
5.
Remove the photo interrupter sensor with cable assembly.
Top plate assembly removal
1.
Remove the high-capacity input tray (HCIT) right cover. See
“HCIT right cover removal” on page 4-196
2.
Disconnect the five connectors (A) from the HCIT controller board.
4-206
Service Manual
A
3.
Release the hooks (B) securing the pass thru sensor from the top plate assembly.
4.
Remove the fourteen screws (C) securing the top plate assembly to the frame.
C
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
C
B
C
5.
Remove the top plate assembly.
Repair information
4-207
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
4-208
Service Manual
5. Connector locations
Locations
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Connector locations
5-1
5026
Connectors
System board diagram
JSB1
JBIN1 JFUSER1
JFAN1
JBOR1
JHVPS1
JMIRR1 JBLW1
JCVR1
F5
JLVPS2
JCARTP1
JCARTS1
F9
F7
F8
F10
JCARTS2
JCARTP2
F11
JDVR1
JTPS 19
F14
JOX1
JFDS1
JINT1
JFDPCK1 JTRAY1 JSEC1 JMPFPP1
J7
J19
JT 9
JFMUSB1
JPH1
Previous
Next
Go Back
5-2
Service Manual
System board listing
See
“System board diagram” on page 5-2 .
Connector
F(#)
J2
J5
JBIN1
JBLW1
JBOOT1
JBOR1
JBUSB1
JCARTP1
JCARTS1
JCARTS2
JCVR1
JDVR1
JDX1
JFAN1
JFDPCK1
JFDS1
Description
Fuse
Operator panel I/F
Ethernet connector
Output bin sensor
Cartridge blower
Daughter card boot connector
Black only retract connector
USB device port
Cartridge 1 BLDC motor (upper)
Fuser and cartridge 1 connector
Cartridge 2 BLDC motor (lower)
+25V Cover Open Switch Connector
Daughter card motor driver
Duplex/MFP BDC motor drive
System fan
Feed and pick motor connector
Feed thru sensor connector
JFUSER1
JHVPS1
JLVPS2
JMIRR
JMPFPP1
JOPT1
JPH1
JSB1
JSEC1
JTOPP1
JTPS1
JTRAY1
JUSB1
Fuser motor connector
High voltage power supply
Low voltage power supply
Mirror motor connector
MPF sensor
Option port connector
Printhead connector
Cartridge SB connector
Security jumper connector
Speaker connector
Toner patch sensor connector
Tray 1 input, NMT sensors
USB device port
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Connector locations
5-3
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
5-4
Service Manual
5026
6. Preventive maintenance
Previous
This chapter describes procedures for printer preventive maintenance. Follow these recommendations to help prevent problems and maintain optimum performance.
Next
Safety inspection guide
The purpose of this inspection guide is to aid you in identifying unsafe conditions.
If any unsafe conditions exist, find out how serious the hazard could be and if you can continue before you correct the hazard.
Check the following items:
•
Damaged, missing, or altered parts, especially in the area of the On/Off switch and the power supply
•
Damaged, missing, or altered covers, especially in the area of the top cover and the power supply cover
•
Possible safety exposure from any non-Lexmark attachments
Go Back
Lubrication specifications
Lubricate only when parts are replaced or as needed, not on a scheduled basis. Use of lubricants other than those specified can cause premature failure. Some unauthorized lubricants may chemically attack polycarbonate parts. Use IBM no. 10 oil, P/N 1280443 (Approved equivalents: Mobil DTE27, Shell Tellus 100,
Fuchs Renolin MR30), IBM no. 23 grease (Approved equivalent Shell Darina 1), and grease, P/N 99A0394 to lubricate appropriate areas. Use Nyogel type 774 to lubricate the Fuser Drive Assembly and Nyogel 744 to lubricate the ITU and Cartridge Drive assemblies.
Maintaining the printer
Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.
Cleaning the exterior of the printer
1.
Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the outlet.
CAUTION
SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug the power cord from the outlet, and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2.
Remove paper from the standard exit bin.
3.
Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.
Warning:
Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of the printer.
4.
Wipe only the outside of the printer, making sure to include the standard exit bin.
Warning:
Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.
5.
Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job.
Preventive maintenance
6-1
5026
Cleaning the printhead lenses
Clean the printhead lenses when you encounter print quality problems.
1.
Open the front access door.
Warning:
Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door open for more than 10 minutes.
2.
Remove all four toner cartridges. Do not remove the photoconductor units for this procedure.
3.
Locate the four printhead lenses.
Previous
Next
Go Back
1
4.
Clean the lenses using a can of compressed air.
Warning:
Potential Damage: Do not touch the printhead lenses.
5.
Reinstall the four toner cartridges.
6.
Close the front door.
Moving the printer
CAUTION
POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 54 lbs (24.5kg) and requires two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.
Follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or printer damage:
•
Always use at least two people to lift the printer.
•
Always turn off the printer using the power switch before moving it.
•
Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
•
Remove the printer from the options before moving it.
6-2
Service Manual
7. Parts catalog
5026
Previous
How to use this parts catalog
The following legend is used in the parts catalog:
Asm- index
Part number
Units/mach
Units/
FRU
Description
•
Asm-index
: Identifies the assembly and the item in the diagram. For example, 3-1 indicates Assembly 3 and item number 1 in the table.
•
Part number
: Identifies the unique number that identifies this FRU.
•
Units/mach
: Refers to the number of units actually used in the base machine or product.
•
Units/option
: Refers to the number of units in a particular option. It does not include the rest of the base machine.
•
Units/FRU
: Refers to the number of units packaged together and identified by the part number.
•
NS
: (Not shown) in the Asm-Index column indicates that the part is procurable but is not pictured in the illustration.
•
Model information used in the parts catalog:
Next
Go Back
510
530
530
Abbreviation used
310
330
330
Machine type and model
5026-310
5026-330
5026-330
Printer name
Lexmark C746n
Lexmark C746dn
Lexmark C746dtn
5026-510
5026-530
5026-530
Lexmark C748e
Lexmark C748de
Lexmark C748dte
Description
Network-ready
Network-ready with duplex
Network-ready with duplex and 550 sheet tray
Network-ready with etask touch screen
Network-ready with etask touch screen and duplex
Network-ready with etask touch screen, duplex, and 550 sheet tray
Parts catalog
7-1
5026
Assembly 1: Covers (C746)
5
18
1
2
4
3
8
6
7
9
10
16
17
17
13
12
11
Previous
Next
Go Back
15
7-2
Service Manual
14
5026
Assembly 1: Covers (C746)
Index
1—1
2
P/N
40X7520
40X7660
Units/ mach
1
1
Units/
FRU
1
1
3
4
5
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
14
15
16
17
18
18
18
40X5121
40X7603
40X7966
40X5106
40X5103
40X5993
40X5287
40X5145
40X5105
40X5153
40X5104
40X5994
40X7661
40X5102
40X5119
40X8317
40X6879
40X7335
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Top access cover assembly, 2.3 inch
2.3 inch operator panel buttons parts package
Includes the following:
•
Button kit
•
Sleep button
•
Return button
•
Select button
•
Navigation button
•
Home button
•
LED Lens
Bin full sensor with cable
2.3 inch operator panel assembly with card
Includes the following:
•
LCD Display
•
UICC card
Top access cover parts package
Includes the following:
•
Bin full flag
•
Operator panel display bracket
Output bin extension cover
Rear upper cover
Top cover assembly
Cooling fan filter
Rear frame cover
Rear right cover
Dust cover assembly
Rear left cover
Right cover
Front access door cover assembly
Left cover
Top access cover links (slider cam)
Note: The left link is also available in the top access cover assembly and the right link is also available in the EP drive assembly
Operator panel bezel, C74x (blank logo)
Operator panel bezel, C746n
Operator panel bezel, C746dn and C746dtn
Previous
Next
Go Back
Parts catalog
7-3
5026
Assembly 2: Covers (C748)
6
20
5
1
2
4
3
7
8
9
10
11
12
19
18
18
17
13
14
Previous
Next
Go Back
16
7-4
Service Manual
15
5026
Assembly 2: Covers (C748)
Index
2—1
2
P/N
40X5988
40X5990
Units/ mach
1
1
Units/
FRU
1
1
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
15
16
17
18
19
20
20
20
5
6
3
4
40X5121
40X5989
40X7116
40X7966
40X5106
40X5103
40X5993
40X7703
40X5287
40X5145
40X5153
40X5105
40X5994
40X7661
40X5104
40X5119
40X5102
40X8317
40X6877
40X8259
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Top access cover assembly, 4.3 inch
4.3 inch operator panel buttons parts package
Includes the following:
•
Button kit
•
Home button
•
Sleep button
•
LED Lens
Bin full sensor with cable
UICC card
4.3 inch LCD display
Top access cover parts package
Includes the following
•
Bin full flag
•
Operator panel display bracket
Output bin extension cover
Rear upper cover
Top cover assembly
Speaker
Cooling fan filter
Rear frame cover
Dust cover assembly
Rear right cover
Right cover
Front access door cover assembly
Rear left cover
Top access cover links (slider cam)
Note: The left link is also available in the top access cover assembly and the right link is also available in the EP drive assembly
Left cover
Operator panel bezel, C74x (blank logo)
Operator panel bezel, C748de
Operator panel bezel, C748e
Previous
Next
Go Back
Parts catalog
7-5
5026
Assembly 3: Front
1
Previous
Next
Go Back
13
12
11
F
E
D
C
B
F
10
G
A
9
14
5
4
3
2
7 6
8
7-6
Service Manual
Assembly 3: Front
Index
3—1
1
1
2
3
4
P/N
40X8110
40X8111
40X8112
Units/ mach
1
1
1
Units/
FRU
1
1
1
40X1446
40X5132
1
1
1
1
7
8
5
6
9
10
11
12
13
14
40X6319
40X8308
40X5152
40X5999
40X6496
40X5111
40X5113
40X5995
40X8307
40X1447
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Fuser assembly, 115 V
Fuser assembly, 230 V
Fuser assembly, 100 V
Printer pad, included in screws parts packet (P/N 40X5136)
Right bellcrank assembly, with spring
MP feeder/duplex drive parts packet
Includes the following
•
Retainer release arm
•
Grease packet (Nyogel 744)
•
Washer
•
Duplex engagement gear
•
MP feeder reduction gear
•
MP feeder/duplex reduction gear
•
MP feeder drive cover
Cranklift spring and metal clip
Paper pick assembly
Pick arm roll
Paper tray assembly, 550-sheet
MPF pick arm assembly
Front door parts packet
Includes the following:
•
A—Front access door cap (1)
•
B—Right cable assembly (1)
•
C—Front access cover pivot (1)
•
D—Left cable assembly (1)
•
E—Front access door straps (2)
•
F—Front access door bracket (1)
•
G—Screw
Duplex reference edge assembly
Front door assembly
Transfer module
Left bellcrank assembly, with spring
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Parts catalog
7-7
5026
Assembly 4: Right
7
6
5
4
3
1
2
Previous
Next
Go Back
7-8
Service Manual
Index
5
6
7
4—1
2
3
4
Assembly 4: Right
P/N
40X5290
40X5991
40X5126
40X8309
40X5128
40X5127
40X5998
Units/ mach
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Units/
FRU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
EP drive assembly
Low-voltage power supply
Motor driver card
MP feeder/duplex motor
24 V interlock switch
5 V interlock switch
MPF paper present sensor with cable
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Parts catalog
7-9
5026
Assembly 5: Rear
Previous
Next
Go Back
7-10
Service Manual
5026
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
Index
5—1
2
3
3
NS
NS
NS
NS
Assembly 5: Rear
P/N
40X5123
40X5107
40X5996
40X7953
40X0269
40X0288
40X0301
40X3141
Units/ mach
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Units/
FRU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
40X0271
40X4596
40X0273
40X0303
40X1774
40X0275
40X3609
40X1792
40X1773
40X1772
40X1791
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Printhead assembly
System board support shield
System board, 4.3 inch model
System board, 2.3 inch model
Power cord—USA, Canada, Bolivia, Peru
Power cord (8 ft.)—Argentina
Power cord (8 ft.)—Australia, New Zealand
Power cord (8 ft.)—Austria, Belgium, Catalan, Czechoslovakia, Finland,
France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Netherlands, Norway,
Paraguay, Poland, Portugal, Russia, Spain, Sweden, Turkey, United
Kingdom
Power cord (8 ft.)—Hong Kong, Ireland, United Kingdom
Power cord (8 ft.)—Brazil
Power cord (8 ft.)—Chile, Uruguay
Power cord (8 ft.)—China
Power cord (8 ft.)—Denmark, Finland, Norway, Sweden
Power cord (8 ft.)—Israel
Power cord (8 ft.)—Japan
Power cord (8 ft.)—Korea
Power cord (8 ft.)—South Africa
Power cord (8 ft.)—Switzerland
Power cord (8 ft.)—Taiwan
Previous
Next
Go Back
Parts catalog
7-11
5026
Assembly 6: Left
(4 places) (4 places)
1A
1B
1C
(4 places)
(4 places)
1F
(4 places) 1G
(4 places)
1E
5
4
3
1D
(8 places)
6
2
Previous
Next
Go Back
7-12
Service Manual
Assembly 6: Left
Index
6—1
P/N
40X5137
Units/ mach
1
Units/
FRU
1
4
5
2
3
6
40X7159
40X5307
40X5129
40X1416
40X8373
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Contact springs kit
Includes the following:
•
A—Torsion PCD contact spring
•
B—Torsion CR contact spring
•
C—Contact spring cap
•
D—Charge roll contact spring
•
E—HVPS TAR contact spring
•
F—HVPS doctor/developer contact spring
•
G—HVPS Db contact spring
•
Screw
Auger shaft and gear parts pack
Waste toner HV contact assembly
High-voltage power supply
Toner level sensor
Toner cartridge contacts
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Parts catalog
7-13
5026
Assembly 7: Top
3
1
2
4
Previous
Next
Go Back
Index
7—1
2
3
4
P/N
40X5122
40X5109
40X5130
40X5108
Units/ mach
1
1
1
1
Units/
FRU
1
1
1
1
Description
Color-On-Demand assembly
Cooling fan
Top cover camshaft assembly
Cartridge cooling fan
7-14
Service Manual
Assembly 8: Cable parts packet
Index
NS
P/N
40X7973
Units/ mach
1
Units/
FRU
1
NS 40X6351 1 1
Description
Cables parts packet, including
•
Duplex/MPF motor cable
•
Fuser AC cable
•
Fuser DC cable
•
HVPS cable
•
Transport cable
•
Fuser and cartridge 1 motor cable
•
Cartridge 2 and 3 motor cable
•
USB-A cable
•
550 option cable
•
Transport motor cable
•
Speaker cable
•
UICC cable (for single-function)
•
UICC cable (for multi-function)
•
Operator panel ground cable (for single-function)
•
Operator panel ground cable (for multi-function)
Motor driver cable
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Parts catalog
7-15
5026
Assembly 9: Optional 550-sheet media drawer and tray
1
Previous
Next
Go Back
3
2
Index
9—1
2
3
P/N
40X5140
40X5168
40X5141
Units/ opt
1
2
1
Units/
FRU
1
2
1
Description
550-sheet tray option (drawer and tray assembly)
Pick arm roll, 550-sheet tray
550-sheet tray assembly
7-16
Service Manual
Assembly 10: Optional special media tray assembly
1
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
3
2
Index P/N
10—1 40X5142
2 40X5152
3 40X5143
Units/ opt.
1
2
1
Units/
FRU
1
2
1
Description
Special media assembly, including tray
Pick arm roll, 550-sheet drawer
Special media tray assembly
Parts catalog
7-17
5026
Assembly 11: Optional high-capacity input option (HCIT)
1
2
3
4
14
5
6
7
Previous
Next
Go Back
12
13
10
9
8
11
7-18
Service Manual
Assembly 11: Optional high-capacity input option (HCIT)
Index P/N
9
10
11
12
13
14
7
8
5
6
11—1 40X5157
2 40X5168
3
4
40X5156
40X5149
40X4585
40X5159
40X4587
40X5147
40X5155
40X5158
40X4593
40X5146
40X5144
40X5148
Units/ option
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
Units/
FRU
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
Description
Top plate assembly
HCIT pick arm roll
Feed with bushing
HCIT rear cover
Tray latch with spring
HCIT controller card assembly
Slide assembly with springs
HCIT right cover
Elevator motor with sensor
Photointerrupter sensor with cable assembly
HCIT drawer slide assembly
HCIT front tray cover
HCIT paper drawer tray assembly
HCIT left cover
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
Parts catalog
7-19
5026
Assembly 12: Options and features
Index
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
NS
P/N
40X5317
40X5315
40X5318
40X5136
Units/ opt
1
1
1
1
Units/
FRU
1
1
1
1
40X5316
40X8332
40X1367
40X1368
40X1592
40X1593
40X1594
40X8321
40X8322
40X7062
40X7063
40X8324
40X8325
40X8327
40X8328
40X8359
40X8478
40X5301
40X5302
40X5303
40X5704
40X5969
40X5971
40X5970
40X5972
40X7051
40X4826
40X4827
40X4823
40X4819
40X7058
7377200
40X5281
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Parts packet, ISP thumbscrew and standoff
Wireless ISP thumbscrew
ISP thumbscrew
Parts packet, screw (contains each screw used in the printer, with the exception of the parts specifically called out.) See
“Screw and retainer identification table” on page 4-3
.
256 MB SDRAM
512 MB SDRAM
1024 MB SDRAM
256 MB flash card
Korean font card
Traditional Chinese font card
Simplified Chinese font card
Japanese font card
Lexmark PrintCryption™ card
MarkNet™ N8120 10/1000
MarkNet N8130 10/100 fiber
Parallel 1284-B interface card adapter
Serial interface card adapter
160 GB hard drive assembly
Option drawer relocation kit
High-capacity input tray (HCIT) relocation kit
14-pin JST cable assembly for ISP interface cable
C74x relocation kit
10 ft. parallel cable, ROHS
2 meter USB cable, ROHS
Print server 4-port USB
Print server 1-port USB
Print server parallel
C746x forms + barcode
C748x forms + barcode
Wireless US 802.11b/g/n ISP adapter
Wireless EU 802.11b/g/n ISP adapter
C746x IPDS SCS TNe card
C748x IPDS SCS TNe card
C746x Prescribe card
C748x Prescribe card
Caster front wheel
Caster base
Previous
Next
Go Back
7-20
Service Manual
Index
Numerics
1xx service error codes
–
24 V interlock switch parts catalog
theory
2xx paper jam codes
–
clearing jams
error jam locations
3x–8x attendance messages
–
5 V interlock switch
parts catalog
theory
9xx service error codes
–
31.xx—Cartridge errors service check
A
alignment diagnostics menu
Auto Align Adj
B
bellcrank left bellcrank
parts catalog
right bellcrank
bezel parts catalog
bin full sensor
flag removal
parts catalog
black retract, see color on demand assembly
Button Test
buttons
parts catalog (operator panel)
C
cables cartridge motor 1/fuser
cartridge motor 2/3 cable
HVPS cable
5026
Previous motor driver cable
MP feeder/duplex motor
operator panel usb coonector cable
option cable
transport cable
transport motor cable
cartridge cooling fan parts catalog
cartridge motor
,
,
cartridge motor 1/fuser cable
cartridge motor 2/3 cable, removal
Color Alignment
Color Lock Out
Color On Demand (COD) assembly color lock out
parts catalog
Color Trapping
configuration menu
Action for Prompts
Auto Align Adj
available tests
Clear Custom Status
Demo Mode
Disk Encryption
Energy Conserve
Enforce Color Order
Event Log
Factory Defaults
Font Sharpening
Jobs on Disk
Menu Settings Page
Motor Calibration
Panel Menus
PPDS Emulation
Index
I-1
Next
Go Back
5026
Print Quality Pages
USB Speed
Wipe Disk
contact springs parts catalog
cooling fan
parts catalog
covers
parts catalog
D
dead printer service check
defaults
EP Defaults
factory defaults
deflector assembly parts catalog
Demo Mode
diagnostics menu
available tests
Device Tests
Disk Test/Clean
Flash Test
Duplex Tests
Left Margin (duplex)
Print Test (duplex)
EP Setup
DC Charge Adjust
EP Defaults
Event Log
Display Log
Print Log
Hardware Tests
Button Test
DRAM Test
Serial 1 Wrap
USB HS Test Mode
Motor Tests
Align Motor Test
Parallel 1 Strobe Adjustment
Print Tests
I-2
Service Manual input source tests
Prt Quality Pgs
Printer Setup
Configuration ID
Engine Setting 1–4
Model Name
Reset Color Calibration
Serial Number
Printhead Tests
Servo Laser Test
Bottom Margin
,
,
,
Skew
Reports
Sensor Tests
Disk Encryption
Disk Test/Clean
DRAM Test
duplex duplex motor assembly removal
duplex reference edge guide assembly
gear and housing removal
MFP/duplex motor assembly parts catalog
motor assembly removal
MPF/duplex motor cable removal
Print Test
Quick Test
theory
Top Margin
Duplex Gloss
duplex reference edge guide
E
electrical interlock
24 V interlock switch
5 V interlock switch
electrophotographic (EP) drive assembly parts catalog
electrophotographic (EP) process
charging
cleaning
developing
main components
Previous
Next
Go Back
transferring
engine setting
Envelope Prompts
EP Defaults
error codes and messages
1xx service error codes
2xx paper jams
3x–8x attendance messages
9xx service error codes
ESD-sensitive parts
event log configuration menu
diagnostics mode
exit sensor
F
Factory Defaults fans
Flash Test
front access cover assembly
front door assembly left front cable removal
parts catalog
right front cable removal
fuser
H
hard disk assembly parts catalog
hard drive assembly parts catalog
high-capacity input tray (HCIT) controller board assembly
drawer slide assembly
feed with bushing roller
front tray cover
media tray assembly
photointerrupter sensor with cable assembly
rear cover
slide assembly with spring
5026
top plate assembly
high-voltage power supply (HVPS)
parts catalog
I
input sensor
J
jams clearing jams
common messages (diagram)
paper jam messages
paper path
Jobs on Disk
L
left cover parts catalog
locked cover
low-voltage power supply (LVPS) parts catalog
lubrication specifications
M
mechanical drive
paper pick mechanism drive
photoconductor unit/toner cartridge drive
transfer belt drive
media tray
,
media tray assembly parts catalog
,
Specia media, parts catalog
Menu Settings Page configuration menu
user menus
menus administrative menus
Mirror Motor Test
Model Name
Motor Calibration Test
,
motor driver
card removal
MPF paper present sensor
multipurpose feeder (MPF)
Index
I-3
Previous
Next
Go Back
5026
gear and housing removal
paper present sensor removal
parts catalog
pick removal
N
network SE menu
network service check
O
operator panel bezel
indicator light
parts catalog
display blank, 5 beeps, LED off
display blank, 5 beeps, LED on one or more buttons fail
stripes display, distorded display, and other display issues
usb coonector cable removal
option cable, removal
options
options and features
P
Panel Menus
Panel Test
paper jams error locations
paper path diagram
main components
paper sensing
print media transport
paper pick assembly
paper pick mechanism parts catalog
Paper Prompts
paper sensing
paper exit/duplex entry sensor and bin full flag
paper pick sensor
paper support (output bin extension cover)
paper tray dust cover, removal
Par 1 Strobe Adj parts catalog
cable parts packet
Perm Page Count
photoconductor unit
parts not to be touched
transportation/storage
power cords
power-on self test (POST) sequence
PPDS Emulation
print quality background
blurred or fuzzy print
half-color page
insufficient fusing
missing image at edge
mottle (2–5mm speckles)
narrow vertical line
random marks
residual image
solid color page
vertical banding
printer pads parts catalog
printhead parts catalog
verification
printhead alignment
Prt Color Pg Count
Prt Mono Pg Count
Prt Quality Pgs configuration menu
Q
Quick Disk Test
Quick Test (duplex)
R
rear shield (rear frame cover)
removal and cleaning precautions
removals
24 V interlock switch
5 V interlock switch cable
bin full sensor flag
cartridge cooling fan
I-4
Service Manual
Previous
Next
Go Back
cartridge motor 1/fuser cable
cartridge motor 2/3 cable
color on demand assembly
contact springs
covers front access cover assembly
left cover
operator panel bezel
operator panel buttons
output bin extension cover
paper tray dust cover
rear right cover
right cover
top access cover assembly
electrophotographic (EP) process drive assembly
front door assembly
front door assembly restraint cable (left)
front door assembly restraint cable (right)
hard drive assembly
high-voltage power supply (HVPS)
high-voltage power supply cable
left bellcrank
low voltage power supply (LVPS)
multipurpose feeder (MPF) paper present sensor
multipurpose feeder (MPF) pick
multipurpose feeder (MPF)/duplex motor cable
multipurpose feeder/duplex gear and housing
multipurpose feeder/duplex motor assembly
operator panel usb coonector cable
option cable
options
HCIT controller board assembly
HCIT drawer slide assembly
HCIT elevator motor with sensor
HCIT feed with bushing roller
HCIT front tray cover
HCIT left cover
HCIT media tray assembly
HCIT photointerrupter sensor with cable assembly
HCIT pick arm roll
HCIT rear cover
HCIT right cover
HCIT slide assembly with spring
paper pick mechanism assembly
photoconductor unit
precautions
printer pad
printhead
right bellcrank
system board support shield
toner level sensor
top cover camshaft assembly
transfer module
transport cable
transport motor cable
waste toner assembly
wireless network antenna
wireless network card
Reset Color Cal
Reset Fuser Cnt
restraint cable, removal
,
right cover, removal
S
safety information
safety inspection guide
screw and retainer identification table
SE menu
sensor tests
sensors bin full
exit sensor service check
input sensor service check
theory
serial number
service checks
111.xx–114.xx—printhead error
120.xx—fuser error
140.xx—Autocomp motor error
142.xx,—motor error
142.xx—fuser motor error
146.xx, 148.xx—motor error
160.xx, 161.xx-motor error
162.xx, 163.xx-motor error
24 V interlock switch
31.xx—Cartirdge errors
5 V interlock switch
906.01–90604—motor error
920.01—POST error
920.03, 920.25-transfer module
5026
Index
I-5
Previous
Next
Go Back
5026
920.04—POST error
920.05—POST error
920.06—Input sensor
920.07—POST error
920.08—Exit sensor
920.09—POST error
920.10—POST error
920.11—POST error
920.12—POST error
920.13—POST error
920.14—POST error
920.15, 920.20—POST error
920.16—POST error
920.17—POST error
920.18—POST error
920.19—POST error
920.21—POST error
920.23—POST error
920.27, 920.28, 920.29-POST error
920.32—MPF paper present sensor not connected
925.01, 925.03, 925.05—fan error
925.02, 925.04, 925.06—blower error
945.xx, 947.xx—Transfer roll error
950.00–950.29-EPROM mismatch
956.xx-system board failure
bubble sensor
print quality
Servo Laser Test
skew
,
,
duplex skew test
printhead alignment
,
specifications dimensions
start
Static Sensor Tests symptoms
print quality
printer
system board parts catalog
system board support shield parts catalog
T
test pages print quality test pages
,
quick test (duplex)
theory electrical interlock
24 V interlock switch
I-6
Service Manual
5 V interlock switch
electrophotographic (EP) process charging
cleaning
exposing
fusing
main components
transferring
electrophotographic process (EP)
paper path
main components
paper sensing
print media transport
toner density calibration
toner level sensor parts catalog
toner sensors
,
,
top access cover assembly parts catalog
top cover assembly parts catalog
top cover camshaft assembly parts catalog
transfer belt, part of transfer module
transfer module
transfer roll
transport cable
transport motor cable, removal
tray 1 missing
U
USB Speed
W
waste toner assembly, removal
wireless network antenna
wireless network card
Previous
Next
Go Back
5026
Part number index
Previous
P/N
40X0269
40X0271
40X0273
40X0275
40X0288
40X0301
40X0303
40X1367
40X1368
40X1416
40X1446
40X1447
40X1592
40X1593
40X1594
40X1772
40X1773
40X1774
40X1791
40X1792
40X3141
40X5109
40X5111
40X5113
40X5119
40X5121
40X5122
40X5123
40X5126
40X5127
40X5128
40X5129
40X5130
40X5132
40X5136
40X5136
40X3609
40X4585
40X4587
40X4593
40X4596
40X4819
40X4823
40X4826
40X4827
40X5102
40X5103
40X5104
40X5105
40X5106
40X5107
40X5108
Description Page
Power cord—USA, Canada, Bolivia, Peru
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Power cord (8 ft.)—Hong Kong, Ireland, United Kingdom
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Power cord (8 ft.)—Chile, Uruguay
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Power cord (8 ft.)—Israel
Power cord (8 ft.)—Argentina
Power cord (8 ft.)—Australia, New Zealand
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Power cord (8 ft.)—China
10 ft. parallel cable, ROHS
2 meter USB cable, ROHS
Toner level sensor
Right bellcrank assembly, with spring
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7-7
Left bellcrank assembly, with spring
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7-7
Print server 4-port USB
Print server 1-port USB
Print server parallel
Power cord (8 ft.)—Switzerland
Power cord (8 ft.)—South Africa
Power cord (8 ft.)—Denmark, Finland, Norway, Sweden
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Power cord (8 ft.)—Taiwan
Power cord (8 ft.)—Korea
Power cord (8 ft.)—Austria, Belgium, Catalan, Czechoslovakia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary,
Ireland, Italy, Netherlands, Norway, Paraguay, Poland, Portugal, Russia, Spain, Sweden, Turkey, United
Kingdom
Power cord (8 ft.)—Japan
Tray latch with spring
Slide assembly with springs
HCIT drawer slide assembly
Power cord (8 ft.)—Brazil
Serial interface card adapter
Parallel 1284-B interface card adapter
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MarkNet N8120 10/1000
MarkNet N8130 10/100 fiber
Left cover
7-3
,
7-5
Rear upper cover
7-3
,
7-5
Rear left cover
7-3
,
7-5
Rear right cover
7-3
,
7-5
Output bin extension cover
7-3
,
7-5
System board support shield
Cartridge cooling fan
Cooling fan
Front door parts packet
7-7
Duplex reference edge assembly
7-7
Top access cover links (slider cam)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7-3
,
7-5
Bin full sensor with cable
7-5
Color-On-Demand assembly
Printhead assembly
Motor driver card
7-9
5 V interlock switch
7-9
24 V interlock switch
7-9
High-voltage power supply
Top cover camshaft assembly
MP feeder/duplex drive parts packet
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7-7
Parts packet, screw
Printer pad (included in parts packet)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7-7
Next
Go Back
Part number index
I-7
5026
40X6496
40X6877
40X6879
40X7051
40X7058
40X7062
40X7063
40X7116
40X7159
40X7335
40X7520
40X5704
40X5969
40X5970
40X5971
40X5972
40X5988
40X5989
40X5991
40X5993
40X5994
40X5995
40X5996
40X5998
40X5999
40X6319
40X6351
40X5157
40X5158
40X5159
40X5168
40X5168
40X5281
40X5287
40X5290
40X5301
40X5302
40X5303
40X5307
40X5315
40X5316
40X5317
40X5318
40X5137
40X5140
40X5141
40X5142
40X5143
40X5144
40X5145
40X5146
40X5147
40X5148
40X5149
40X5152
40X5152
40X5153
40X5155
40X5156
Contact springs kit
Option tray assembly, 550-sheet option (includes tray)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
550-sheet tray assembly
Special media assembly, including tray
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Special media tray assembly
HCIT tray assembly
Rear frame cover
7-3
,
7-5
HCIT front tray cover
HCIT right cover
HCIT left cover
HCIT rear cover
Pick arm roll
7-7
Pick arm roll, 250-sheet drawer
Dust cover assembly
7-3
,
7-5
Elevator motor with sensor
Feed with bushing
Top plate assembly
Photointerrupter sensor with cable assembly
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
HCIT controller card assembly
HCIT pick arm roll
Pick arm roll, 550-sheet tray
High-capacity input tray (HCIT) relocation kit
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Cooling fan filter
7-3
,
7-5
EP drive assembly
7-9
256 MB SDRAM
512 MB SDRAM
1024 MB SDRAM
Waste toner HV contact assembly
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Wireless ISP thumbscrew
14-pin JST cable assembly for ISP interface cable
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Parts packet, ISP thumbscrew and standoff
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ISP thumbscrew
256 MB flash card
Korean font card
Simplified Chinese font card
Traditional Chinese font card
Japanese font card
Top access cover assembly, 4.3 inch
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7-5
UICC card
7-5
Low-voltage power supply
7-9
Top cover assembly
7-3
,
7-5
Right cover
7-3
,
7-5
Front Door assembly
7-7
System board, 4.3 inch model
MPF Paper Present Sensor
7-9
Paper tray assembly, 550-sheet
7-7
Cranklift spring and metal clip
7-7
Motor driver cable
MPF pick arm assembly
7-7
Operator panel bezel, 530
7-5
Operator panel bezel, 310
7-3
Lexmark PrintCryption card
160 GB hard drive assembly
Wireless US 802.11b/g/n ISP adapter
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Wireless EU 802.11b/g/n ISP adapter
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Operator panel assembly
7-5
Auger shaft and gear parts pack
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Operator panel bezel, 330
7-3
Top access cover assembly, 2.3 inch
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7-3
I-8
Service Manual
Previous
Next
Go Back
5026
40X7603
40X7660
40X7661
40X7703
40X7953
40X7966
40X7973
40X8110
40X8111
40X8112
40X8259
40X8307
40X8308
40X8309
40X8317
40X8321
40X8322
40X8324
40X8325
40X8327
40X8328
40X8332
40X8359
40X8373
40X8478
7377200
Operator panel assembly with card, 310
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7-3
2.3 inch operator panel buttons parts package
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7-3
Front access door cover assembly
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7-3
,
7-5
Speaker
7-5
System board, 2.3 inch model
Top access cover parts package
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7-3
,
7-5
Cables parts packet
Fuser assembly, 115 V
7-7
Fuser assembly, 230 V
7-7
Fuser assembly, 100 V
7-7
Operator panel bezel, 510
7-5
Transfer module
7-7
Paper pick assembly
7-7
MP feeder/duplex motor
7-9
Operator panel bezel, C74x (blank logo)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7-3
,
7-5
C746x forms + barcode
C748x forms + barcode
C746x IPDS SCS TNe card
C748x IPDS SCS TNe card
C746x Prescribe card
C748x Prescribe card
C74x relocation kit
Caster front wheel
Toner cartridge contacts
Caster base
Option drawer relocation kit
Previous
Next
Go Back
Part number index
I-9
5026
Previous
Next
Go Back
I-10
Service Manual
advertisement
Key Features
- Laser Colour
- 1200 x 1200 DPI
- A4 35 ppm
- Duplex printing Direct printing
- Ethernet LAN
- LCD Built-in display
- Maximum duty cycle: 85000 pages per month
- Total number of input trays: 3 Total input capacity: 1200 sheets Total output capacity: 300 sheets
- Internal memory: 512 MB 800 MHz